summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-chicago/biblatex-chicago15.tex
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
Diffstat (limited to 'Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-chicago/biblatex-chicago15.tex')
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-chicago/biblatex-chicago15.tex9414
1 files changed, 0 insertions, 9414 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-chicago/biblatex-chicago15.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-chicago/biblatex-chicago15.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 4e6d3952e76..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-chicago/biblatex-chicago15.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9414 +0,0 @@
-%
-% This file documents the biblatex-chicago package, which allows users
-% of the biblatex package to format references according to the
-% Chicago Manual of Style, 15th edition.
-%
-\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
-\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
-\usepackage{textcomp}
-\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
-\usepackage[american]{babel}
-\usepackage[autostyle]{csquotes}
-\usepackage{vmargin}
-\setpapersize{A4}
-\setmarginsrb{1.65in}{.9in}{1.75in}{.6in}{0pt}{0pt}{12pt}{24pt}
-\setlength{\marginparwidth}{1in}
-\usepackage[colorlinks,urlcolor=blue,linkcolor=blue]{hyperref}
-\usepackage[osf]{mathpazo}
-\usepackage[scaled]{helvet}
-\usepackage[pdftex]{xcolor}
-%\usepackage[dvips]{xcolor}
-\newcommand{\mycolor}[1]{\textcolor[HTML]{228B22}{#1}}
-\usepackage{multicol}
-% Some generic settings.
-\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash #1}}
-\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
-\newcommand{\mymarginpar}[1]{\marginpar{\flushright#1}}
-\newcommand{\colmarginpar}[1]{\mymarginpar{\mycolor{#1}}}
-\newcommand{\mybigspace}{\vspace{\baselineskip}}
-\newcommand{\mylittlespace}{\vspace{.5\baselineskip}}
-\makeatletter
-\renewcommand{\section}{\@startsection
- {section}%
- {1}%
- {0mm}%
- {\baselineskip}%
- {\baselineskip}%
- {\sffamily\normalsize\bfseries}}%
-\renewcommand{\subsection}{\@startsection
- {subsection}%
- {1}%
- {0mm}%
- {\baselineskip}%
- {.5\baselineskip}%
- {\sffamily\normalsize\bfseries}}%
-\renewcommand{\subsubsection}{\@startsection
- {subsubsection}%
- {1}%
- {0mm}%
- {\baselineskip}%
- {.5\baselineskip}%
- {\sffamily\normalsize\bfseries}}%
-\makeatother
-\begin{document}
-\begin{center}
- \sffamily\large\bfseries The biblatex-chicago package: \\
- 15th-edition style files for biblatex
-
-\vspace{.3\baselineskip}
-\sffamily\normalsize\bfseries David Fussner\qquad Version 0.9.9g (beta) \\
-\href{mailto:djf027@googlemail.com}{djf027@googlemail.com}\\ \today
-
-\end{center}
-\setcounter{tocdepth}{3}
-\begin{multicols}{2}
-\footnotesize
-\tableofcontents
-\end{multicols}
-\normalsize
-\vspace{-.5\baselineskip}
-\section{Notice}
-\label{sec:Notice}
-
-\textbf{This file documents the \textsf{biblatex} style files
- implementing the 15th edition of \emph{The Chicago Manual of Style}.
- This edition has been superseded by the 16th edition, documented in
- \textsf{biblatex-chicago.pdf}. There may still be some users,
- however, who wish to continue using the 15th-edition styles, so I am
- continuing to provide them, though I am now marking them as
- \enquote{strongly deprecated,} and will soon mark them as
- \enquote{obsolete.} I have included very few fixes in this release
- cycle, enough so that my test files do still compile correctly. The
- main reason to continue using these files is perhaps a desire not to
- interrupt a work-in-progress. Given how little attention they are
- currently receiving, however, I encourage all users of both the
- \textsf{authordate15} and \textsf{notes15} styles to upgrade to the
- current release of the 16th-edition styles as soon as may be
- practicable. If the changes to the author-date style's treatment of
- titles has thus far discouraged you from upgrading, please be aware
- that the new \mycolor{\textsf{authordate-trad}} style retains the
- traditional Chicago sentence-style capitalization (and absence of
- quotation marks) in titles while in all other respects adhering to
- the 16th-edition specification. I can't promise that switching to a
- newer style will be entirely painless, but if you read through the
- RELEASE file you'll find that it won't, under ordinary
- circumstances, require Herculean efforts. \mylittlespace \\ The
- package remains beta software. If it seems like it could be of use
- to you, yet it doesn't do something you need/want it to do, please
- feel free to let me know, and of course any suggestions for solving
- problems more elegantly or accurately would be most welcome.}
-
-\mylittlespace\textbf{Important Note:} If you have used
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago} before, please make sure you have read the
-RELEASE file that came with the package. It details the changes
-you'll need to make to your .bib database in order for it to work
-properly with this release. If you are new to these styles, please
-read on.
-
-\section{Quickstart}
-\reversemarginpar
-
-%\enlargethispage{-3\baselineskip}
-
-The \textsf{biblatex-chicago} package is designed for writers who wish
-to use \LaTeX\ and \textsf{biblatex}, and who either want or need to
-format their references according to one of the specifications defined
-by the \emph{Chicago Manual of Style}. This package includes both the
-\emph{Manual's} \enquote{author-date} system, favored by many
-disciplines in the sciences and social sciences, and its
-\enquote{notes \&\ bibliography} style, generally favored in the
-humanities. The latter code produces a full reference in a first
-footnote, shorter references in subsequent notes, and a full reference
-in the bibliography. Some authors prefer to use the shorter note form
-even for the first occurrence, relying on the bibliography to provide
-the full information. This, too, is supported by the code. The
-author-date style produces a short, in-text citation inside
-parentheses --- (Author Year) --- keyed to a list of references where
-entries start with the same name and year.
-
-\mylittlespace The documentation you are reading covers both of these
-Chicago styles and their variants. Much of what follows is relevant
-to all users, but I have decided, after some experimentation, to keep
-the instructions for the two styles separate, at least in
-sections~\ref{sec:Spec} and \ref{sec:authdate}. Information provided
-under one style will often duplicate that found under the other, but
-efficiency's loss should, I hope, be clarity's gain, and much of what
-you learn using one style will be applicable without alteration to the
-other. Throughout the documentation, any \mycolor{green} text
-\colmarginpar{\textsf{New!}} indicates something \mycolor{new} in this
-release.
-
-\mylittlespace Here's a list of things you will need in order to use
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago}:
-
-\begin{itemize}{}{}
-\item Philipp Lehman's \textsf{biblatex} package, of course! You
- should use the latest version(s) --- 1.7 or 2.9a --- as those
- versions have been tested more thoroughly than any other, meaning
- that these style files may well not function properly with earlier
- iterations of \textsf{biblatex}. Lehman's tools require several
- packages, and he strongly recommends several more:
- \begin{itemize}{}{}
- \item e-\TeX\ (required)
- \item \textsf{etoolbox} --- available from CTAN (required)
- \item \textsf{keyval} --- a standard package (required)
- \item \textsf{ifthen} --- a standard package (required)
- \item \textsf{url} --- a standard package (required)
- \item \textsf{babel} --- a standard package (\emph{strongly}
- recommended)
- \item \textsf{csquotes} --- available from CTAN (recommended).
- Please upgrade to the latest version of \textsf{csquotes} (5.1b).
- \item \textsf{bibtex8} --- a replacement for \textsc{Bib}\TeX, which
- can, with the right com\-mand-line switches, process very large
- .bib files. It also does the right thing when alphabetizing
- non-ASCII entries. It is available from CTAN, but please be aware
- that this database parser no longer suffices if you are using the
- Chicago author-date style with any version of \textsf{biblatex}
- from version 1.5 onwards. For that style you must use the
- following:
- \item \textsf{Biber} --- the next-generation \textsc{Bib}\TeX\
- replacement, which is available from SourceForge. You should use
- the latest version, 1.9, to work with \textsf{biblatex} 2.9a, and
- it is required for users who are either using the author-date
- style or processing a .bib file in Unicode. See
- \textsf{cms15-dates-sample.pdf} for more details.
- \end{itemize}
-\item The line:
- \begin{quote}
- \cmd{usepackage[\mycolor{notes15}]\{biblatex-chicago\}}
- \end{quote}
- in your document preamble to load the 15th-edition notes \&\
- bibliography style, or the line:
- \begin{quote}
- \cmd{usepackage[\mycolor{authordate15},backend=biber]\{biblatex-chicago\}}
- \end{quote}
- to load the 15th-edition author-date style. Any other options you
- usually pass to \textsf{biblatex} can be given to
- \textsf{biblatex-chicago} instead, but loading it this way sets up a
- number of other parameters automatically. You can also load the
- package via the traditional \cmd{usepackage\{biblatex\}}, adding
- \mycolor{\texttt{style=chicago-notes15}} or
- \mycolor{\texttt{style=chicago-authordate15}}, but these are mainly
- for those who wish to set much of the low-level formatting of their
- document themselves. Please see sections~\ref{sec:loading} and
- \ref{sec:loading:auth} below for a fuller discussion of the issues
- involved here.
-\item You can use
- \cmd{usepackage[\mycolor{notes15},short]\{biblatex-chicago\}} to get
- the short note format even in the first reference of a notes \&\
- bibliography document, letting the bibliography provide the full
- reference.
-\item If you are accustomed to using the \textsf{natbib} compatibility
- option with \textsf{biblatex}, then you can continue to do so with
- \textsf{biblatex-chicago}. If you are using
- \cmd{usepackage\{biblatex-chicago\}} to load the package, then the
- option must be the plain \texttt{natbib} rather than
- \texttt{natbib=true}. If you use the latter, you'll get a
- \textsf{keyval} error. Please see sections~\ref{sec:useropts} and
- \ref{sec:authuseropts}, below.
-\item By far the simplest setup is to use \textsf{babel}, and to have
- \texttt{american} as the main text language. As before,
- \textsf{babel}-less setups, and also those choosing \texttt{english}
- as the main text language, should work out of the box.
- \textsf{Biblatex-chicago} also now provides support for German and
- French. Please see below (section~\ref{sec:international}) for a
- fuller explanation of all the options.
-\item The \mycolor{\textsf{chicago-notes15.bbx}},
- \mycolor{\textsf{chicago-notes15.cbx}},
- \mycolor{\textsf{chicago-authordate15.cbx}},
- \mycolor{\textsf{chi\-cago-authordate15.bbx}},
- \textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty}, \textsf{cms-am\-erican.lbx},
- \textsf{cms-french.lbx}, \textsf{cms-german.lbx}, and
- \textsf{cms-ngerman.lbx} files from \textsf{biblatex-chicago},
- installed either in a system-wide \TeX\ directory, or in the working
- directory where you keep your *.tex files. The .zip file from CTAN
- contains several subdirectories to help keep the growing number of
- files organized, so the files listed above can be found in the
- \texttt{latex/} subdirectory, itself further divided into the
- \texttt{bbx/}, \texttt{cbx/}, and \texttt{lbx/} subdirectories. If
- you install in a system-wide directory, I recommend following
- standard advice and using
- \texttt{<TEXMFLOCAL>/tex/latex/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-chicago},
- where \texttt{<TEXMFLOCAL>} is the root of your local \TeX\
- installation --- for example, and depending on your system and
- preferences, \texttt{/usr/share/texmf-local},
- \texttt{/usr/local/share/texmf}, or \texttt{C:\textbackslash{}Local
- TeX Files\textbackslash}. Then you can copy the contents of the
- \texttt{latex/} directory there, subdirectories and all. (If you
- install into your working directory, then you'll need to copy the
- files directly there, without subdirectories.) Of course, if you
- choose to place them anywhere in the \texttt{texmf} tree, you'll
- need to update the file name database to make sure \TeX\ can find
- them.
-\item Philipp Lehman's very clear and detailed documentation of the
- \textsf{biblatex} system, available in his package as
- \textsf{biblatex.pdf}. Here he explains why you might want to use
- the system, the rules for constructing .bib files for it, and the
- (numerous) methods at your disposal for modifying the formatted
- output.
-\item The annotated bibliography files \textsf{notes-test.bib} and
- \textsf{dates-test.bib}, which will acquaint you with most of the
- details on how to get started constructing your own .bib files for
- use with the two \textsf{biblatex-chicago} styles.
-\item The files \textsf{cms15-notes-sample.pdf} and
- \textsf{cms15-dates-sample.pdf}. The first shows how my system
- processes \textsf{notes-test.bib} and
- \textsf{cms15-notes-sample.tex}, in both footnotes and bibliography,
- the second is the result of processing \textsf{dates-test.bib} and
- \textsf{cms15-dates-sample.tex}. All of these files are in
- \texttt{doc/examples/}.
-\item The file you are reading, \textsf{biblatex-chicago15.pdf}, which
- aims to be as complete a description as possible of the rules for
- creating a .bib file that will, when processed by \LaTeX\ and
- \textsc{Bib}\TeX, at least somewhat ease the burden when you try to
- implement the \emph{Chicago Manual of Style}'s specifications.
- These docs may seem frustratingly over-long, but remember that you
- only need to read the part(s) that apply to the style in which you
- are interested. Much of the information in section~\ref{sec:Spec}
- is duplicated in section~\ref{sec:authdate}, so even if you have a
- need for both styles then using one will be excellent preparation
- for the other. If you have used a previous version of this package,
- please pay particular attention to the sections on Obsolete and
- Deprecated Features, starting on page~\pageref{deprec:obsol}. You
- will find the seven previous files in the \texttt{doc/} subdirectory
- once you've extracted \textsf{biblatex-chicago.zip}. If you wish to
- place them in a system-wide directory, I would recommend
- \texttt{<TEXMFLOCAL>/doc/latex/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-chicago},
- all the while remembering, of course, to update the file name
- database afterward. (Let me reiterate, also, that if you currently
- have quoted material in your .bib file, and are using \cmd{enquote}
- or the standard \LaTeX\ mechanisms there, then the simplest
- procedure is always to use \cmd{mkbibquote} instead in order to
- ensure that punctuation works out right.)
-\item Access to a copy of \emph{The Chicago Manual of Style} itself,
- which naturally contains incomparably more information than I can
- hope to present here. It should always be your first port of call
- when any doubts arise as to exactly what the specification requires.
-\end{itemize}
-
-\subsection{License}
-\label{sec:lppl}
-
-Copyright © 2008--2014 David Fussner. This package is
-author-maintained. This work may be copied, distributed and/or
-modified under the conditions of the \LaTeX\ Project Public License,
-either version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later
-version. The latest version of this license is in
-http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt and version 1.3 or later is part
-of all distributions of \LaTeX\ version 2005/12/01 or later. This
-software is provided \enquote{as is,} without warranty of any kind,
-either expressed or implied, including, but not limited to, the
-implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular
-purpose.
-
-%\enlargethispage{-\baselineskip}
-
-\subsection{Acknowledgements}
-\label{sec:acknowl}
-
-Even a cursory glance at the cbx and bbx files in the package will
-demonstrate how much of Lehman's code from \textsf{biblatex} I've
-adapted and re-used, and I've also followed some of the advice he gave
-to others in the \texttt{comp.text.tex} newsgroup. He has been
-instrumental in improving the contextual capitalization procedures of
-which the style makes such frequent use, and his advice on
-constructing \textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty} was invaluable. The code
-for formatting the footnote marks, and that for printing the
-separating rule only after a run-on note, I've adapted from the
-\textsf{footmisc} package by Robin Fairbairns, and I've borrowed ideas
-for the \texttt{shorthandibid} option from Dominik Waßenhoven's
-\textsf{biblatex-dw} package. I am very grateful to Baldur
-Kristinsson for providing the Icelandic localization, and to Håkon
-Malmedal for the Norwegian localizations. Kazuo Teramoto and Gildas
-Hamel both sent patches to improve the package, and there may be other
-\LaTeX\ code I've appropriated and forgotten, in which case please
-remind me. Finally, Charles Schaum and Joseph Reagle Jr.\ were both
-extremely generous with their help and advice during the development
-of this package, and have both continued indefatigably to test it and
-suggest needed improvements. They were particularly instrumental in
-encouraging the greatest possible degree of compatibility with other
-\textsf{biblatex} styles. Indeed, if the task of adapting .bib files
-for use with the Chicago style seems onerous now, you should have
-tried it before they got their hands on it.
-
-\section{Detailed Introduction}
-\label{sec:Intro}
-
-The \emph{Chicago Manual of Style}, implemented here in its 15th
-edition, has long, in America at least, been one of the most
-influential style guides for writers and publishers. While one's
-choices are now perhaps more extensive than ever, the \emph{Manual} at
-least still provides a widely-recognized, and widely-utilized,
-standard. Indeed, when you add to this the sheer completeness of the
-specification, its detailed instructions for referencing an enormous
-number of different kinds of source material, then your choice (or
-your publisher's choice) of the \emph{Manual} as a style guide seems
-set to be a happy one.
-
-\mylittlespace These very strengths, however, also make the style
-difficult to use. Admittedly, the \emph{Manual} does leave room for
-\enquote{inventive solutions} to particular problems (17.2), and it
-also emphasizes consistency within a work, as opposed to rigid
-adherence to the specification, at least when writer and publisher
-agree (17.18). Sometimes a publisher demands such adherence, however,
-and anyone who has attempted to produce it may well come away with the
-impression that the specification itself is somewhat idiosyncratic in
-its complexity, and I can't help but agree. In the notes \&\
-bibliography style, the numerous differences in punctuation (and
-strings identifying translators, editors, and the like) between
-footnotes and bibliographies and the sometimes unusual location of
-page numbers; in both styles the distinction between \enquote{journal}
-and \enquote{magazine,} and the formatting differences between (e.g.)
-a work from antiquity and one from the Renaissance, all of these tend
-to overburden the writer who wants to comply with the standard. Many
-of these complexities, in truth, make the specification very nearly
-impossible to implement straightforwardly in a system like
-\textsc{Bib}\TeX\ --- options multiply, each requiring a particular
-sort of formatting, until one almost reaches the point of believing
-that every individual book or article should have its own entry type.
-Completeness and usability tend each to exclude the other, so the code
-you have before you is a first attempt to achieve the former without
-utterly sacrificing the latter.
-
-\subsection*{What \textsf{biblatex-chicago} can and can't do}
-\label{sec:bltries}
-
-In short, the \textsf{biblatex} style files in this package try to
-simplify the task of following the two Chicago specifications. In the
-notes \&\ bibliography style, the two sorts of reference are treated
-separately (as are the two different note forms, long and short), and
-you can choose always to use the short note form, even at the first
-citation. In the author-date style, a series of options allows you to
-choose which date (original printing, reprint, or both) appears in
-citations and at the head of entries in the list of references. In
-both styles, punctuation is placed within quotation marks when needed,
-and as a general rule as many parts of the style as possible are
-implemented as transparently as possible. Thanks to advice I received
-from Joseph Reagle Jr.\ and Charles Schaum while these files were a
-work in progress, I have attended as carefully as I can to backward
-compatibility with the standard \textsf{biblatex} styles, and have
-attempted to minimize both any changes you need to make to achieve
-compliance with the Chicago specification, and indeed also any changes
-necessary to switch between the two Chicago styles. There is no doubt
-room for improvement on this score, but even now, for a substantial
-number of entries, any well-constructed .bib file that works for other
-\textsf{biblatex} styles will \enquote{just work} under
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago}. By no means, however, will all entries in
-such a .bib file produce equally satisfactory results. Using this
-documentation and the examples in \textsf{dates-test.bib} and/or
-\textsf{notes-test.bib}, it should be possible to achieve compliance,
-though the amount of revision necessary to do so will vary
-significantly from .bib file to .bib file. Conversely, once you have
-created a database for \textsf{biblatex-chicago}, it won't necessarily
-work well with other \textsf{biblatex} styles. Indeed, most, quite
-possibly all, users will find that they need to use special formatting
-macros within the .bib file that would make such a file unusable in
-any other context. I strongly recommend, if you want to experiment
-with this style, that you work on a copy of any .bib files that are
-important to you, until you have determined that this package does
-what you need/want it to do.
-
-\mylittlespace When I first began working on this package, I made the
-decision to alter as little as possible the main files from Lehman's
-\textsf{biblatex}, so that my .bbx and .cbx files would use his
-original \LaTeX\ .sty file and \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ .bst file. As you
-proceed, you will no doubt encounter some of the consequences of this
-decision, with certain fields and entry types in the .bib file having
-less-than-memorable names because I chose to use the supplementary
-ones provided by \textsf{biblatex.bst} rather than alter that file. I
-intended then, if it turned out that anyone besides myself actually
-used \textsf{biblatex-chicago}, to ask Mr.\ Lehman to include more
-descriptive names for these few entry types and fields in
-biblatex.bst, if he were willing. As luck would have it, several new
-types appeared in \textsf{biblatex} 0.8, many of which I have
-incorporated as replacements for the custom entry types I defined
-before. If a consensus emerges about how best to assign the data to
-various fields in such entries, then I shall adopt it. In the
-meantime, as you will see below, I have made two of the old custom
-types obsolete, and recycled the third for an entirely new purpose.
-Needless to say, I'm open to advice and suggestions on this score.
-
-\section{The Specification:\ Notes\,\&\,Bibliography}
-\label{sec:Spec}
-
-In what follows, I attempt to explain all the parts of
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} that might be considered somehow
-\enquote{non standard,} at least with respect to the styles included
-with \textsf{biblatex} itself, though in the section on entry fields I
-have also duplicated a lot of the information in
-\textsf{biblatex.pdf}, which I hope won't badly annoy expert users of
-the system. Headings in \mycolor{green} \colmarginpar{\textsf{New in
- this release}} indicate material new to this release, or
-occasionally old material that has undergone significant revision.
-Numbers in parentheses refer to sections of the \emph{Chicago Manual
- of Style}, 15th edition. The file \textsf{notes-test.bib} contains
-many examples from the \emph{Manual} which, when processed using
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes}, should produce the same output as you
-see in the \emph{Manual} itself, or at least compliant output, where
-the specifications are vague or open to interpretation, a state of
-affairs which does sometimes occur. I have provided
-\textsf{cms-notes-sample.pdf}, which shows how my system processes
-\textsf{notes-test.bib}, and I have also included the reference keys
-from the latter file below in parentheses.
-
-%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
-
-\subsection{Entry Types}
-\label{sec:entrytypes}
-
-The complete list of entry types currently available in
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes}, minus the odd \textsf{biblatex}
-alias, is as follows: \mycolor{\textbf{article}}, \textbf{artwork},
-\textbf{audio}, \textbf{book}, \textbf{bookinbook}, \textbf{booklet},
-\textbf{collection}, \textbf{customc}, \textbf{image},
-\textbf{inbook}, \textbf{incollection}, \textbf{inproceedings},
-\textbf{inreference}, \textbf{letter}, \textbf{manual},\textbf{misc},
-\textbf{music}, \textbf{online} (with its alias \textbf{www}),
-\textbf{patent}, \textbf{periodical}, \textbf{proceedings},
-\textbf{reference}, \textbf{report} (with its alias
-\textbf{techreport}), \mycolor{\textbf{review}}, \textbf{suppbook},
-\textbf{suppcollection}, \textbf{suppperiodical}, \textbf{thesis}
-(with its aliases \textbf{mastersthesis} and \textbf{phdthesis}),
-\textbf{unpublished}, and \textbf{video}.
-
-\mylittlespace What follows is an attempt to specify all the
-differences between these types and the standard provided by
-\textsf{biblatex}. If an entry type isn't discussed here, then it is
-safe to assume that it works as it does in the standard styles. In
-general, I have attempted not to discuss specific entry fields here,
-unless such a field is crucial to the overall operation of a given
-entry type. As a general and important rule, most entry types require
-very few fields when you use \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes}, so it
-seemed to me better to gather information pertaining to fields in the
-next section.
-
-\mybigspace The \colmarginpar{\textbf{article}} \emph{Chicago Manual of
- Style} (17.148) recognizes three different sorts of periodical
-publication, \enquote{journals,} \enquote{magazines,} and
-\enquote{newspapers.} The first (17.150) includes \enquote{scholarly
- or professional periodicals available mainly by subscription,} while
-the second refers to \enquote{weekly or monthly} publications that are
-\enquote{available either by subscription or in individual issues at
- bookstores or newsstands.} \enquote{Magazines} will tend to be
-\enquote{more accessible to general readers,} and typically won't have
-a volume number. Indeed, by fiat I declare that should you need to
-refer to a journal that identifies its issues mainly by year, month,
-or week, then for the purposes of \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} such
-a publication is a \enquote{magazine,} and not a \enquote{journal.}
-
-\mylittlespace Now, for articles in \enquote{journals} you can simply
-use the traditional \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ --- and indeed \textsf{biblatex}
---- \textsf{article} entry type, which will work as expected and set
-off the page numbers with a colon, as required by the \emph{Manual}.
-If, however, you need to refer to a \enquote{magazine} or a
-\enquote{newspaper,} then you need to add an \textsf{entrysubtype}
-field containing the exact string \texttt{magazine}. The main
-formatting differences between a \texttt{magazine} (which includes
-both \enquote{magazines} and \enquote{newspapers}) and a plain
-\textsf{article} are that the year isn't placed within parentheses,
-and that page numbers are set off by a comma rather than a colon.
-Otherwise, the two sorts of reference have much in common. (For
-\textsf{article}, see \emph{Manual} 17.154--181; batson,
-beattie:crime, friedman:learning, garaud:gatine, garrett, hlatky:hrt,
-kern, lewis, loften:hamlet, mcmillen:antebellum, warr:ellison,
-white:callimachus. For \textsf{entrysubtype} \texttt{magazine}, see
-17.166, 17.182--198; assocpress:gun, morgenson:market, reaves:rosen,
-rozner:liberation, stenger:privacy.)
-
-\mylittlespace It gets worse. The \emph{Manual} treats reviews (of
-books, plays, performances, etc.) as a sort of recognizable subset of
-\enquote{journals,} \enquote{magazines,} and \enquote{newspapers,}
-distinguished mainly by the way one formats the title of the review
-itself. In \textsf{biblatex 0.7}, happily, Lehman provided a
-\textsf{review} entry type which will handle a large subset of such
-citations, though not all. The key rule is this: if a review has a
-separate, non-generic title (gibbard; osborne:poison) in addition to
-something that reads like \enquote{review of \ldots,} then you need an
-\textsf{article} entry, with or without the \texttt{magazine}
-\textsf{entrysubtype}, depending on the sort of publication containing
-the review. If the only title is the generic \enquote{review of
- \ldots,} for example, then you'll need the \textsf{review} entry
-type, with or without this same \textsf{entrysubtype} toggle using
-\texttt{magazine}. On \textsf{review} entries, see below. (The
-curious reader will no doubt notice that the code for formatting any
-sort of review still exists in \textsf{article}, as it was initially
-designed for \textsf{biblatex 0.6}, but this new arrangement is
-somewhat simpler and therefore, I hope, better.)
-
-%\enlargethispage{-\baselineskip}
-
-\mylittlespace In the case of a review with a specific as well as a
-generic title, the former goes in the \textsf{title} field, and the
-latter in the \textsf{titleaddon} field. Standard \textsf{biblatex}
-intends this field for use with additions to titles that may need to
-be formatted differently from the titles themselves, and
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} uses it in just this way, with the
-additional wrinkle that it can, if needed, replace the \textsf{title}
-entirely, and this in, effectively, any entry type, providing a fairly
-powerful, if somewhat complicated, tool for getting \textsc{Bib}\TeX\
-to do what you want. Here, however, if all you need is a
-\textsf{titleaddon}, then you want to switch to the \textsf{review}
-type, where you can simply use the \textsf{title} field instead.
-
-\mylittlespace No less than six more things need explication here.
-First, since the \emph{Manual} specifies that much of what goes into a
-\textsf{titleaddon} field stays unformatted --- no italics, no
-quotation marks --- this plain style is the default for such text,
-which means that you'll have to format any titles within
-\textsf{titleaddon} yourself, e.g., with \cmd{mkbibemph\{\}}. Second,
-the \emph{Manual} specifies a similar plain style for the titles of
-other sorts of material found in \enquote{magazines} and
-\enquote{newspapers,} e.g., obituaries, letters to the editor,
-interviews, the names of regular columns, and the like. References
-may contain both the title of an individual article and the name of
-the regular column, in which case the former should go, as usual, in a
-\textsf{title} field, and the latter in \textsf{titleaddon}. As with
-reviews proper, if there is only the generic title, then you want the
-\textsf{review} entry type. (See 17.188, 17.190, 17.193;
-morgenson:market, reaves:rosen.)
-
-\mylittlespace Third, the \emph{Manual} suggests that, in the case of
-\enquote{unsigned newspaper articles or features \ldots the name of
- the newspaper stands in place of the author} (17.192). It doesn't
-always carry through on this in its own presentation of newspaper
-citations (see esp.\ 17.188), but I've implemented their
-recommendation nonetheless, which means that in an \textsf{article}
-entry, \textsf{entrysubtype} \texttt{magazine}, or in a
-\textsf{review} entry, \textsf{entrysubtype} \texttt{magazine}, and
-only in such entries, a missing \textsf{author} field results in the
-name of the periodical (in the \textsf{journaltitle} field) being used
-as the missing author. If, for reasons of emphasis or merely because
-of personal preference, you wish to keep the \textsf{title} in initial
-position, then you need to define the \textsf{author} using,
-effectively, anything at all, then set \texttt{useauthor=false} in the
-\textsf{options} field. (The \cmd{isdot} macro in the \textsf{author}
-field no longer works on its own under \textsf{biblatex 1.6} and
-later, so you may need to change your .bib files when you upgrade.)
-Note that if you choose to use the name of the newspaper as an author,
-then you'll need a \textsf{sortkey} field to ensure that the
-bibliography entry is alphabetized by \textsf{journaltitle} rather
-than by \textsf{title}. The provision of a \textsf{shortauthor} field
-is no longer necessary, as in its absence the package automatically
-takes it from \textsf{journaltitle}. (See lakeforester:pushcarts.)
-
-\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
-
-\mylittlespace Fourth, if you've been using
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} for a while, you may remember using
-the single-letter \cmd{bibstring} mechanism in order to help
-\textsf{biblatex} decide where to capitalize a wide variety of strings
-in numerous entry fields. This mechanism was particularly common in
-all the periodical types, but if you've had a look in
-\textsf{notes-test.bib} while following this documentation, you'll
-have noticed that it no longer appears there. The regular whole-word
-bibstrings still work as normal, but the single-letter ones are now
-obsolete, replaced by Lehman's macro \cmd{autocap}, which itself only
-occurs twice in \textsf{notes-test.bib}. Basically, in certain
-fields, just beginning your data with a lowercase letter activates the
-mechanism for capitalizing that letter depending on its context within
-a note or bibliography entry. Please see \textbf{\textbackslash
- autocap} below for the details, but both the \textsf{titleaddon} and
-\textsf{note} fields are among those treating their data this way, and
-since both appear regularly in \textsf{article} entries, I thought the
-problem merited a preliminary mention here.
-
-\mylittlespace Fifth, if you need to cite an entire issue of any sort
-of periodical, rather than one article in an issue, then the
-\textsf{periodical} entry type, once again with or without the
-\texttt{magazine} toggle in \textsf{entrysubtype}, is what you'll
-need. (You can also use the \textsf{article} type, placing what would
-normally be the \textsf{issuetitle} in the \textsf{title} field and
-retaining the usual \textsf{journaltitle} field, but this arrangement
-isn't compatible with standard \textsf{biblatex}.) The \textsf{note}
-field is where you place something like \enquote{special issue} (with
-the small \enquote{s} enabling the automatic capitalization routines),
-whether you are citing one article or the whole issue
-(conley:fifthgrade, good:wholeissue). Indeed, this is a somewhat
-specialized use of \textsf{note}, and if you have other sorts of
-information you need to include in an \textsf{article},
-\textsf{periodical}, or \textsf{review} entry, then you shouldn't put
-it in the \textsf{note} field, but rather in \textsf{titleaddon} or
-perhaps \textsf{addendum} (brown:bremer).
-
-\mylittlespace Finally, and in the interests of completeness, it may be
-as well to suggest that if you wish to cite a television or radio
-broadcast, the \textsf{article} type, \textsf{entrysubtype}
-\texttt{magazine} is the place for it. The name of the program would
-go in \textsf{journaltitle}, with the name of the episode in
-\textsf{title}. The network's name now goes into the new
-\textsf{usera} field, replacing the formatting kludge I suggested in
-version 0.7. Of course, if the piece you are citing has only a
-generic name (an interview, for example), then the \textsf{review}
-type would be the best place for it. (8.196, 17.207; see
-bundy:macneil for an example of how this all might look in a .bib
-file.)
-
-%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
-
-\mylittlespace If you're still with me, allow me to recommend that you
-browse through \textsf{notes-test.bib} to get a feel for just how many
-of the \emph{Manual}'s complexities the \textsf{article} and
-\textsf{review} (and, indeed, \textsf{periodical}) types attempt to
-address. It may be that in future releases of
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} I'll be able to simplify these
-procedures somewhat, but in the meantime it might be of some comfort
-that I have found in my own research that the unusual and/or limit
-cases are really rather rare, and that the vast majority of sources
-won't require any knowledge of these onerous details.
-
-\mybigspace Arne \mymarginpar{\textbf{artwork}} Kjell Vikhagen has
-pointed out to me that none of the standard entry types were
-straightforwardly adaptable when referring to visual artworks. The
-\emph{Manual} doesn't give any thorough specifications for such
-references, and indeed it's unclear that it believes it necessary to
-include them in the bibliographical apparatus at all. Still, it's
-easy to conceive of contexts in which a list of artworks studied might
-be desirable, and \textsf{biblatex} includes entry types for just this
-purpose, though the standard styles leave them undefined. The two I
-have included in this release are \textsf{artwork} and \textsf{image},
-the former intended for paintings, sculptures, etchings, and the like,
-the latter for photographs. The two entry types work in exactly the
-same way as far as constructing your .bib entry, and when printed the
-only difference will be that the titles of \textsf{artworks} are
-italicized, those of \textsf{images} placed within quotation marks.
-
-\mylittlespace As one might expect, the artist goes in \textsf{author}
-and the name of the work in \textsf{title}. The \textsf{type} field
-is intended for the medium --- e.g., oil on canvas, charcoal on paper
---- and the \textsf{version} field might contain the state of an
-etching. You can place the dimensions of the work in \textsf{note},
-and the current location in \textsf{organization},
-\textsf{institution}, and/or \textsf{location}, in ascending order of
-generality. The \textsf{type} field, as in several other entry types,
-uses \textsf{biblatex's} automatic capitalization routines, so if the
-first word only needs a capital letter at the beginning of a sentence,
-use lowercase in the .bib file and let \textsf{biblatex} handle it for
-you. (See \emph{Manual} 12.33; leo:madonna, bedford:photo.)
-
-\mylittlespace As a final complication, the \emph{Manual} (8.206) says
-that \enquote{the names of works of antiquity \ldots\,are usually set
- in roman.} If you should need to include such a work in the
-reference apparatus, you can either define an \textsf{entrysubtype}
-for an \textsf{artwork} entry --- anything will do --- or you could
-use the \textsf{misc} entry type with an \textsf{entrysubtype}.
-Fortunately, in this instance the other fields in a \textsf{misc}
-entry function pretty much as in \textsf{artwork} or \textsf{image}.
-
-\mybigspace For \mymarginpar{\textbf{audio}} this release of
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago}, following the request of Johan Nordstrom, I
-have included three new entry types, all undefined by the standard
-styles, designed to allow users to present audiovisual sources in
-accordance with the Chicago specifications. The \emph{Manual's}
-presentation of such sources (17.263--273), though admirably brief,
-seems to me somewhat inconsistent. I attempted to condense all the
-requirements into two new entry types, but ended up relying on three,
-the differences between which I shall attempt to delineate here.
-There are likely to be occasions when your choice of entry type is not
-obvious, but at the very least \textsf{biblatex-chicago} should help
-you maintain consistency.
-
-\mylittlespace The \textbf{music} type is intended for all musical
-recordings that do not have a video component. This means, for
-example, digital media (whether on CD or hard drive), vinyl records,
-and tapes. The \textbf{video} type includes (nearly) all visual
-media, whether it be films, TV shows, tapes and DVDs of the preceding
-or of any sort of performance (including music), or online multimedia.
-Finally, the \textbf{audio} type, our current concern, fills gaps in
-the two others, and presents its sources in a more \enquote{book-like}
-manner. Published musical scores need this type --- unpublished ones
-would use \textsf{misc} with an \textsf{entrysubtype} (shapey:partita)
---- as do such favorite educational formats as the slideshow and the
-filmstrip (greek:filmstrip, schubert:muellerin, verdi:corsaro). The
-\emph{Manual} (17.269--270) sometimes uses a similar format for audio
-books and even for films (twain:audio, weed:flatiron), though
-elsewhere these sorts of material are presented as \textsf{music} and
-\textsf{video}, respectively. It would appear to depend on which
-sorts of publication facts you wish to present --- cf.\ \emph{Manual}
-17.269.
-
-%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
-
-\mylittlespace Once you've accepted the analogy of composer to
-\textsf{author}, constructing an \textsf{audio} entry should be fairly
-straightforward, since many of the fields function just as they do in
-\textsf{book} or \textsf{inbook} entries. Indeed, please note that I
-compare it to both these other types as, in common with the other
-audiovisual types, \textsf{audio} has to do double duty as an analogue
-for both books and collections, so while there will normally be an
-\textsf{author}, a \textsf{title}, a \textsf{publisher}, a
-\textsf{date}, and a \textsf{location}, there may also be a
-\textsf{booktitle} and/or a \textsf{maintitle} --- see
-schubert:muellerin for an entry that uses all three in citing one song
-from a cycle. If the medium in question needs specifying, the
-\textsf{type} field is the place for it. (It is characteristic of
-this entry type that such information is placed after the publisher
-information, whereas in the other audiovisual types their order is
-reversed.) Finally, the \textsf{titleaddon} field can specify
-functions for which \textsf{biblatex-chicago} provides no automated
-handling, e.g., a librettist (verdi:corsaro).
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{bookinbook}} type provides the
-means of referring to parts of books that are considered, in other
-contexts, themselves to be books, rather than chapters, essays, or
-articles. (Older versions of \textsf{biblatex-chicago} used
-\textbf{customb} for this purpose, but this is now obsolete.) Such an
-entry can have a \textsf{title} and a \textsf{maintitle}, but it can
-also contain a \textsf{booktitle}, all three of which will be
-italicized when printed. In general usage it is, therefore, rather
-like the traditional \textsf{inbook} type, only with its
-\textsf{title} in italics rather than in quotation marks. (See
-\emph{Manual} 17.72, 17.89, 17.93; bernard:boris, euripides:orestes,
-plato:republic:gr.)
-
-\mylittlespace \textbf{NB}: The Euripides play receives slightly
-different presentations in 17.89 and 17.93. Although the
-specification is very detailed, it doesn't eliminate all choice or
-variation. Using a system like \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ should help to
-maintain consistency.
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{booklet}} is the first of two
-entry types --- the other being \textsf{manual}, on which see below
---- which are traditional in \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ styles, but which the
-\emph{Manual} (17.241) suggests may well be treated basically as
-books. In the interests of backward compatibility,
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} will so format such an entry, which
-uses the \textsf{howpublished} field instead of a standard
-\textsf{publisher}, though of course if you do decide just to use a
-\textsf{book} entry then any information you might have given in a
-\textsf{howpublished} field should instead go in \textsf{publisher}.
-(See clark:mesopot.)
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{customa}} entry type is now
-obsolete, and any such entries in your .bib file will trigger an
-error. Please use the standard \textsf{biblatex} \textbf{letter} type
-instead.
-
-%\enlargethispage{-\baselineskip}
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{customb}} entry type is now
-obsolete, and any such entries in your .bib file will trigger an
-error. Please use the standard \textsf{biblatex} \textbf{bookinbook}
-type instead.
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{customc}} entry type has
-undergone a metamorphosis with this release, as I previously warned
-both here and in the RELEASE file. Rather than being a (deprecated)
-alias of the standard \textsf{biblatex} \textbf{suppbook}, it now
-allows you to include alphabetized cross-references to other, separate
-entries in the bibliography, particularly to other names or
-pseudonyms, as recommended by the \emph{Manual}. (This is different
-from the usual \textsf{crossref}, \textsf{xref}, and \textsf{userf}
-mechanisms, all primarily designed to include cross-references to
-other works. Cf.\ 17.39--40). The lecarre:cornwell entry, for
-example, would allow your readers to find the more-commonly-used
-pseudonym \enquote{John Le Carré} even if they were, for some reason,
-looking under his real name \enquote{David John Moore Cornwell.}
-
-\mylittlespace In such a case, you would need merely to place the
-author's real name in the \textsf{author} field, and the pseudonym(s),
-under which his or her works are presented in the bibliography, in the
-\textsf{title} field. To make sure the cross-reference also appears
-in the bibliography, you can either manually include the entry key in
-a \cmd{nocite} command, or you can put that entry key in the
-\textbf{userc} field in the main .bib entry, in which case
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago} will print the expanded abbreviation if and
-only if you cite the main entry. (Cf.\ lecarre:cornwell,
-lecarre:quest; \textsf{userc}, below.)
-
-\mylittlespace Under ordinary circumstances, \textsf{biblatex-chicago}
-will connect the two parts of the cross-reference with the word
-\enquote{\emph{See}} --- or its equivalent in the document's language
---- in italics. If you wish to present the cross-reference
-differently, you can put the connecting word(s) into the
-\textsf{nameaddon} field.
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{image}} entry type, left
-undefined in the standard styles, is in \textsf{biblatex-chicago}
-intended for referring to photographs. Excluding the possible use of
-the \textsf{entrysubtype} field, which in an \textsf{image} entry
-would be ignored, this type is a clone of \textsf{artwork}, so you
-should consult the latter's documentation above to see how to
-construct your .bib entry. (See \emph{Manual} 12.33; bedford:photo.)
-
-\mybigspace These \mymarginpar{\textbf{inbook}\\\textbf{incollection}}
-two standard \textsf{biblatex} types have very nearly identical
-formatting requirements as far as the Chicago specification is
-concerned, but I have retained both of them for compatibility.
-\textsf{Biblatex.pdf} (§~2.1.1) intends the first for \enquote{a part
- of a book which forms a self-contained unit with its own title,}
-while the second would hold \enquote{a contribution to a collection
- which forms a self-contained unit with a distinct author and its own
- title.} The \textsf{title} of both sorts will be placed within
-quotation marks, and in general you can use either type for most
-material falling into these categories. There is, however, an
-important difference between them, as it is only in
-\textsf{incollection} entries that I implement the \emph{Manual's}
-recommendations for space-saving abbreviations in notes and
-bibliography when you cite multiple pieces from the same
-\textsf{collection}. These abbreviations are activated when you use
-the \textsf{crossref} or \textsf{xref} field in \textsf{incollection}
-entries, and not in \textsf{inbook} entries, mainly because the
-\emph{Manual} (17.70) here specifies a \enquote{multiauthor book.}
-(For more on this mechanism see \textbf{crossref}, below, and note
-that it is also active in \textsf{letter} and \textsf{inproceedings}
-entries. There is, of course, nothing to prevent you from using the
-mechanism when referring to, e.g., chapters from a single-author book,
-but you'll have to use \textsf{incollection} instead of
-\textsf{inbook}.) If the part of a book to which you are referring
-has had a separate publishing history as a book in its own right, then
-you may wish to use the \textsf{bookinbook} type, instead, on which
-see above. (See \emph{Manual} 17.68--72; \textsf{inbook}:
-ashbrook:brain, phibbs:diary, will:cohere; \textsf{incollection}:
-centinel:letters, contrib:contrib, sirosh:visualcortex; ellet:galena,
-keating:dearborn, and lippincott:chicago [and the \textsf{collection}
-entry prairie:state] demonstrate the use of the \textsf{crossref}
-field with its attendant abbreviations in notes and bibliography.)
-
-\mylittlespace \textbf{NB}: The \emph{Manual} suggests that, when
-referring to a chapter, one use either a chapter number or the
-inclusive page numbers, not both. If, however, you wish to refer in a
-footnote to a specific page within the chapter,
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} will always print the optional,
-postnote argument of a \cmd{cite} command --- the page number, say ---
-instead of any inclusive page numbers given in the .bib file
-\textsf{incollection} entry. This mechanism is quite general, that
-is, any specific page reference given in any sort of \cmd{cite}
-command overrides the contents of a \textsf{pages} field in a .bib
-file entry.
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{inproceedings}} entry type works
-pretty much as in standard \textsf{biblatex}. Indeed, the main
-differences between it and \textsf{incollection} are the lack of an
-\textsf{edition} field and the possibility that an
-\textsf{organization} may be cited alongside the \textsf{publisher},
-even though the \emph{Manual} doesn't specify its use (17.71). Please
-note, also, that the \textsf{crossref} and \textsf{xref} mechanism for
-shortening citations of multiple pieces from the same
-\textsf{proceedings} is operative here, just as it is in
-\textsf{incollection} entries. See \textbf{crossref}, below, for more
-details.
-
-\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{inreference}} entry type is
-aliased to \textsf{incollection} in the standard styles, but the
-\emph{Manual} has particular requirements, so if you are citing
-\enquote{[w]ell-known reference books, such as major dictionaries and
- encyclopedias,} then this type should simplify the task of
-conforming to the specifications (17.238--239). The main thing to
-keep in mind is that I have designed this entry type for
-\enquote{alphabetically arranged} works, which you shouldn't cite by
-page, but rather by the name(s) of the article(s). Because of the
-formatting required by the \emph{Manual}, we need one of
-\textsf{biblatex's} list fields for this purpose, and in order to keep
-all this out of the way of the standard styles, I have chosen the
-\textsf{lista} field. You should present these article names just as
-they appear in the work, separated by the keyword
-\enquote{\texttt{and}} if there is more than one, and
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} will provide the appropriate prefatory
-string (\texttt{s.v.}, plural \texttt{s.vv.}), and enclose each in its
-own set of quotation marks (ency:britannica). In a typical
-\textsf{inreference} entry, very few other fields are needed, as
-\enquote{the facts of publication are often omitted, but the edition
- (if not the first) must be specified.} In practice, this means a
-\textsf{title} and possibly an \textsf{edition} field.
-
-\mylittlespace There are quite a few other peculiarities to explain
-here. First of all, you should present any well-known works
-\emph{only} in notes, not in a bibliography, as your readers are
-assumed to know where to go for such a reference. You can use the
-\texttt{skipbib} option or the \textsf{keywords} mechanism I discuss
-below under \textbf{crossref} and \textbf{keywords}. For such works,
-and given how little information will be present even in a full note,
-you may wish to use \cmd{fullcite} or \cmd{footfullcite} in place of
-the short form, especially if, for example, you are citing different
-versions of an article appearing in different editions.
-
-\mylittlespace If the work is slightly less well known, it may be that
-full publication details are appropriate (times:guide), but this makes
-things more complicated. In previous releases of
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes}, you would have had to format the
-\textsf{postnote} field of short notes appropriately, including the
-prefatory string and quotation marks I mentioned above. Now you can
-put an article name in the \textsf{postnote} field of
-\textsf{inreference} entries and have it formatted for you, and this
-holds for both long and short notes, which could allow you to refer
-separately to many different articles from the same reference work
-using only one .bib entry. (In a long note, any \textsf{postnote}
-field stops the printing of the contents of \textsf{lista}.) The only
-limitation on this system is that the \textsf{postnote} field, unlike
-\textsf{lista}, is not a list, and therefore for the formatting to
-work correctly you can only put one article name in it. Despite this
-limitation, I hope that the current system might simplify things for
-users who cite numerous works of reference.
-
-\mylittlespace If it seems appropriate to include such a work in the
-bibliography, be aware that the contents of the \textsf{lista} field
-will also be presented there, which may not be what you want. A
-separate \textsf{reference} entry might solve this problem, but you
-may also need a \textsf{sortkey} field to ensure proper
-alphabetization, as \textsf{biblatex} will attempt to use an
-\textsf{editor} or \textsf{author} name, if either is present. (Cf.\
-mla:style, a \textsf{reference} entry that uses section numbers
-instead of alphabetized headings, and \texttt{useeditor=false} in the
-\textsf{options} field instead of a \textsf{sortkey} to ensure the
-correct alphabetization.)
-
-\mylittlespace Speaking of the \textsf{author}, this field holds the
-author of the specific entry (in \textsf{lista}), not the author of
-the \textsf{title} as a whole. This name will be printed in
-parentheses after the entry's name (grove:sibelius). If you wish to
-refer to a reference work by author or indeed by editor, having either
-appear at the head of the note (long or short) or bibliography entry,
-then you'll need to use a \textsf{book} entry instead (cf.\
-schellinger:novel), where the \textsf{lista} mechanism will also work
-in the bibliography, but which in every other way will be treated as a
-normal book, often a good choice for unfamiliar or non-standard
-reference works.
-
-\mylittlespace Finally, all of these rules apply to online reference
-works, as well, for which you need to provide not only a \textsf{url}
-but also, always, a \textsf{urldate}, as these sources are in constant
-flux (wikiped:bibtex, grove:sibelius).
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{letter}} is the entry type to
-use for citing letters, memoranda, or similar texts, but \emph{only}
-when they appear in a published collection. (Unpublished material of
-this nature needs a \textsf{misc} entry, for which see below.)
-Depending on what sort of information you need to present in a
-citation, you may simply be able to get away with a standard
-\textsf{book} entry, which may then be cited by page number (see
-\emph{Manual} 17.31, 17.42; meredith:letters, adorno:benj). If,
-however, for whatever reason, you need to give full details of a
-specific letter, then you'll need to use the \textsf{letter} entry
-type, which attempts to simplify for you the \emph{Manual}'s rather
-complicated rules for formatting such references. (See 17.76--78;
-jackson:paulina:letter, white:ross:memo, white:russ [a completely
-fictitious entry to show the \textsf{xref} mechanism], white:total [a
-\textsf{book} entry, for the bibliography]).
-
-\mylittlespace To start, the name of the letter writer goes in the
-\textsf{author} field, while the \textsf{title} field contains both
-the name of the writer and that of the recipient, in the form
-\texttt{Author to Recipient}. The \textsf{titleaddon} field contains
-the type of correspondence involved. If it's a letter, this field may
-be left blank, but if it's a memorandum or report or the like, then
-this is the place to specify that fact. Also, because the
-\textsf{origdate} field only accepts numbers, if you want to use the
-abbreviation \enquote{n.d.} (or \cmd{bibstring\{nodate\}}) for undated
-letters, then this is where you should put it. If you need to specify
-where a letter was written, then you can also use this field, and, if
-both are present, remember to separate the location from the type with
-a comma, like so: \texttt{memorandum, London}. Alternatively, you can
-put the place of writing into the \mycolor{\textsf{origlocation}}
-field. Most importantly, the date of the letter itself goes in the
-\textsf{origdate} field (\texttt{year-month-day}), which now allows a
-full date specification, while the publishing date of the whole
-collection goes in the \textsf{date} field, instead of in the obsolete
-\textsf{origyear}. As in other entry types, then, the \textsf{date}
-field now has its ordinary meaning of \enquote{date of publication.}
-(You may have noticed here that the presentation of the
-\textsf{origdate} in this sort of reference is different from the date
-format required elsewhere by the \emph{Manual}. This appears to
-result from some recent changes to the specification, and it may be
-that we could get away with choosing one or the other format for all
-occurrences [6.46], but for the moment I hope this mixed solution will
-suffice.) Another difficulty arises when producing the short footnote
-form, which requires you to provide a \textsf{shorttitle} field of the
-form \enquote{\texttt{to Recipient},} the latter name as short as
-possible while avoiding ambiguity. The remaining fields are fairly
-self explanatory, but do remember that the title of the published
-collection belongs in \textsf{booktitle} rather than in
-\textsf{title}.
-
-\mylittlespace Finally, the \emph{Manual} specifies that if you cite
-more than one letter from a given published collection, then the
-bibliography should contain only a reference to said collection,
-rather than to each individual letter, while the form of footnotes
-would remain the same. This should be possible using
-\textsc{Bib}\TeX's standard \textsf{crossref} field, with each
-\textsf{letter} entry pointing to a \textsf{collection} or
-\textsf{book} entry, for example. I shall discuss cross references at
-length later (\textbf{crossref} and \textbf{xref}, below), but I
-should mention here that \textsf{letter} is one of the entry types in
-which a \textsf{crossref} or an \textsf{xref} field automatically
-results in special shortened forms in notes and bibliography if more
-than one piece from a single collection is cited. (The other entry
-types are \textsf{incollection} and \textsf{inproceedings}; see 17.70
-for the \emph{Manual}'s specification.) This ordinarily won't be an
-issue for \textsf{letter} entries in the bibliography, as individual
-letters aren't included there, but it is operative in notes, where you
-can disable it simply by not using a \textsf{crossref} or an
-\textsf{xref} field. In the \textsf{crossref} docs, below, I
-recommend a way of keeping the individual letters from turning up in
-the bibliography, involving the use of the \textsf{keywords} field.
-
-%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{manual}} is the second of two
-traditional \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ entry types that the \emph{Manual}
-suggests formatting as books, the other being \textsf{booklet}. As
-with this latter, I have retained it in
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} for backward compatibility, its main
-peculiarity being that, in the absence of a named author, the
-\textsf{organization} producing the manual will be printed both as
-author and as publisher. In such a case, you'll need a
-\textsf{sortkey} field to aid \textsf{biblatex's} alphabetization
-routines, but you no longer need to provide a \textsf{shortauthor}
-field, as the style will automatically use \textsf{organization} in
-the absence of anything else. Of course, if you were to use a
-\textsf{book} entry for such a reference, then you would need to
-define both \textsf{author} and \textsf{publisher} using the name you
-here might have put in \textsf{organization}. (See 17:47;
-chicago:manual:15, dyna:browser, natrecoff:camera.)
-
-\mybigspace As \colmarginpar{\textbf{misc}} its name suggests, the
-\textsf{misc} entry type was designed as a hold-all for citations that
-didn't quite fit into other categories. In
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes}, I have somewhat extended its
-applicability, while retaining its traditional use. Put simply, with
-no \textsf{entrysubtype} field, a \textsf{misc} entry will retain
-backward compatibility with the standard styles, so the usual
-\textsf{howpublished}, \textsf{version}, and \textsf{type} fields are
-all available for specifying an otherwise unclassifiable text, and the
-\textsf{title} will be italicized. (The \emph{Manual}, you may wish
-to note, doesn't give specific instructions on how such citations
-should be formatted, so when using the Chicago style I would recommend
-you have recourse to this traditional entry type as sparingly as
-possible.)
-
-\mylittlespace If you do provide an \textsf{entrysubtype} field, the
-\textsf{misc} type provides a means for citing unpublished letters,
-memoranda, private contracts, wills, interviews, and the like, making
-it something of an unpublished analogue to the \textsf{letter},
-\textsf{article}, and \textsf{review} entry types (which see).
-Typically, such an entry will cite part of an archive, and equally
-typically the text cited won't have a specific title, but only a
-generic one, whereas an \textsf{unpublished} entry will ordinarily
-have a specific author and title, and won't come from a named archive.
-The \textsf{misc} type with an \textsf{entrysubtype} defined is the
-least formatted of all those specified by the \emph{Manual}, so titles
-are in plain text, and any location details take no parentheses in
-full footnotes. (It is quite possible, though somewhat unusual, for
-archival material to have a specific title, rather than a generic one.
-In these cases, you will need to enclose the title inside a
-\cmd{mkbibquote} command manually. Cf.\ shapey:partita.)
-
-\mylittlespace If you are wondering what to put in
-\textsf{entrysubtype}, the answer is, currently, anything at all. You
-no longer need to put the exact string \texttt{letter} there in order
-to move the date into closer proximity with the \textsf{title}.
-Indeed, recent reconsideration of the \emph{Manual} has suggested that
-the distinction to be drawn in this class of material hasn't to do
-with \emph{where} the date is presented but, rather, with \emph{how}
-it is presented. As I now understand the specification, it draws a
-distinction between archival material that is \enquote{letter-like}
-(letters, memoranda, reports, telegrams) and that which isn't
-(interviews, wills, contracts, or even personal communications you've
-received and which you wish to cite). This may not always be the
-easiest distinction to draw, and in previous releases of
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago} I have been ignoring it, but once you've
-decided to classify it one way or the other you put the date in the
-\textsf{origdate} field for letters, etc., and into the \textsf{date}
-field for the others.
-
-\mylittlespace In effect, whether it's a \textsf{letter} entry or a
-\enquote{letter-like} \textsf{misc} entry (with
-\textsf{entrysubtype}), it is by using the \textsf{origdate} field
-that you identify when it was written, and the \textsf{origlocation},
-if needed, identifies where it was written. Other sorts of
-\textsf{misc} entry (with \textsf{entrysubtype}) use the \textsf{date}
-field (but still the \textsf{origlocation}). This maintains
-consistency of usage across entry types and also, I hope, improves
-compliance when using the \textsf{misc} type for citing archival
-material. Remember, however, that without an \textsf{entrysubtype}
-the entry will be treated as traditional \textsf{misc}, and the title
-italicized. In addition, defining \textsf{entrysubtype} activates the
-automatic capitalization mechanism in the \textsf{title} field of
-\textsf{misc} entries, on which see \textbf{\textbackslash autocap}
-below. (See 17.205-206, 17.220, 17.222-232; creel:house,
-dinkel:agassiz, spock:interview.)
-
-\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
-
-\mylittlespace As in \textsf{letter} entries, the titles of
-unpublished letters are of the form \texttt{Author to Recipient}, and
-further information can be given in the \textsf{titleaddon} field,
-including the abbreviation \enquote{\texttt{n.d.}}\ (or
-\cmd{bibstring\{nodate\}}) for undated examples. The \textsf{note},
-\textsf{organization}, \textsf{institution}, and \textsf{location}
-fields (in ascending order of generality) allow the specification of
-which manuscript collection now holds the letter, though the
-\emph{Manual} specifies (17.228) that well-known depositories don't
-usually need a city, state or country specified. (The traditional
-\textsf{misc} fields are all still available, also.) Both the long
-and short note forms can use the same \textsf{title}, but in both
-cases you may need to use the \cmd{headlesscite} command to avoid the
-awkward repetition of the author's name, though that name will always
-appear in the bibliography (creel:house). If you want to include the
-date of a letter in a short note, I have provided the
-\cmd{letterdatelong} command for inclusion in the postnote field of
-the citation command. (The standard \textsf{biblatex} command
-\cmd{printdate} will work if you need to do the same for interviews.)
-
-\mylittlespace As with \textsf{letter} entries, the \emph{Manual}
-(17.223) suggests that bibliography entries contain only the name of
-the manuscript collection, unless only one item from that collection
-is cited. The \textsf{crossref} field can be used, as well as the
-\textsf{keywords} mechanism (or \texttt{skipbib} option) for
-preventing the individual items from turning up in the bibliography.
-Obviously, this is a matter for your discretion, and if you're using
-only short notes (see the \texttt{short} option,
-section~\ref{sec:useropts} below), you may feel the need to include
-more information in the note if the bibliography doesn't contain a
-full reference to an individual item.
-
-\mylittlespace Finally, if the \textsf{misc} entry isn't a letter,
-remember that, as in \textsf{article} and \textsf{review} entries,
-words like \texttt{interview} or \texttt{memorandum} needn't be
-capitalized unless they follow a period --- the automatic
-capitalization routines (with the \textsf{title} field starting with a
-lowercase letter [see dinkel:agassiz, spock:interview, and
-\textbf{\textbackslash autocap}]) will ensure correctness. In all
-this class of archived material, the \emph{Manual} (17.222) quite
-specifically requires more consistency within your own work than
-conformity to some external standard, so it is the former which you
-should pursue. I hope that \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} proves
-helpful in this regard.
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{music}} is one of three new
-audiovisual entry types, and is intended primarily to aid in the
-presentation of musical recordings that do not have a video component,
-though it can also include audio books (auden:reading). A DVD or VHS
-of an opera or other performance, by contrast, should use the
-\textbf{video} type instead (handel:messiah). Because
-\textsf{biblatex} --- and \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ before it --- were
-designed primarily for citing book-like objects, some choices needed
-to be made in assigning the various roles found on the back of a CD to
-the fields in a typical .bib entry. I have also implemented several
-new bibstrings to help in identifying these roles within entries. If
-you can think of a simpler way to distribute the roles, please let me
-know, so that I can consider making changes before anyone gets used to
-the current equivalences.
-
-\mylittlespace These equivalences, in summary form, are:
-
-{\renewcommand{\descriptionlabel}[1]{\qquad\textsf{#1}}
-\begin{description}
-\item[author =] composer, songwriter, or performer(s),
- depending on whom you wish to emphasize by placing them at the head
- of the entry.
-\item[editor, editora, editorb =] conductor, director or
- performer(s). These will ordinarily follow the \textsf{title} of
- the work, though the usual \texttt{useauthor} and \texttt{useeditor}
- options can alter the presentation within an entry. Because these
- are non-standard roles, you will need to identify them using the
- following:
-\item[editortype, editoratype, editorbtype:] The most common roles,
- all associated with specific bibstrings (or their absence), will be
- \texttt{conductor}, \texttt{director}, \texttt{producer}, and,
- oddly, \texttt{none}. The last is particularly useful when
- identifying the group performing a piece, as it usually doesn't need
- further specifying and this role prevents \textsf{biblatex} from
- falling back on the default \texttt{editor} bibstring.
-\item[title, booktitle, maintitle:] As with the other audiovisual
- types, \textsf{music} serves as an analogue both to books and to
- collections, so the title will either be, e.g., the album title or a
- song title, in which latter case the album title would go into
- \textsf{booktitle}. The \textsf{maintitle} might be necessary for
- something like a box set of \emph{Complete Symphonies}.
-\item[series, number:] These two are closely associated, and are
- intended for presenting the catalog information provided by the
- music publisher, especially in the case when a publisher oversees
- more than one label. In nytrumpet:art:15, for example, the
- \textsf{series} field holds the label (\texttt{Vox/Turn\-about}) and
- the \textsf{number} field the catalog number (\texttt{PVT 7183}).
- You can certainly put all of this information into one of the above
- fields, but separating it may help make the .bib entry more
- readable.
-\item[howpublished/pubstate, date, publisher:] The \emph{Manual}
- (17.268) follows the rather specialized requirements for presenting
- publishing information for musical recordings. The normal symbol
- for musical copyright is\ \texttt{\textcircledP} (Unicode point
- u+2117, SOUND RECORDING COPYRIGHT), but other copyrights
- \texttt{\textcopyright} are often also asserted. The
- \textsf{howpublished} field is the place for these symbols, and it
- may also have to hold a year designation if the
- \texttt{\textcircledP} and the \texttt{\textcopyright} apply to
- different years, as sometimes happens. (The \textsf{pubstate} field
- in this entry type is a synonym for \textsf{howpublished}. Please
- use only one of them per entry, and note that the usual mechanism
- for automatically printing \cmd{bibstring\{reprint\}} is turned off
- in \textsf{music} entries.) The \textsf{date} field holds the year
- either of all the symbols or of whichever symbol appears last in
- \textsf{howpublished}, and the \textsf{publisher} field is
- self-explanatory. (See nytrumpet:art:15.)
-\item[type:] As in all the audiovisual entry types, the \textsf{type}
- field holds the medium of the recording, e.g., vinyl, 33 rpm,
- 8-track tape, cassette, compact disc, mp3, ogg vorbis.
-\end{description}}
-
-I should also note here that I have implemented the standard
-\textsf{biblatex} \textsf{eventdate} field, in case you need it to
-identify a particular recording session or concert. It will be
-printed just after the \textsf{title}. The entries in
-\textsf{notes-test.bib} should at least give you a good idea of how
-this all works, and that file also contains an example of an audio
-book presented in a \textsf{music} entry. If you browse the examples
-in the \emph{Manual} you will see some variation from the formatting
-choices I have made for \textsf{biblatex-chicago}, but it wasn't
-always clear to me that these variations were rules as opposed to
-suggestions, so I've ignored some of them in the code. Arguments as
-to why I'm wrong will, of course, be entertained. (Cf. 17.268;
-auden:reading, beethoven:sonata29, bernstein:shostakovich,
-nytrumpet:art:15.)
-
-\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
-
-\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\textbf{online}} \emph{Manual}'s
-instructions (17.142--147, 17.198, 17.234--237) for citing online
-materials are slightly different from those suggested by standard
-\textsf{biblatex}. Indeed, this is a case where complete backward
-compatibility with other \textsf{biblatex} styles may be impossible,
-because as a general rule the \emph{Manual} considers relevant not
-only where a source is found, but also the nature of that source,
-e.g., if it's an online edition of a book (james:ambassadors), then it
-calls for a \textsf{book} entry. Even if you cite an
-\enquote{intrinsically online} source, if that source is structured
-more or less like a conventional printed periodical, then you'll
-probably want to use \textsf{article} or \textsf{review} instead of
-\textsf{online} (stenger:privacy, which cites \emph{CNN.com} ---
-\emph{Yahoo!\ News} is another example that would be treated in such a
-way). If the \enquote{standard facts of publication} are missing,
-then the \textsf{online} type is usually the best choice
-(evanston:library, powell:email). Some online materials will, no
-doubt, make it difficult to choose an entry type, but so long as all
-locating information is present, then perhaps that is enough to
-fulfill the specification, or at least so I'd like to hope.
-
-\mylittlespace Constructing an \textsf{online} .bib file entry is much
-the same as in \textsf{biblatex}. The \textsf{title} field would
-contain the title of the page, the \textsf{organization} field could
-hold the title or owner of the whole site. If there is no specific
-title for a page, but only a generic one (powell:email), then such a
-title should go in \textsf{titleaddon}, not forgetting to begin that
-field with a lowercase letter so that capitalization will work out
-correctly.
-
-\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\textbf{patent}} \emph{Manual} is very
-brief on this subject (17.219), but very clear about which information
-it wants you to present, so such entries may not work well with other
-\textsf{biblatex} styles. The important date, as far as Chicago is
-concerned, is the filing date. If a patent has been filed but not yet
-granted, then you can place the filing date in either the
-\textsf{date} field or the \textsf{origdate} field, and
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} will automatically prepend the
-bibstring \texttt{patentfiled} to it. If the patent has been granted,
-then you put the filing date in the \textsf{origdate} field, and you
-put the date it was issued in the \textsf{date} field, to which the
-bibstring \texttt{patentissued} will automatically be prepended. (In
-other words, you no longer need to use a hand-formatted
-\textsf{addendum} field, though you can place additional information
-in that field if desired, and it will be printed in close association
-with the dates.) The patent number goes in the \textsf{number} field,
-and you should use the standard \textsf{biblatex} bibstrings in the
-\textsf{type} field. Though it isn't mentioned by the \emph{Manual},
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} will print the \textsf{holder} after
-the \textsf{author}, if you provide one. See petroff:impurity.
-
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{periodical}} is the standard
-\textsf{biblatex} entry type for presenting an entire issue of a
-periodical, rather than one article within it. It has the same
-function in \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes}, and in the main uses the
-same fields, though in keeping with the system established in the
-\textsf{article} entry type (which see) you'll need to provide
-\textsf{entrysubtype} \texttt{magazine} if the periodical you are
-citing is a \enquote{newspaper} or \enquote{magazine} instead of a
-\enquote{journal.} Also, remember that the \textsf{note} field is the
-place for identifying strings like \enquote{special issue,} with its
-initial lowercase letter to activate the automatic capitalization
-routines. (See \emph{Manual} 17.170; good:wholeissue.)
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{reference}} entry type is
-aliased to \textsf{collection} by the standard \textsf{biblatex}
-styles, but I intend it to be used in cases where you need to cite a
-reference work but not an alphabetized entry or entries in that work.
-This could be because it doesn't contain such entries, or perhaps
-because you intend the citation to appear in a bibliography rather
-than in notes. Indeed, the only differences between it and
-\textsf{inreference} are the lack of a \textsf{lista} field to present
-an alphabetized entry, and the fact that any \textsf{postnote} field
-will be printed verbatim, rather than formatted as an alphabetized
-entry. (See mla:style for an example of a reference work that uses
-numbered sections rather than alphabetized entries, and that appears
-in the bibliography as well.)
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{report}} entry type is a
-\textsf{biblatex} generalization of the traditional \textsc{Bib}\TeX\
-type \textsf{techreport}. Instructions for such entries are rather
-thin on the ground in the \emph{Manual} (17.241), so I have followed
-the generic advice about formatting it like a book, and hope that the
-results conform to the specification. Its main peculiarities are the
-\textsf{institution} field in place of a \textsf{publisher}, the
-\textsf{type} field for identifying the kind of report in question,
-and the \textsf{isrn} field containing the International Standard
-Technical Report Number of a technical report. As in standard
-\textsf{biblatex}, if you use a \textsf{techreport} entry, then the
-\textsf{type} field automatically defaults to
-\cmd{bibstring\{techreport\}}. As with \textsf{booklet} and
-\textsf{manual}, you can also use a \textsf{book} entry, putting the
-report type in \textsf{note} and the \textsf{institution} in
-\textsf{publisher}. (See herwign:office.)
-
-%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
-
-\mybigspace The \colmarginpar{\textbf{review}} \textsf{review} entry
-type was added to \textsf{biblatex 0.7}, and it certainly eases the
-task of coping with the \emph{Manual}'s complicated requirements for
-citing periodicals of all sorts, though it doesn't, I admit, eliminate
-all difficulties. As its name suggests, this entry type was designed
-for reviews published in periodicals, and if you've already read the
-\textsf{article} instructions above --- if you haven't, I recommend
-doing so now --- you'll know that \textsf{review} serves as well for
-citing other sorts of material with generic titles, like letters to
-the editor, obituaries, interviews, and the like. The primary rule is
-that any piece that has only a generic title, like \enquote{review of
- \ldots,} \enquote{interview with \ldots,} or \enquote{obituary of
- \ldots,} calls for the \textsf{review} type. Any piece that also
-has a specific title, e.g., \enquote{\enquote{Lost in
- \textsc{Bib}\TeX,} an interview with \ldots,} requires an
-\textsf{article} entry. (This assumes the text is found in a
-periodical of some sort. Were it found in a book, then the
-\textsf{incollection} type would serve your needs, and you could use
-\textsf{title} and \textsf{titleaddon} there. While we're on the
-topic of exceptions, the \emph{Manual} includes an example --- 17.207
---- where the \enquote{Interview} part of the title is considered a
-subtitle rather than a titleaddon, said part therefore being included
-inside the quotation marks and capitalized accordingly. Not having
-the journal in front of me I'm not sure what prompted that decision,
-but \textsf{biblatex-chicago} would obviously have no difficulty
-coping with such a situation.)
-
-\mylittlespace Once you've decided to use \textsf{review}, then you
-need to determine which sort of periodical you are citing, the rules
-for which are the same as for an \textsf{article} entry. If it is a
-\enquote{magazine} or a \enquote{newspaper}, then you need an
-\textsf{entrysubtype} \texttt{magazine}. The generic title goes in
-\textsf{title} and the other fields work just as as they do in an
-\textsf{article} entry with the same \textsf{entrysubtype}, including
-the substitution of the \textsf{journaltitle} for the \textsf{author}
-if the latter is missing. (See 17.185, 17.188--194, 17.199--203,
-17.207; barcott:review, bundy:macneil, Clemens:letter, gourmet:052006,
-kozinn:review, nyt:obittrevor, nyt:trevorobit, unsigned:ranke:15,
-wallraff:word.) If, on the other hand, the piece comes from a
-\enquote{journal,} then you don't need an \textsf{entrysubtype}. The
-generic title goes in \textsf{title}, and the remaining fields work
-just as they do in a plain \textsf{article} entry. (See 17.201;
-ratliff:review.)
-
-\mylittlespace The onerous details are the same as I described them in
-the \textbf{article} section above, but I'll repeat some of them
-briefly here. If anything in the \textsf{title} needs formatting, you
-need to provide those instructions yourself, as the default is
-completely plain. In the short note form you no longer need to
-provide a formatted \textsf{shortauthor} field for when a
-\textsf{journaltitle} replaces an absent \textsf{author}, as the
-package automatically prints the former there in the absence of
-anything else (gourmet:052006, nyt:trevorobit). If you wish to keep
-the title at the head of an entry, then you'll need to define
-\textsf{author} somehow and place \texttt{useauthor=false} in the
-\textsf{options} field (as in nyt:obittrevor, by contrast with
-nyt:trevorobit. Please note that the \cmd{isdot} macro alone in the
-\textsf{author} field no longer works in \textsf{biblatex} 1.6 and
-later, so you may need to check your .bib files when you upgrade.) As
-in \textsf{misc} entries with an \textsf{entrysubtype}, words like
-\enquote{interview,} \enquote{review,} and \enquote{letter} only need
-capitalization after a full stop, i.e., ordinarily in a bibliography
-and not a note, so \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} automatically deals
-with this problem itself if you start the \textsf{title} field with a
-lowercase letter. The file \textsf{notes-test.bib} and the
-documentation of \cmd{autocap} will provide guidance here.
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{suppbook}} is the entry type to
-use if the main focus of a reference is supplemental material in a
-book or in a collection, e.g., an introduction, afterword, or forward,
-either by the same or a different author. In previous releases of
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago} these three just-mentioned types of
-material, and only these three types, could be referenced using the
-\textsf{introduction}, \textsf{afterword}, or \textsf{foreword}
-fields, a system that required you simply to define one of them in any
-way and leave the others undefined. The macros don't use the text
-provided by such an entry, they merely check to see if one of them is
-defined, in order to decide which sort of pre- or post-matter is at
-stake, and to print the appropriate string before the \textsf{title}
-in long notes, short notes, list of shorthands, and bibliography. I
-have retained this mechanism both for backward compatibility and
-because it works without modification across multiple languages, but
-have also added functionality which allows you to cite any sort of
-supplemental material whatever, using the \textsf{type} field. Under
-this system, simply put the nature of the material, including the
-relevant preposition, in that field, beginning with a lowercase letter
-so \textsf{biblatex} can decide whether it needs capitalization
-depending on the context. Examples might be \enquote{\texttt{preface
- to}} or \enquote{\texttt{colophon of}.} (Please note, however,
-that unless you use a \cmd{bibstring} command in the \textsf{type}
-field, the resultant entry will not be portable across languages.)
-
-\mylittlespace The other rules for constructing your .bib entry remain
-the same. The \textsf{author} field refers to the author of the
-introduction or afterword, while \textsf{bookauthor} refers to the
-author of the main text of the work, if the two differ. If the focus
-of the reference is the main text of the book, but you want to mention
-the name of the writer of an introduction or afterword for
-bibliographical completeness, then the normal \textsf{biblatex} rules
-apply, and you can just put their name in the appropriate field of a
-\textsf{book} entry, that is, in the \textsf{foreword},
-\textsf{afterword}, or \textsf{introduction} field. (See
-\emph{Manual} 17.74--75; polakow:afterw, prose:intro).
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{suppcollection}} fulfills a
-function analogous to \textsf{suppbook}. Indeed, I believe the
-\textbf{suppbook} type can serve to present supplemental material in
-both types of work, so this entry type is an alias to
-\textsf{suppbook}, which see.
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{suppperiodical}} type, new to
-\textsf{biblatex} 0.8, is intended to allow reference to
-generically-titled works in periodicals, such as regular columns or
-letters to the editor. Previous releases of
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} provided the \textsf{review} type for
-this purpose, and now you can use either of these, as I've added
-\textsf{suppperiodical} as an alias of \textsf{review}. Please see
-above under \textbf{review} for the full instructions on how to
-construct a .bib entry for such a reference.
-
-%\enlargethispage{-\baselineskip}
-
-\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\textbf{unpublished}}
-\textsf{unpublished} entry type works largely as it does in standard
-\textsf{biblatex}, though it's worth remembering that you should use a
-lowercase letter at the start of your \textsf{note} field (or perhaps
-an\ \cmd{autocap} command in the somewhat contradictory
-\textsf{howpublished}, if you have one) for material that wouldn't
-ordinarily be capitalized except at the beginning of a sentence
-(nass:address).
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{video}} is the last of the new
-audiovisual entry types, and as its name suggests it is intended for
-citing visual media, be it films of any sort or TV shows, broadcast,
-on the Net, on VHS, DVD, or Blu-ray. As with the \textsf{music} type
-discussed above, certain choices had to be made when associating the
-production roles found, e.g., on a DVD, to those bookish ones provided
-by \textsf{biblatex}. Here are the main correspondences:
-
-{\renewcommand{\descriptionlabel}[1]{\qquad\textsf{#1}}
-\begin{description}
-\item[author:] This will not infrequently be left undefined, as the
- director of a film should be identified as such and therefore placed
- in the \textsf{editor} field with the appropriate
- \textsf{editortype} (see below). You will need it, however, to
- identify the composer of, e.g., an oratorio on VHS (handel:messiah),
- or perhaps the provider of commentaries or other extras on a film
- DVD (cleese:holygrail).
-\item[editor, editora, editorb =] director or producer, or possibly
- the performer or conductor in recorded musical performances. These
- will ordinarily follow the \textsf{title} of the work, though the
- usual \texttt{useauthor} and \texttt{useeditor} options can alter
- the presentation within an entry. Because these are non-standard
- roles, you will need to identify them using the following:
-\item[editortype, editoratype, editorbtype:] The most common roles,
- all associated with specific bibstrings (or their absence), will
- likely be \texttt{director}, \texttt{produ\-cer}, and, oddly,
- \texttt{none}. The last is particularly useful if you want to
- identify performers, as they usually don't need further specifying
- and this role prevents \textsf{biblatex} from falling back on the
- default \texttt{editor} bibstring.
-\item[title, titleaddon, booktitle, maintitle:] As with the other
- audiovisual types, \textsf{video} serves as an analogue both to
- books and to collections, so the \textsf{title} may be of a whole
- film DVD or of a TV series, or it may identify one episode in a
- series or one scene in a film. In the latter cases, the title of
- the whole would go in \textsf{booktitle}. The \textsf{titleaddon}
- field may be useful for specifying the season and/or episode number
- of a TV series, or for any other information that needs to come
- between the \textsf{title} and the \textsf{booktitle}
- (cleese:holygrail, episode:tv, handel:messiah). As in the
- \textsf{music} type, \textsf{maintitle} may be necessary for a boxed
- set or something similar.
-\item[date, origdate:] The publication details of this sort of
- material are usually straightforward, at least compared with the
- \textsf{music} type, but there will be occasions when you need two
- dates. When citing an episode of a long-running TV series you may
- need both a date for the episode and a date range for the whole run,
- and when citing a film on DVD you may want to present both the
- original release date and the date of release on DVD. In both
- cases, the \textsf{origdate} field holds the year of the original
- showing or transmission, while the \textsf{date} field holds either
- the years for an entire run of a TV show or the year of publication
- of the DVD (or other medium). Cf. episode:tv, hitchcock:nbynw.
-\item[type:] As in all the audiovisual entry types, the \textsf{type}
- field holds the medium of the \textsf{title}, e.g., 8 mm, VHS, DVD,
- Blu-ray, MPEG.
-\end{description}}
-
-As with the \textsf{music} type, entries in \textsf{notes-test.bib}
-should at least give you a good idea of how all this works. (Cf.\
-17.270, 273; cleese:holygrail, episode:tv, handel:messiah,
-hitchcock:nbynw, loc:city.)
-
-\subsection{Entry Fields}
-\label{sec:entryfields}
-
-The following discussion presents, in alphabetical order, a complete
-list of the entry fields you will need to use
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes}. As in section \ref{sec:entrytypes},
-I shall include references to the numbered paragraphs of the
-\emph{Chicago Manual of Style}, and also to the entries in
-\textsf{notes-test.bib}. Many fields are most easily understood with
-reference to other, related fields. In such cases, cross references
-should allow you to find the information you need.
-
-\mybigspace As \mymarginpar{\textbf{addendum}} in standard
-\textsf{biblatex}, this field allows you to add miscellaneous
-information to the end of an entry, after publication data but before
-any \textsf{url} or \textsf{doi} field. In the \textsf{patent} entry
-type (which see), it will be printed in close association with the
-filing and issue dates. In any entry type, if your data begins with a
-word that would ordinarily only be capitalized at the beginning of a
-sentence, then simply ensure that that word is in lowercase, and the
-style will take care of the rest. Cf.\ \textsf{note}. (See
-\emph{Manual} 17.145, 17.123; davenport:attention, natrecoff:camera.)
-
-\mybigspace In most \mymarginpar{\textbf{afterword}} circumstances,
-this field will function as it does in standard \textsf{biblatex},
-i.e., you should include here the author(s) of an afterword to a given
-work. The \emph{Manual} suggests that, as a general rule, the
-afterword would need to be of significant importance in its own right
-to require mentioning in the reference apparatus, but this is clearly
-a matter for the user's judgment. As in \textsf{biblatex}, if the
-name given here exactly matches that of an editor and/or a translator,
-then \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} will concatenate these fields in
-the formatted references.
-
-%\vspace{\baselineskip}
-
-\mylittlespace As noted above, however, this field has a special
-meaning in the \textsf{suppbook} entry type, used to make an
-afterword, foreword, or introduction the main focus of a citation. If
-it's an afterword at issue, simply define \textsf{afterword} any way
-you please, leave \textsf{foreword} and \textsf{introduction}
-undefined, and \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} will do the rest. Cf.\
-\textsf{foreword} and \textsf{introduction}. (See \emph{Manual} 17.46,
-17.74; polakow:afterw.)
-
-\mybigspace At \mymarginpar{\textbf{annotation}} \label{sec:annote}
-the request of Emil Salim, \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} has, as of
-version 0.9, added a package option (see \texttt{annotation} below,
-section \ref{sec:useropts}) to allow you to produce annotated
-bibliographies. The formatting of such a bibliography is currently
-fairly basic, though it conforms with the \emph{Manual's} minimal
-guidelines (16.77). The default in \textsf{chicago-notes.cbx} is to
-define \cmd{DeclareFieldFormat\{an\-notation\}} using
-\cmd{par}\cmd{nobreak} \cmd{vskip} \cmd{bibitemsep}, though you can
-alter it by re-declaring the format in your preamble. The
-page-breaking algorithms don't always give perfect results here, but
-the default formatting looks, to my eyes, fairly decent. In addition
-to tweaking the field formatting you can also insert \cmd{par} (or
-even \cmd{vadjust\{\cmd{eject}\}}) commands into the text of your
-annotations to improve the appearance. Please consider the
-\texttt{annotation} option a work in progress, but it is usable now.
-(N.B.: The \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ field \textsf{annote} serves as an alias
-for this.)
-
-\mybigspace I \mymarginpar{\textbf{annotator}} have implemented this
-\textsf{biblatex} field pretty much as that package's standard styles
-do, even though the \emph{Manual} doesn't actually mention it. It may
-be useful for some purposes. Cf.\ \textsf{commentator}.
-
-%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
-
-\mybigspace For \mymarginpar{\textbf{author}} the most part, I have
-implemented this field in a completely standard \textsc{Bib}\TeX\
-fashion. Remember that corporate or organizational authors need to
-have an extra set of curly braces around them (e.g.,
-\texttt{\{\{Associated Press\}\}}\,) to prevent \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ from
-treating one part of the name as a surname (17.47, 17.197;
-assocpress:gun, chicago:manual:15). If there is no \textsf{author},
-then \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} will look, in sequence, for an
-\textsf{editor}, \textsf{translator}, or \textsf{compiler} (actually
-\textsf{namec}, currently) and use that name (or those names) instead,
-followed by the appropriate identifying string (esp.\ 17.41, also
-17.28--29, 17.88, 17.95, 17.172; boxer:china, brown:bremer,
-harley:cartography, schellinger:novel, sechzer:women, silver:ga\-wain,
-soltes:georgia). Please note that when a \textsf{namec} appears at
-the head of an entry, you'll need to assist \textsf{biblatex}'s
-sorting algorithms by providing a \textsf{sortkey} field to ensure
-correct alphabetization in the bibliography. Also, a
-\textsf{shortauthor} entry is necessary to provide a name at the head
-of the short note form.
-
-\mylittlespace In the rare cases when this substitution mechanism
-isn't appropriate, you have two options: either you can
-(chaucer:liferecords) put all the information into a \textsf{note}
-field rather than individual fields, or you can use the
-\textsf{biblatex} options \texttt{useauthor=false},
-\texttt{useeditor=false}, \texttt{usetranslator=false}, and
-\texttt{usecompiler=\\false} in the \textsf{options} field
-(chaucer:alt). If you look at the chaucer:alt entry in
-\textsf{notes-test.bib}, you'll notice a peculiarity of this system of
-toggles. In order to ensure that the \textsf{title} of the book
-appears at the head of the entry, you need to use \emph{all four} of
-the toggles, even though the entry contains no \textsf{translator}.
-Internally, \textsf{biblatex-chicago} is either searching for an
-author-substitute, or it is skipping over elements of the ordered,
-unidirectional chain \textsf{author -> editor -> translator ->
- compiler -> title}. If you don't include
-\texttt{usetranslator=false} in the \textsf{options} field, then the
-package begins its search at \textsf{translator} and continues on to
-\textsf{namec}, even though you have \texttt{usecompiler=false} in
-\textsf{options}. The result will be that the compilers' names will
-appear at the head of the entry. If you want to skip over parts of
-the chain, you must turn off \emph{all} of the parts up to the one you
-wish printed.
-
-\mylittlespace This system of toggles, then, can turn off
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes}'s mechanism for finding a name to
-place at the head of an entry, but it also very usefully adds the
-possibility of citing a work with an \textsf{author} by its editor,
-compiler or translator instead (17.45; eliot:pound), something that
-wasn't possible before. For full details of how this works, see the
-\textsf{editortype} documentation below. (Of course, in
-\textsf{collection} and \textsf{proceedings} entry types, an
-\textsf{author} isn't expected, so there the \textsf{editor} is
-required, as in standard \textsf{biblatex}. Also, in \textsf{article}
-or \textsf{review} entries with \textsf{entrysubtype}
-\texttt{magazine}, the absence of an \textsf{author} triggers the use
-of the \textsf{journaltitle} in its stead. See those entry types for
-further details.)
-
-\mylittlespace \textbf{NB}: The \emph{Manual} provides specific
-instructions for formatting the names of both anonymous and
-pseudonymous authors (17.32--39). In the former case, if no author is
-known or guessed at, then it may simply be omitted
-(virginia:plantation). The use of \enquote{Anonymous} as the name is
-\enquote{generally to be avoided,} but may in some cases be useful
-\enquote{in a bibliography in which several anonymous works need to be
- grouped.} If, on the other hand, \enquote{the authorship is known
- or guessed at but was omitted on the title page,} then you need to
-use the \textsf{authortype} field to let
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} know this fact. If the author is
-known (horsley:prosodies), then put \texttt{anon} in the
-\textsf{authortype} field, if guessed at (cook:sotweed) put
-\texttt{anon?}\ there. (In both cases,
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} tests for these \emph{exact} strings,
-so check your typing if it doesn't work.) This will have the effect
-of enclosing the name in square brackets, with or without the question
-mark indicating doubt. As long as you have the right string in the
-\textsf{authortype} field, \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} will also
-do the right thing automatically in the short note form.
-
-\mylittlespace The \textsf{nameaddon} field furnishes the means to
-cope with the case of pseudonymous authorship. If the author's real
-name isn't known, simply put \texttt{pseud.} (or
-\cmd{bibstring\{pseudonym\}}) in that field (centinel:letters). If
-you wish to give a pseudonymous author's real name, simply include it
-there, formatted as you wish it to appear, as the contents of this
-field won't be manipulated as a name by \textsf{biblatex}
-(lecarre:quest). If you have given the author's real name in the
-\textsf{author} field, then the pseudonym goes in \textsf{nameaddon},
-in the form \texttt{Firstname Lastname, pseud.}\ (creasey:ashe:blast,
-creasey:morton:hide, creasey:york:death). This latter method will
-allow you to keep all references to one author's work under different
-pseudonyms grouped together in the bibliography, as recommended by the
-\emph{Manual}.
-
-%\enlargethispage{-\baselineskip}
-
-\mybigspace In \mymarginpar{\textbf{authortype}}
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago}, this field serves a function very much in
-keeping with the spirit of standard \textsf{biblatex}, if not with its
-letter. Instead of allowing you to change the string used to identify
-an author, the field allows you to indicate when an author is
-anonymous, that is, when his or her name doesn't appear on the title
-page of the work you are citing. As I've just detailed under
-\textsf{author}, the \emph{Manual} generally discourages the use of
-\enquote{Anonymous} as an author, preferring that you simply omit it.
-If, however, the name of the author is known or guessed at, then
-you're supposed to enclose that name within square brackets, which is
-exactly what \textsf{biblatex-chicago} does for you when you put
-either \texttt{anon} (author known) or \texttt{anon?} (author guessed
-at) in the \textsf{authortype} field. (Putting the square brackets in
-yourself doesn't work right, hence this mechanism.) The macros test
-for these \emph{exact} strings, so check your typing if you don't see
-the brackets. Assuming the strings are correct,
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} will also automatically do the right
-thing in the short note form. Cf.\ \textsf{author}. (See 17.33--34;
-cook:sotweed, horsley:prosodies.)
-
-\mybigspace For \mymarginpar{\textbf{bookauthor}} the most part, as in
-\textsf{biblatex}, a \textsf{bookauthor} is the author of a
-\textsf{booktitle}, so that, for example, if one chapter in a book has
-different authorship from the book as a whole, you can include that
-fact in a reference (17.75; will:cohere). Keep in mind, however, that
-the entry type for introductions, forewords and afterwords
-(\textsf{suppbook}) uses \textsf{bookauthor} as the author of
-\textsf{title} (polakow:afterw, prose:intro).
-
-\mybigspace This, \mymarginpar{\vspace{-12pt}\textbf{bookpagination}}
-a standard \textsf{biblatex} field, allows you automatically to prefix
-the appropriate string to information you provide in a \textsf{pages}
-field. If you leave it blank, the default is to print no identifying
-string (the equivalent of setting it to \texttt{none}), as this is the
-practice the \emph{Manual} recommends for nearly all page numbers.
-Even if the numbers you cite aren't pages, but it is otherwise clear
-from the context what they represent, you can still leave this blank.
-If, however, you specifically need to identify what sort of unit the
-\textsf{pages} field represents, then you can either hand-format that
-field yourself, or use one of the provided bibstrings in the
-\textsf{bookpagination} field. These bibstrings currently are
-\texttt{column,} \texttt{line,} \texttt{paragraph,} \texttt{page,}
-\texttt{section,} and \texttt{verse}, all of which are used by
-\textsf{biblatex's} standard styles.
-
-\mylittlespace There are two points that may need explaining here.
-First, all the bibstrings I have just listed follow the Chicago
-specification, which may be confusing if they don't produce the
-strings you expect. Second, remember that \textsf{bookpagination}
-applies only to the \textsf{pages} field --- if you need to format a
-citation's \textsf{postnote} field, then you must use
-\textsf{pagination}, which see (15.45--46, 17.128--138).
-
-\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\textbf{booksubtitle}} subtitle for a
-\textsf{booktitle}. See the next entry for further information.
-
-\mybigspace In \mymarginpar{\textbf{booktitle}} the
-\textsf{bookinbook}, \textsf{inbook}, \textsf{incollection},
-\textsf{inproceedings}, and \textsf{letter} entry types, the
-\textsf{booktitle} field holds the title of the larger volume in which
-the \textsf{title} itself is contained as one part. It is important
-not to confuse this with the \textsf{maintitle}, which holds the more
-general title of multiple volumes, e.g., \emph{Collected Works}. It
-is perfectly possible for one .bib file entry to contain all three
-sorts of title (euripides:orestes, plato:republic:gr). You may also
-find a \textsf{booktitle} in other sorts of entries (e.g.,
-\textsf{book} or \textsf{collection}), but there it will almost
-invariably be providing information for the \textsc{Bib}\TeX\
-cross-referencing apparatus (prairie:state), which I discuss below
-(\textbf{crossref}).
-
-\mybigspace An \mymarginpar{\textbf{booktitleaddon}} annex to the
-\textsf{booktitle}. It will be printed in the main text font, without
-quotation marks. If your data begins with a word that would
-ordinarily only be capitalized at the beginning of a sentence, then
-simply ensure that that word is in lowercase, and
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} will automatically do the right thing.
-
-%\enlargethispage{-\baselineskip}
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{chapter}} field holds the
-chapter number, mainly useful only in an \textsf{inbook} or an
-\textsf{incollection} entry where you wish to cite a specific chapter
-of a book (ashbrook:brain).
-
-\mybigspace I \mymarginpar{\textbf{commentator}} have implemented this
-\textsf{biblatex} field pretty much as that package's standard styles
-do, even though the \emph{Manual} doesn't actually mention it. It may
-be useful for some purposes. Cf.\ \textsf{annotator}.
-
-\mybigspace \textsf{Biblatex} \mymarginpar{\textbf{crossref}} uses the
-standard \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ cross-referencing mechanism, and has also
-introduced a modified one of its own (\textsf{xref}). The
-\textsf{crossref} field works exactly the same as it always has, while
-\textsf{xref} attempts to remedy some of the deficiencies of the usual
-mechanism by ensuring that child entries will inherit no data at all
-from their parents. Having said all that, a few further instructions
-may be in order for users of both \textsf{biblatex} and
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago}. First, remember that fields in a
-\textsf{collection} entry, for example, differ from those in an
-\textsf{incollection} entry. In order for the latter to inherit the
-\textsf{booktitle} field from the former, the former needs to have
-such a field defined, even though a \textsf{collection} entry has no
-use itself for such an entry (see ellet:galena, keating:dearborn,
-lippincott:chicago, and prairie:state). Note also that an entry with
-a \textsf{crossref} field will mechanically try to inherit all
-applicable fields from the entry it cross-references. In the case of
-ellet:galena et al., you can see that this includes the
-\textsf{subtitle} field found in prairie:state, which would then,
-quite incorrectly, be added to the \textsf{title} of ellet:galena. In
-cases like these, you could just make sure that prairie:state didn't
-contain such a field, by placing the entire title + subtitle in the
-\textsf{title} field, separated by a colon. You'd certainly need to
-provide a \textsf{shorttitle} field for short footnotes, if you chose
-this solution. Alternatively, as you can see in ellet:galena, you can
-just define an empty \textsf{subtitle} field to prevent it inheriting
-the unwanted subtitle from prairie:state.
-
-\mylittlespace Turning now more narrowly to
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes}, the \emph{Manual} (17.70) specifies
-that if you cite several contributions to the same collection, all
-(including the collection itself) may be listed separately in the
-bibliography, which the package does automatically, using the default
-inclusion threshold of 2 in the case both of \textsf{crossref}'ed and
-\textsf{xref}'ed entries. (The familiar \cmd{nocite} command may also
-help in some circumstances.) In footnotes the specification suggests
-that, after a citation of any one contribution to the collection, all
-subsequent contributions may, even in the first, long footnote, be
-cited using a slightly shortened form, thus \enquote{avoiding
- clutter.} In the bibliography the abbreviated form is appropriate
-for all the child entries. The current version of
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} implements these instructions, but
-only if you use a \textsf{crossref} or an \textsf{xref} field, and
-only in \textsf{incollection}, \textsf{inproceedings}, or
-\textsf{letter} entries (on the last named, see just below). If you
-look at ellet:galena, keating:dearborn, lippincott:chicago, and
-prairie:state you'll see this mechanism in action in both notes and
-bibliography. If you wish to disable this, then simply don't use a
-\textsf{crossref} or \textsf{xref} field in your entries.
-
-\mylittlespace There is a subtlety involved in this mechanism that I
-should address here. Andrew Goldstone has pointed out to me some
-inaccuracies in the package's treatment of these abbreviated
-citations, both in notes and bibliography. Most of the changes I've
-made won't affect users in any way, only the actual printed output,
-but if you refer separately to chapters in a single-author
-\textsf{book}, then the shortened part of the reference, to the whole
-book, won't repeat the author's name before the title of the whole.
-If, however, you refer separately to parts of a \textsf{collection} or
-\textsf{proceedings}, even when the \textsf{editor} of the
-\textsf{collection} is the same as the \textsf{author} of an essay in
-the collection, you will see the name repeated before the abbreviated
-part referencing the whole parent volume. Because the code tests for
-entry type, if you don't use \textsf{collection} or
-\textsf{proceedings} for the whole volume, you'll not get the repeated
-name, so there may be corner cases where careful choice of the parent
-entry type gets you what you want.
-
-%\enlargethispage{-\baselineskip}
-
-\mylittlespace A published collection of letters requires a somewhat
-different treatment (17.78). If you cite more than one letter from
-the same collection, then the \emph{Manual} specifies that only the
-collection itself should appear in the bibliography. In footnotes,
-you can use the \textsf{letter} entry type, documented above, for
-each individual letter, while the collection as a whole may well
-require a \textsf{book} entry. I have, after some consideration,
-implemented the system of shortened references in \textsf{letter}
-entries, even though the \emph{Manual} doesn't explicitly require it.
-As with \textsf{incollection} and \textsf{inproceedings}, mere use of
-a \textsf{crossref} or \textsf{xref} field will activate this
-mechanism, while avoidance of said fields will disable it. (See
-white:ross:memo, white:russ, and white:total, for examples of the
-\textsf{xref} field in action in this way, and please note that the
-second of these entries is entirely fictitious, provided merely for
-the sake of example.) How then to keep the individual letters from
-appearing in the bibliography? The simplest mechanism is one provided
-by \textsf{biblatex}, which involves the \textsf{keywords} field.
-Choose a keyword for any entry you wish excluded from the bibliography
---- I've chosen \texttt{original}, for reasons that will become
-clearer later --- then in the optional argument to the
-\cmd{printbibliography} command in your document include, e.g.,
-\texttt{notkeyword=original}. (Cf.\ \textbf{keywords} and
-\textbf{userf}.)
-
-\mylittlespace If you look closely at the .bib entries for
-white:ross:memo and white:russ, you'll see that, despite using
-\textsf{xref} instead of \textsf{crossref}, the notes referring to
-them inherit data from the parent (white:total). The citation
-mechanism is making a separate call to the parent's .bib entry,
-formatting the information there to fill out the bare data provided by
-the child, but this only happens in \textsf{letter},
-\textsf{incollection}, and \textsf{inproceedings} entries. It is
-perfectly possible that other sorts of entries may make use of
-\textsf{crossref} or \textsf{xref} fields --- \textsf{inbook} and
-\textsf{bookinbook} come to mind --- but such entries will not result in
-the activation of shortened references in notes and bibliography, nor,
-when using \textsf{xref}, in the inheritance I have just pointed out.
-This is how I interpret the specification, though I'm open to
-persuasion on this score.
-
-\mylittlespace I should also take this opportunity to mention that you
-need to be careful when using the \textsf{shorthand} field in
-conjunction with the \textsf{crossref} or \textsf{xref} fields,
-bearing in mind the complicated questions of inheritance posed by all
-such cross-references, most especially in \textsf{letter},
-\textsf{incollection}, and \textsf{inproceedings} entries. A
-\textsf{shorthand} field in a parent entry is, at least in the current
-state of \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes}, a bad idea.
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{date}} field may be used to
-specify an item's complete date of publication, in \textsc{iso}8601
-format, i.e., \texttt{yyyy-mm-dd}. It may also be used to specify a
-date range, according to Lehman's instructions in §~2.3.8 of
-\textsf{biblatex.pdf}. Please be aware, however, that \textsf{Biber}
-is somewhat more exacting when parsing the \textsf{date} field than
-\textsc{Bib}\TeX, so a field looking like \texttt{1968/75} will simply
-be ignored --- you need \texttt{1968/1975} instead. If you want to
-present a more compressed year range, or more generally if only part
-of a date is required, then the \textsf{month} and \textsf{year}
-fields may be more convenient. The latter may be particularly useful
-in some entries because it can hold more than just numerical data, in
-contrast to \textsf{date} itself. Cf.\ the \textsf{misc} entry type
-in section~\ref{sec:entrytypes} above for how to use this field to
-distinguish between two classes of archival material. See also
-\textsf{origdate} and \textsf{urldate}.
-
-\mylittlespace (Users of the Chicago author-date style who wish to
-minimize the labor needed to convert a .bib database for the notes \&\
-bibliography style should be aware that, in this release, the latter
-style includes compatibility code for the \texttt{cmsdate} (silently
-ignored) and \texttt{switchdates} options, along with the mechanism
-for reversing \textsf{date} and \textsf{origdate}. This means that
-you can, in theory, leave all of this alone in your .bib file when
-making the conversion, though I'm retaining the right to revoke this
-if the code in question demonstrably interferes with the functioning
-of the notes \&\ bibliography style.)
-
-\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{day}} field, as of
-\textsf{biblatex} 0.9, is obsolete, and will be ignored if you use it
-in your .bib files. Use \textsf{date} instead.
-
-\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{doi}} \textsf{biblatex}
-field. The Digital Object Identifier of the work, which the
-\emph{Manual} suggests you can use \enquote{in place of page numbers
- or other locators} (17.181; friedman:learn\-ing). Cf.\
-\textsf{url}.
-
-\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{edition}} \textsf{biblatex}
-field. If you enter a plain cardinal number, \textsf{biblatex} will
-convert it to an ordinal (chicago:manual:15), followed by the
-appropriate string. Any other sort of edition information will be
-printed as is, though if your data begins with a word (or
-abbreviation) that would ordinarily only be capitalized at the
-beginning of a sentence, then simply ensure that that word (or
-abbreviation) is in lowercase, and \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes}
-will automatically do the right thing (babb:peru, times:guide). In
-most situations, the \emph{Manual} generally recommends the use of
-abbreviations in both bibliography and notes, but there is room for
-the user's discretion in specific citations (emerson:nature).
-
-\mylittlespace In a previous release of
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes}, I introduced the \textsf{userd} field
-to hold this non-numeric information, as \textsf{biblatex} only
-accepted an integer in the \textsf{edition} field, but this changed in
-version 0.8. The \textsf{userd} field is now obsolete, and will be
-silently ignored.
-
-\mybigspace As \mymarginpar{\textbf{editor}} far as possible, I have
-implemented this field as \textsf{biblatex}'s standard styles do, but
-the requirements specified by the \emph{Manual} present certain
-complications that need explaining. Lehman points out in his
-documentation that the \textsf{editor} field will be associated with a
-\textsf{title}, a \textsf{booktitle}, or a \textsf{maintitle},
-depending on the sort of entry. More specifically,
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago} associates the \textsf{editor} with the most
-comprehensive of those titles, that is, \textsf{maintitle} if there is
-one, otherwise \textsf{booktitle}, otherwise \textsf{title}, if the
-other two are lacking. In a large number of cases, this is exactly
-the correct behavior (adorno:benj, centinel:letters,
-plato:republic:gr, among others). Predictably, however, there are
-numerous cases that require, for example, an additional editor for one
-part of a collection or for one volume of a multi-volume work. For
-these cases I have provided the \textsf{namea} field. You should
-format names for this field as you would for \textsf{author} or
-\textsf{editor}, and these names will always be associated with the
-\textsf{title} (donne:var).
-
-\mylittlespace As you will see below, I have also provided a
-\textsf{nameb} field, which holds the translator of a given
-\textsf{title} (euripides:orestes). If \textsf{namea} and
-\textsf{nameb} are the same, \textsf{biblatex-chicago} will
-concatenate them, just as \textsf{biblatex} already does for
-\textsf{editor}, \textsf{translator}, and \textsf{namec} (i.e., the
-compiler). Furthermore, it is conceivable that a given entry will
-need separate editors for each of the three sorts of title. For this,
-and for various other tricky situations, there is the \cmd{partedit}
-macro (and its siblings), designed to be used in a \textsf{note} field
-or in one of the \textsf{titleaddon} fields (chaucer:liferecords).
-(Because the strings identifying an editor differ in notes and
-bibliography, one can't simply write them out in such a field, hence
-the need for a macro, which I discuss further in the commands section
-below [\ref{sec:formatcommands}].) Cf.\ \textsf{namea},
-\textsf{nameb}, \textsf{namec}, and \textsf{translator}.
-
-\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\textbf{editora\\editorb\\editorc}} newer
-releases of \textsf{biblatex} provide these fields as a means to
-specify additional contributors to texts in a number of editorial
-roles. In the Chicago styles they seem most relevant for the
-audiovisual types, especially \textsf{music} and \textsf{video}, where
-they help to identify conductors, directors, producers, and
-performers. To specify the role, use the fields \textsf{editoratype},
-\textsf{editorbtype}, and \textsf{editorctype}, which see. (Cf.\
-bernstein:shostakovich, handel:messiah.)
-
-%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
-
-\mybigspace Normally, \mymarginpar{\textbf{editortype}} with the
-exception of the \textsf{article} and \textsf{review} types,
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} will automatically find a name to put
-at the head of an entry, starting with an \textsf{author}, and
-proceeding in order through \textsf{editor}, \textsf{translator}, and
-\textsf{namec} (the compiler). If all four are missing, then the
-\textsf{title} will be placed at the head. (In \textsf{article} and
-\textsf{review} entries with a \texttt{magazine}
-\textsf{entrysubtype}, a missing author immediately prompts the use of
-\textsf{journaltitle} at the head of an entry. See above under
-\textsf{article} for details.) The \textsf{editortype} field, added
-in \textsf{biblatex 0.7}, provides even greater flexibility, giving
-you the ability to put a compiler at the head of an entry without
-using \textsf{namec}, freeing you from the need to use a
-\textsf{sortkey} and a \textsf{shortauthor}. You can do this even
-though an author is named (eliot:pound shows this mechanism in action
-for a standard editor, rather than a compiler). Two things are
-necessary for this to happen. First, in the \textsf{options} field
-you need to set \texttt{useauthor=false}, then you need to put the
-name you wish to see at the head of your entry into the
-\textsf{editor} or the \textsf{namea} field. If the \enquote{editor}
-is in fact a compiler, then you need to put \texttt{compiler} into the
-\textsf{editortype} field, and \textsf{biblatex} will print the
-correct string after the name in both the bibliography and in the long
-note form.
-
-\mylittlespace There are a few details of which you need to be aware.
-Because \textsf{biblatex-chicago} has added the \textsf{namea} field,
-which gives you the ability to identify the editor specifically of a
-\textsf{title} as opposed to a \textsf{maintitle} or a
-\textsf{booktitle}, the \textsf{editortype} mechanism checks first to
-see whether a \textsf{namea} is defined. If it is, that name will be
-used at the head of the entry, if it isn't it will go ahead and look
-for an \textsf{editor}. When the \textsf{editor} field is used,
-\textsf{biblatex}'s sorting algorithms will work properly, and also
-its \textsf{labelname} mechanism, meaning that a shortened form of the
-\textsf{editor} will be used in the short note form. If, however, the
-\textsf{namea} field provides the name, then your .bib entry will need
-to have a \textsf{sortkey} field to aid in alphabetizing, and it will
-also need a \textsf{shorteditor} defined to help with the short note
-form, not a \textsf{shortauthor}, ruled out because
-\texttt{useauthor=false}.
-
-\mylittlespace In \textsf{biblatex} 0.9 Lehman reworked the string
-concatenation mechanism, for reasons he outlined in his RELEASE file,
-and I have followed his lead. In short, if you define the
-\textsf{editortype} field, then concatenation is turned off, even if
-the name of the \textsf{editor} matches, for example, that of the
-\textsf{translator}. In the absence of an \textsf{editortype}, the
-usual mechanisms remain in place, that is, if the \textsf{editor}
-exactly matches a \textsf{translator} and/or a \textsf{namec}, or
-alternatively if \textsf{namea} exactly matches a \textsf{nameb}
-and/or a \textsf{namec}, then \textsf{biblatex} will print the
-appropriate strings. The \emph{Manual} specifically (17.41)
-recommends not using these identifying strings in the short note form,
-and \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} follows their recommendation. If
-you nevertheless need to provide such a string, you'll have to do it
-manually in the \textsf{shorteditor} field, or perhaps, in a different
-sort of entry, in a \textsf{shortauthor} field.
-
-\mylittlespace It may also be worth noting that because of certain
-requirements in the specification -- absence of an \textsf{author},
-for example -- the \texttt{useauthor} mechanism won't work properly in
-the following entry types: \textsf{collection}, \textsf{letter},
-\textsf{patent}, \textsf{periodical}, \textsf{proceedings},
-\textsf{review}, \textsf{suppbook}, \textsf{suppcollection}, and
-\textsf{suppperiodical}.
-
-\mybigspace These
-\mymarginpar{\textbf{editoratype\\editorbtype\\editorctype}} fields
-identify the exact role of the person named in the corresponding
-\textsf{editor[a-c]} field. Note that they are not part of the string
-concatenation mechanism. I have implemented them just as the standard
-styles do, and they have now found a use particularly in
-\textsf{music} and \textsf{video} entries. Cf.\
-bernstein:shostakovich, handel:messiah.
-
-\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{eid}} \textsf{biblatex}
-field, providing a string or number some journals use uniquely to
-identify a particular article. Only applicable to the
-\textsf{article} entry type. Not typically required by the
-\emph{Manual}.
-
-\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{entrysubtype}} and very
-powerful \textsf{biblatex} field, left undefined by the standard
-styles. In \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} it has four very specific
-uses, the first three of which I have designed in order to maintain,
-as much as possible, backward compatibility with the standard styles.
-First, in \textsf{article}, \textsf{periodical}, and \textsf{review}
-entries, the field allows you to differentiate between scholarly
-\enquote{journals,} on the one hand, and \enquote{magazines} and
-\enquote{newspapers} on the other. Usage is fairly simple: you need
-to put the exact string \texttt{magazine} into the
-\textsf{entrysubtype} field if you are citing one of the latter two
-types of source, whereas if your source is a \enquote{journal,} then
-you need do nothing.
-
-\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
-
-\mylittlespace The second use involves references to works from
-classical antiquity and, according to the \emph{Manual}, from the
-Middle Ages, as well. When you cite such a work using the traditional
-divisions into books, sections, lines, etc., divisions which are
-presumed to be the same across all editions, then you need to put the
-exact string \texttt{classical} into the \textsf{entrysubtype} field.
-This has no effect in long notes or in the bibliography, but it does
-affect the formatting of short notes, where it suppresses some of the
-punctuation. Ordinarily, you will use this toggle in a \textsf{book}
-or a \textsf{bookinbook} entry, but it is possible that a journal
-might well also present an edition of such a work. Given the
-tradition of using italics for the titles of such works, this may
-require using a \textsf{titleaddon} field (with hand formatting)
-instead of a \textsf{title}. If you wish to reference a classical or
-medieval work by the page numbers of a particular, non-standard
-edition, then you shouldn't use the \textsf{entrysubtype} toggle.
-Also, and the specification is reasonably clear about this, works from
-the Renaissance and later, even if cited by the traditional divisions,
-have short notes formatted normally, and therefore don't need an
-\textsf{entrysubtype} field. (See \emph{Manual} 17.250--262;
-aristotle:metaphy:gr, plato:republic:gr; euripides:orestes is an
-example of a translation cited by page number in a modern edition.)
-
-\mylittlespace The third use occurs in \textsf{misc} entries. If such
-an entry contains no \textsf{entrysubtype} field, then the citation
-will be treated just as the standard \textsf{biblatex} styles would,
-including the use of italics for the \textsf{title}. Any string at
-all in \textsf{entrysubtype} tells \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} to
-treat the source as part of an unpublished archive. A \textsf{misc}
-entry with \textsf{entrysubtype} defined is the least formatted of all
-those specified by the \emph{Manual} --- see
-section~\ref{sec:entrytypes} above under \textbf{misc} for all the
-details on how these citations work.
-
-\mylittlespace Fourth, and finally, the field can be defined in the
-new \textsf{artwork} entry type in order to refer to a work from
-antiquity whose title you do not wish to be italicized. Please see
-the documentation of \textsf{artwork} above for the details.
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{eventdate}} is a standard
-\textsf{biblatex} field, added recently to the \textbf{music} entry
-type in case users need it to identify a particular recording session
-or concert. See the documentation of that type above. The field will
-currently be ignored in any other sort of entry.
-
-\mybigspace As \mymarginpar{\textbf{foreword}} with the
-\textsf{afterword} field above, \textsf{foreword} will in general
-function as it does in standard \textsf{biblatex}. Like
-\textsf{afterword} (and \textsf{introduction}), however, it has a
-special meaning in a \textsf{suppbook} entry, where you simply need to
-define it somehow (and leave \textsf{afterword} and
-\textsf{introduction} undefined) to make a foreword the focus of a
-citation.
-
-\mybigspace A \mymarginpar{\textbf{holder}} standard \textsf{biblatex}
-field for identifying a \textsf{patent}'s holder(s), if they differ
-from the \textsf{author}. The \emph{Manual} has nothing to say on the
-subject, but \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} prints it (them), in
-parentheses, just after the author(s).
-
-\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
-
-\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{howpublished}}
-\textsf{biblatex} field, mainly applicable in the \textsf{booklet}
-entry type, where it replaces the \textsf{publisher}. I have also
-retained it in the \textsf{misc} and \textsf{unpublished} entry types,
-for historical reasons, and either it or \textsf{pubstate} can be used
-in \textsf{music} entries to clarify publication details.
-
-\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{institution}}
-\textsf{biblatex} field. In the \textsf{thesis} entry type, it will
-usually identify the university for which the thesis was written,
-while in a \textsf{report} entry it may identify any sort of
-institution issuing the report.
-
-\mybigspace As \mymarginpar{\textbf{introduction}} with the
-\textsf{afterword} and \textsf{foreword} fields above,
-\textsf{introduction} will in general function as it does in standard
-\textsf{biblatex}. Like those fields, however, it has a special
-meaning in a \textsf{suppbook} entry, where you simply need to define
-it somehow (and leave \textsf{afterword} and \textsf{foreword}
-undefined) to make an introduction the focus of a citation.
-
-\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{isbn}} \textsf{biblatex}
-field, for providing the International Standard Book Number of a
-publication. Not typically required by the \emph{Manual}.
-
-\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{isrn}} \textsf{biblatex}
-field, for providing the International Standard Technical Report
-Number of a report. Only relevant to the \textsf{report} entry type,
-and not typically required by the \emph{Manual}.
-
-\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{issn}} \textsf{biblatex}
-field, for providing the International Standard Serial Number of a
-periodical in an \textsf{article} or a \textsf{periodical} entry. Not
-typically required by the \emph{Manual}.
-
-\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{issue}} \textsf{biblatex}
-field, designed for \textsf{article}, \textsf{periodical}, or
-\textsf{review} entries identified by something like \enquote{Spring}
-or \enquote{Summer} rather than by the usual \textsf{month} or
-\textsf{number} fields (brown:bremer).
-
-\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\textbf{issuesubtitle}} subtitle for an
-\textsf{issuetitle} --- see next entry.
-
-\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{issuetitle}}
-\textsf{biblatex} field, intended to contain the title of a special
-issue of any sort of periodical. If the reference is to one article
-within the special issue, then this field should be used in an
-\textsf{article} entry (conley:fifthgrade), whereas if you are citing
-the entire issue as a whole, then it would go in a \textsf{periodical}
-entry, instead (good:wholeissue). The \textsf{note} field is the
-proper place to identify the type of issue, e.g.,\ \texttt{special
- issue}, with the initial letter lower-cased to enable automatic
-contextual capitalization.
-
-\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\textbf{journalsubtitle}} subtitle for a
-\textsf{journaltitle} --- see next entry.
-
-\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{journaltitle}}
-\textsf{biblatex} field, replacing the standard \textsc{Bib}\TeX\
-field \textsf{journal}, which, however, still works as an alias. It
-contains the name of any sort of periodical publication, and is found
-in the \textsf{article} and \textsf{review} entry types. In the case
-where a piece in an \textsf{article} or \textsf{review}
-(\textsf{entrysubtype} \texttt{magazine}) doesn't have an author,
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} provides for this field to be used as
-the author. See above (section~\ref{sec:entrytypes}) under
-\textbf{article} for details. The lakeforester:pushcarts and
-nyt:trevorobit entries in \textsf{notes-test.bib} will give you some
-idea of how this works.
-
-%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{keywords}} field is
-\textsf{biblatex}'s extremely powerful and flexible technique for
-filtering bibliography entries, allowing you to subdivide a
-bibliography according to just about any criteria you care to invent.
-See \textsf{biblatex.pdf} (3.10.4) for thorough documentation. In
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago}, the field can provide a convenient means to
-exclude certain entries from making their way into a bibliography. We
-have already seen (\textbf{letter}, above) how the \emph{Manual}
-(17.78) requires, in the case of published collections of letters,
-that when more than one letter from the same collected is cited, the
-bibliography should contain only a reference to the collection as a
-whole (white:ross:memo, white:russ, white:total). Similarly, when
-citing both an original text and its translation (see \textbf{userf},
-below), the \emph{Manual} (17.66) suggests including the original at
-the end of the translation's bibliography entry, a procedure which
-requires that the original not also be printed as a separate
-bibliography entry (furet:passing:eng, furet:passing:fr,
-aristotle:metaphy:trans, aristotle:metaphy:gr). Finally, citations of
-well-known reference works (like the \emph{Encyclopaedia Britannica},
-for example), need only be presented in notes, and not in the
-bibliography (17.238--239; ency:britannica, wikiped:bibtex; see
-\textsf{inreference}, above). In all these cases, I have suggested the
-inclusion of \texttt{original} in the \textsf{keywords} field, along
-with a \texttt{notkeyword=original} in the optional argument to the
-\cmd{printbibliography} command, though of course you can choose any
-key you wish.
-
-\mybigspace A \mymarginpar{\textbf{language}} standard
-\textsf{biblatex} field, designed to allow you to specify the
-language(s) in which a work is written. As a general rule, the
-Chicago style doesn't require you to provide this information, though
-it may well be useful for clarifying the nature of certain works, such
-as bilingual editions, for example. There is at least one situation,
-however, when the \emph{Manual} does specify this data, and that is
-when the title of a work is given in translation, even though no
-translation of the work has been published, something that might
-happen when a title is in a language deemed to be unparseable by a
-majority of your expected readership (17.65--67, 17.166, 17.177;
-pirumova, rozner:liberation). In such a case, you should provide the
-language(s) involved using this field, connecting multiple languages
-using the keyword \texttt{and}. (I have retained \textsf{biblatex's}
-\cmd{bibstring} mechanism here, which means that you can use the
-standard bibstrings or, if one doesn't exist for the language you
-need, just give the name of the language, capitalized as it should
-appear in your text. You can also mix these two modes inside one
-entry without apparent harm.)
-
-\mylittlespace An alternative arrangement suggested by the
-\emph{Manual} is to retain the original title of a piece but then to
-provide its translation, as well. If you choose this option, you'll
-need to make use of the \textbf{usere} field, on which see below. In
-effect, you'll probably only ever need to use one of these two fields
-in any given entry, and in fact \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} will
-only print one of them if both are present, preferring \textsf{usere}
-over \textsf{language} for this purpose (see kern and weresz). Note
-also that both of these fields are universally associated with the
-\textsf{title} of a work, rather than with a \textsf{booktitle} or a
-\textsf{maintitle}. If you need to attach a language or a translation
-to either of the latter two, you could probably manage it with special
-formatting inside those fields themselves.
-
-\mybigspace I \mymarginpar{\textbf{lista}} intend this field
-specifically for presenting citations from reference works that are
-arranged alphabetically, where the name of the item rather than a page
-or volume number should be given. The field is a \textsf{biblatex}
-list, which means you should separate multiple items with the keyword
-\texttt{and}. Each item receives its own set of quotation marks, and
-the whole list will be prefixed by the appropriate string
-(\enquote{s.v.,} \emph{sub verbo}, pl.\ \enquote{s.vv.}).
-\textsf{Biblatex-chicago-notes} will only print such a field in a
-\textsf{book} or an \textsf{inreference} entry, and you should look at
-the documentation of these entry types for further details. (See
-\emph{Manual} 17.238--239; ency:britannica, grove:sibelius,
-times:guide, wikiped:bibtex.)
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{location}} is
-\textsf{biblatex}'s version of the usual \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ field
-\textsf{address}, though the latter is accepted as an alias if that
-simplifies the modification of older .bib files. According to the
-\emph{Manual} (17.99), a citation usually need only provide the first
-city listed on any title page, though a list of cities separated by
-the keyword \enquote{\texttt{and}} will be formatted appropriately.
-If the place of publication is unknown, you can use
-\cmd{autocap\{n\}.p.}\ instead (17.102), though in many or even most
-cases this isn't strictly necessary (17.32--34; virginia:plantation).
-For all cities, you should use the common English version of the name,
-if such exists (17.101).
-
-%\enlargethispage{-\baselineskip}
-
-\mylittlespace Two more details need explanation here. In
-\textsf{article}, \textsf{periodical}, and \textsf{review} entries,
-there is usually no need for a \textsf{location} field, but
-\enquote{if a journal might be confused with another with a similar
- title, or if it might not be known to the users of a bibliography,}
-then this field can present the place or institution where it is
-published (17.174, 17.196; lakeforester:pushcarts, kimluu:diethyl, and
-garrett). Less predictably, it is here that \emph{Manual} indicates
-that a particular book is a reprint edition (17.123), so in such a
-case you can use the \textsf{biblatex-chicago} macro \cmd{reprint},
-followed by a comma, space, and the location (aristotle:metaphy:gr,
-schweitzer:bach). (You can also now, somewhat more simply, just put
-the string \texttt{reprint} into the \textsf{pubstate} field to
-achieve the same result. See the \textsf{pubstate} documentation
-below.) The \textsf{origdate} field may be used to give the original
-date of publication, and of course more complicated situations should
-usually be amenable to inclusion in the \textsf{note} field
-(emerson:nature).
-
-\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\textbf{mainsubtitle}} subtitle for a
-\textsf{maintitle} --- see next entry.
-
-\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\textbf{maintitle}} main title for a
-multi-volume work, e.g., \enquote{Opera} or \enquote{Collected Works.}
-(See donne:var, euripides:orestes, harley:cartography, lach:asia,
-pelikan:chris\-tian, and plato:republic:gr.)
-
-%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
-
-\mybigspace An \mymarginpar{\textbf{maintitleaddon}} annex to the
-\textsf{maintitle}, for which see previous entry. Such an annex would
-be printed in the main text font. If your data begins with a word
-that would ordinarily only be capitalized at the beginning of a
-sentence, then simply ensure that that word is in lowercase, and
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} will automatically do the right thing.
-
-\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{month}} \textsf{biblatex}
-field, containing the month of publication. This should be an
-integer, i.e., \texttt{month=\{3\}} not \texttt{month=\{March\}}. See
-\textsf{date} for more information.
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{namea}} is one of the fields
-\textsf{biblatex} provides for style writers to use, but which it
-leaves undefined itself. In \textsf{biblatex-chicago} it contains the
-name(s) of the editor(s) of a \textsf{title}, if the entry has a
-\textsf{booktitle} or \textsf{maintitle}, or both, in which situation
-the \textsf{editor} would be associated with one of these latter
-fields (donne:var). You should present names in this field exactly as
-you would those in an \textsf{author} or \textsf{editor} field, and
-the package will concatenate this field with \textsf{nameb} if they
-are identical. See under \textbf{editor} above for the full details.
-Cf.\ also \textsf{nameb}, \textsf{namec}, \textsf{translator}, and the
-macros \cmd{partedit}, \cmd{parttrans}, \cmd{parteditandtrans},
-\cmd{partcomp}, \cmd{parteditandcomp}, \cmd{parttransandcomp}, and
-\cmd{partedittransand\-comp}, for which see
-section~\ref{sec:formatcommands}.
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{nameaddon}} field is provided by
-\textsf{biblatex}, though not used by the standard styles. In
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago}, it allows you, in most entry types, to
-specify that an author's name is a pseudo\-nym, or to provide either
-the real name or the pseudonym itself, if the other is being provided
-in the \textsf{author} field. The abbreviation
-\enquote{\texttt{pseud}.}\ (always lowercase in English) is specified,
-either on its own or after the pseudo\-nym (centinel:letters,
-creasey:ashe:blast, creasey:morton:hide, creasey:york:death, and
-le\-carre:quest); \cmd{bibstring\{pseudonym\}} does the work for you.
-See under \textbf{author} above for the full details.
-
-\mylittlespace In the \textsf{customc} entry type, on the other hand,
-which is used to create alphabetized cross-references to other
-bibliography entries, the \textsf{nameaddon} field allows you to
-change the default string linking the two parts of the
-cross-reference. The code automatically tests for a known bibstring,
-which it will italicize. Otherwise, it prints the string as is.
-
-\mybigspace Like \mymarginpar{\textbf{nameb}} \textsf{namea}, above,
-this is a field left undefined by the standard \textsf{biblatex}
-styles. In \textsf{biblatex-chicago}, it contains the name(s) of the
-translator(s) of a \textsf{title}, if the entry has a
-\textsf{booktitle} or \textsf{maintitle}, or both, in which situation
-the \textsf{translator} would be associated with one of these latter
-fields (euripides:orestes). You should present names in this field
-exactly as you would those in an \textsf{author} or
-\textsf{translator} field, and the package will concatenate this field
-with \textsf{namea} if they are identical. See under the
-\textbf{translator} field below for the full details. Cf.\ also
-\textsf{namea}, \textsf{namec}, \textsf{origlanguage},
-\textsf{translator}, \textsf{userf} and the macros \cmd{partedit},
-\cmd{parttrans}, \cmd{parteditandtrans}, \cmd{partcomp},
-\cmd{parteditandcomp}, \cmd{parttransandcomp}, and
-\cmd{partedittransandcomp} in section~\ref{sec:formatcommands}.
-
-\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\textbf{namec}} \emph{Manual} (17.41)
-specifies that works without an author may be listed under an editor,
-translator, or compiler, assuming that one is available, and it also
-specifies the strings to be used with the name(s) of compiler(s). All
-this suggests that the \emph{Manual} considers this to be standard
-information that should be made available in a bibliographic
-reference, so I have added that possibility to the many that
-\textsf{biblatex} already provides, such as the \textsf{editor},
-\textsf{translator}, \textsf{commentator}, \textsf{annotator}, and
-\textsf{redactor}, along with writers of an \textsf{introduction},
-\textsf{foreword}, or \textsf{afterword}. Since \textsf{biblatex.bst}
-doesn't offer a \textsf{compiler} field, I have adopted for this
-purpose the otherwise unused field \textsf{namec}. It is important to
-understand that, despite the analogous name, this field does not
-function like \textsf{namea} or \textsf{nameb}, but rather like
-\textsf{editor} or \textsf{translator}, and therefore if used will be
-associated with whichever title field these latter two would be were
-they present in the same entry. Identical fields among these three
-will be concatenated by the package, and concatenated too with the
-(usually) unnecessary commentator, annotator and the rest. Also
-please note that I've arranged the concatenation algorithms to include
-\textsf{namec} in the same test as \textsf{namea} and \textsf{nameb},
-so in this particular circumstance you can, if needed, make
-\textsf{namec} analogous to these two latter, \textsf{title}-only
-fields. (See above under \textbf{editortype} for details of how you
-may, in certain circumstances, use that field to identify a compiler.
-This method will be particularly useful if you don't need to
-concatenate the \textsf{namec} with any other role, because if you use
-the \textsf{editor} field \textsf{biblatex} will automatically attend
-to alphabetization and name-replacement in the bibliography, and will
-also provide a name for short notes.)
-
-\mylittlespace It might conceivably be necessary at some point to
-identify the compiler(s) of a \textsf{title} separate from the
-compiler(s) of a \textsf{booktitle} or \textsf{maintitle}, but for the
-moment I've run out of available \textsf{name} fields, so you'll have
-to fall back on the \cmd{partcomp} macro or the related
-\cmd{parteditandcomp}, \cmd{parttransandcomp}, and
-\cmd{partedittransandcomp}, on which see Commands
-(section~\ref{sec:formatcommands}) below. (Future releases may be
-able to remedy this.) It may be as well to mention here too that of
-the three names that can be substituted for the missing
-\textsf{author} at the head of an entry,
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} will choose an \textsf{editor} if
-present, then a \textsf{translator} if present, falling back to
-\textsf{namec} only in the absence of the other two, and assuming that
-the fields aren't identical, and therefore to be concatenated. In a
-change from the previous behavior, these algorithms also now test for
-\textsf{namea} or \textsf{nameb}, which will be used instead of
-\textsf{editor} and \textsf{translator}, respectively, giving the
-package the greatest likelihood of finding a name to place at the head
-of an entry. Please remember, however, that if this name is supplied
-by any of the non-standard fields \textsf{name[a-c]}, then you will
-need to provide a \textsf{sortkey} to assist with alphabetization in
-the bibliography, and also a \textsf{shortauthor} for the short note
-form.
-
-\mybigspace As \mymarginpar{\textbf{note}} in standard
-\textsf{biblatex}, this field allows you to provide bibliographic data
-that doesn't easily fit into any other field. In this sense, it's
-very like \textsf{addendum}, but the information provided here will be
-printed just before the publication data. (See chaucer:alt,
-chaucer:liferecords, cook:sotweed, emerson:nature, and rodman:walk for
-examples of this usage in action.) It also has a specialized use in
-all the periodical types (\textsf{article}, \textsf{periodical}, and
-\textsf{review}), where it holds supplemental information about a
-\textsf{journaltitle}, such as \enquote{special issue}
-(conley:fifthgrade, good:wholeissue). In all uses, if your data
-begins with a word that would ordinarily only be capitalized at the
-beginning of a sentence, then simply ensure that that word is in
-lowercase, and \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} will automatically do
-the right thing. Cf.\ \textsf{addendum}.
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{number}} is a standard
-\textsf{biblatex} field, containing the number of a
-\textsf{journaltitle} in an \textsf{article} or \textsf{review} entry,
-the number of a \textsf{title} in a \textsf{periodical} entry, or the
-volume/number of a book in a \textsf{series}. Generally, in an
-\textsf{article}, \textsf{periodical}, or \textsf{review} entry, this
-will be a plain cardinal number, but in such entries
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago} now does the right thing if you have a list
-or range of numbers (unsigned:ranke:15). In any \textsf{book}-like entry
-the field may well contain considerably more information, including
-even a reference to \enquote{2nd ser.,} for example, while the
-\textsf{series} field in such an entry will contain the name of the
-series, rather than a number. This field is also the place for the
-patent number in a \textsf{patent} entry. Cf.\ \textsf{issue} and
-\textsf{series}. (See \emph{Manual} 17.90--95 and boxer:china,
-palmatary:pottery, wauchope:ceramics; 17.163 and beattie:crime,
-conley:fifthgrade, friedman:learning, garrett, gibbard, hlatky:hrt,
-mcmillen:antebellum, rozner:liberation, warr:ellison.)
-
-\mylittlespace \textbf{NB}: This may be an opportune place to point
-out that the \emph{Manual} (17.129) prefers arabic to roman numerals
-in most circumstances (chapters, volumes, series numbers, etc.), even
-when such numbers might be roman in the work cited. The obvious
-exception is page numbers, in which roman numerals indicate that the
-citation came from the front matter, and should therefore be retained.
-Another possible exception is in references to works \enquote{with
- many and complex divisions,} in which \enquote{a mixture of roman
- and arabic} may be \enquote{easier to disentangle.}
-
-\mybigspace A \mymarginpar{\textbf{options}} standard
-\textsf{biblatex} field, for setting certain options on a per-entry
-basis rather than globally. Information about some of the more common
-options may be found above under \textsf{author} and below in
-section~\ref{sec:options}. See chaucer:alt, eliot:pound,
-herwign:office, lecarre:quest, and mla:style for examples of the field
-in use.
-
-\mybigspace A \mymarginpar{\textbf{organization}} standard
-\textsf{biblatex} field, retained mainly for use in the \textsf{misc},
-\textsf{online}, and \textsf{manual} entry types, where it may be of
-use to specify a publishing body that might not easily fit in other
-categories. In \textsf{biblatex}, it is also used to identify the
-organization sponsoring a conference in a \textsf{proceedings} or
-\textsf{inproceedings} entry, and I have retained this as a
-possibility, though the \emph{Manual} is silent on the matter.
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{origdate}} is a new
-\textsf{biblatex} field, replacing the obsolete \textsf{origyear}, and
-allowing more than one full specification for those references which
-need to provide more than one date. As with the analogous
-\textsf{date} field, you provide the date (or range of dates) in
-\textsc{iso}8601 format, i.e., \texttt{yyyy-mm-dd}. In most entry
-types, you would use \textsf{origdate} to provide the date of first
-publication of a work, most usually needed only in the case of reprint
-editions, but also recommended by the \emph{Manual} for electronic
-editions of older works (17.123, 17.146--7; aristotle:metaphy:gr,
-emerson:nature, james:ambassadors, schweitzer:bach). In the
-\textsf{letter} and \textsf{misc} (with \textsf{entrysubtype}) entry
-types, the \textsf{origdate} identifies when a letter (or similar) was
-written. In such \textsf{misc} entries, some
-\enquote{non-letter-like} materials (like interviews) need the
-\textsf{date} field for this purpose, while in \textsf{letter} entries
-the \textsf{date} applies to the publication of the whole collection.
-If such a published collection were itself a reprint, improvisation in
-the \textsf{location} field might be able to rescue the situation.
-(See jackson:paulina:letter, white:ross:memo, white:russ, and
-white:total for how \textsf{letter} entries usually work; creel:house
-shows the field in action in a \textsf{misc} entry, while
-spock:interview uses \textsf{date}.)
-
-\mylittlespace Because the \textsf{origdate} field only accepts
-numbers, some improvisation may be needed if you wish to include
-\enquote{n.d.}\ (\cmd{bibstring\{nodate\}}) in an entry. In
-\textsf{letter} and \textsf{misc}, this information can be placed in
-\textsf{titleaddon}, but in other entry types you may need to use the
-\textsf{location} field.
-
-\mybigspace In \mymarginpar{\textbf{origlanguage}} keeping with the
-\emph{Manual}'s specifications, I have fairly thoroughly redefined
-\textsf{biblatex}'s facilities for treating translations. The
-\textsf{origtitle} field isn't used, while the \textsf{language} and
-\textsf{origdate} fields have been press-ganged for other duties. The
-\textsf{origlanguage} field, for its part, retains a dual role in
-presenting translations in a bibliography. The details of the
-\emph{Manual}'s suggested treatment when both a translation and an
-original are cited may be found below under \textbf{userf}. Here,
-however, I simply note that the introductory string used to connect
-the translation's citation with the original's is \enquote{Originally
- published as,} which I suggest may well be inaccurate in a great
-many cases, as for instance when citing a work from classical
-antiquity, which will most certainly not \enquote{originally} have
-been published in the Loeb Classical Library. Although not, strictly
-speaking, authorized by the \emph{Manual}, I have provided another way
-to introduce the original text, using the \textsf{origlanguage} field,
-which must be provided \emph{in the entry for the translation, not the
- original text} (aristotle:metaphy:trans). If you put one of the
-standard \textsf{biblatex} bibstrings there (enumerated below), then
-the entry will work properly across multiple languages. Otherwise,
-just put the name of the language there, localized as necessary, and
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago} will eschew \enquote{Originally published
- as} in favor of, e.g., \enquote{Greek edition:} or \enquote{French
- edition:}. This has no effect in notes, where only the work cited
---- original or translation --- will be printed, but it may help to
-make the \emph{Manual}'s suggestions for the bibliography more
-palatable.
-
-\mylittlespace That was the first usage, in keeping at least with the
-spirit of the \emph{Manual}. I have also, perhaps less in keeping
-with that specification, retained some of \textsf{biblatex}'s
-functionality for this field. If an entry doesn't have a
-\textsf{userf} field, and therefore won't be combining a text and its
-translation in the bibliography, you can also use
-\textsf{origlanguage} as Lehman intended it, so that instead of
-saying, e.g., \enquote{translated by X,} the entry will read
-\enquote{translated from the German by X.} The \emph{Manual} doesn't
-mention this, but it may conceivably help avoid certain ambiguities in
-some citations. As in \textsf{biblatex}, if you wish to use this
-functionality, you have to provide \emph{not} the name of the
-language, but rather a bibliography string, which may, at the time of
-writing, be one of \texttt{american}, \texttt{brazilian},
-\texttt{danish}, \texttt{dutch}, \texttt{english}, \texttt{french},
-\texttt{german}, \texttt{greek}, \texttt{italian}, \texttt{latin},
-\texttt{norwegian}, \texttt{portuguese}, \texttt{spanish}, or
-\texttt{swedish}, to which I've added \texttt{russian}.
-
-%\enlargethispage{-\baselineskip}
-
-\mybigspace At \colmarginpar{\textbf{origlocation}} least one example
-in the \emph{Manual} provides a more complete specification of a
-reprinted book's original publication details than has been possible
-using previous releases of \textsf{biblatex-chicago} (17.123).
-Starting with this release, you can provide both an
-\textsf{origlocation} and an \textsf{origpublisher} to go along with
-the \textsf{origdate}, should you so wish, and all of this information
-will be printed in long notes and bibliography. You can now also use
-this field in a \textsf{letter} or \textsf{misc} (with
-\textsf{entrysubtype}) entry to give the place where a published or
-unpublished letter was written (17.76). (Jonathan Robinson has
-suggested that the \textsf{origlocation} may in some circumstances
-actually be necessary for disambiguation, his example being early
-printed editions of the same material printed in the same year but in
-different cities. The new functionality should make this simple to
-achieve. Cf.\ \textsf{origdate}, \textsf{origpublisher} and
-\textsf{pubstate}; schweitzer:bach.)
-
-\mybigspace As \colmarginpar{\textbf{origpublisher}} with the
-\textsf{origlocation} field just above, this new field allows you to
-provide fuller original publication details for reprinted books
-(17.123). You can now provide an \textsf{origpublisher} and/or an
-\textsf{origlocation} in addition to the \textsf{origdate}, and all
-will be presented in long notes and bibliography. (Cf.\
-\textsf{origdate}, \textsf{origlocation}, and \textsf{pubstate};
-schweitzer:bach.)
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{origyear}} field is, as of
-\textsf{biblatex} 0.9, obsolete. It is ignored if it appears in a
-.bib file.
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{pages}} is the standard
-\textsf{biblatex} field for providing page references. In many
-\textsf{article} and \textsf{review} entries you'll find this contains
-something other than a page number, e.g. a section name or edition
-specification (17.188, 17.191, 17.202; kozinn:review, nyt:obittrevor,
-nyt:trevorobit). Of course, the same may be true of almost any sort
-of entry, though perhaps with less frequency. Curious readers may
-wish to look at brown:bremer (17.172) for an example of a
-\textsf{pages} field used to facilitate reference to a two-part
-journal article. Cf.\ \textsf{number} for more information on the
-\emph{Manual}'s preferences regarding the formatting of numerals;
-\textsf{bookpagination} and \textsf{pagination} provide details about
-\textsf{biblatex's} mechanisms for specifying what sort of division a
-given \textsf{pages} field contains; and \textsf{usera} discusses a
-different way to present the section information pertaining to a
-newspaper article.
-
-\mybigspace This, \mymarginpar{\textbf{pagination}} a standard
-\textsf{biblatex} field, allows you automatically to prefix the
-appropriate identifying string to information you provide in the
-\textsf{postnote} field of a citation command, whereas
-\textsf{bookpagination} allows you to prefix a string to the
-\textsf{pages} field. Please see \textbf{bookpagination} above for
-all the details on this functionality, as aside from the difference
-just mentioned the two fields are equivalent.
-
-\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{part}} \textsf{biblatex}
-field, which identifies physical parts of a single logical volume in
-\textsf{book}-like entries, not in periodicals. It has the same
-purpose in \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes}, but because the
-\emph{Manual} (17.88) calls such a thing a \enquote{book} and not a
-\enquote{part,} the string printed in notes and bibliography will, at
-least in English, be \enquote{\texttt{bk.}\hspace{-2pt}}\ instead of
-the plain dot between volume number and part number
-(harley:cartography, lach:asia). This field should only be used in
-association with a \textsf{volume} number, so if you need to identify
-\enquote{parts} or \enquote{books} that are part of a published
-\textsf{series}, for example, then you'll need to use a different
-field, (which in this case would be \textsf{number}
-[palmatary:pottery]). Cf.\ \textsf{volume}.
-
-\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{publisher}}
-\textsf{biblatex} field. Remember that \enquote{\texttt{and}} is a
-keyword for connecting multiple publishers, so if a publisher's name
-contains \enquote{and,} then you should either use the ampersand (\&)
-or enclose the whole name in additional braces. (See \emph{Manual}
-17.103--114; aristotle:metaphy:gr, cohen:schiff, creasey:ashe:blast,
-dunn:revolutions.)
-
-\mylittlespace There are, as one might expect, a couple of further
-subtleties involved here. Ordinarily, two publishers will be
-separated by a forward slash in both notes and bibliography, but if a
-company issues \enquote{certain books through a special publishing
- division or under a special imprint,} then the two names will be
-separated by a comma, which you will need to provide in the
-\textsf{publisher} field. The \emph{Manual}'s example (17.112) is
-\enquote{\texttt{Ohio University Press, Swallow Press},} which would
-cause \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} no problems. If a book has two
-co-publishers, \enquote{usually in different countries,} (17.113) then
-the simplest thing to do is to choose one, probably the nearest one
-geographically. If you feel it necessary to include both, then
-levistrauss:savage demonstrates one way of doing so, using a
-combination of the \textsf{publisher} and \textsf{location} fields.
-Finally, if the publisher is unknown, then the \emph{Manual}
-recommends (17.109) simply using the place (if known) and the date.
-If for some reason you need to indicate the absence of a publisher,
-the abbreviation given by the \emph{Manual} is \texttt{n.p.}, though
-this can also stand for \enquote{no place.} Some style guides
-apparently suggest using \texttt{s.n.}\,(= \emph{sine nomine}) to
-specify the lack of a publisher, but the \emph{Manual} doesn't mention
-this.
-
-\mybigspace Due \mymarginpar{\textbf{pubstate}} to specific
-requirements in the author-date style, I have implemented this field
-there as a way of providing accurate citations of reprinted books. As
-the functionality seemed useful, I have also included some of it in
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes}. In previous releases you could
-identify a reprint by placing \cmd{bibstring\{reprint\}} in the
-\textsf{location} field, followed by a comma, and the style would
-print the appropriate string in notes and bibliography. Now, if it is
-more convenient, easier to remember, or if you want to reuse your .bib
-database for the author-date style, you can simply put the string
-\texttt{reprint} into the \textsf{pubstate} field, and the package
-will take care of everything for you. Both of these methods will now
-work just fine, but please choose only one per entry, otherwise the
-string will be printed twice. Please note, also, that this automatic
-mechanism has been disabled in \textsf{music} and \textsf{video}
-entries, as it isn't appropriate to those sorts of material. In the
-latter, \textsf{pubstate} will be silently ignored, whereas in the
-former, for compatibility with the author-date style, the field
-functions as a synonym for \textsf{howpublished}, and will be printed
-verbatim. Currently, if you put anything besides \texttt{reprint} in
-the \textsf{pubstate} field of anything except \textsf{music} entries,
-it too will silently be ignored, but this may change in future
-releases.
-
-\mybigspace I \mymarginpar{\textbf{redactor}} have implemented this
-field just as \textsf{biblatex}'s standard styles do, even though the
-\emph{Manual} doesn't actually mention it. It may be useful for some
-purposes. Cf.\ \textsf{annotator} and \textsf{commentator}.
-
-\mybigspace \textbf{NB:} \mymarginpar{\textbf{reprinttitle}}
-\textbf{Please note that this feature is in an alpha state, and that
- I'm contemplating using a different field in the future for this
- functionality. I include it here in the hope that it might receive
- some testing in the meantime.} At the request of Will Small, I have
-included a means of providing the original publication details of an
-essay or a chapter that you are citing from a subsequent reprint,
-e.g., a \emph{Collected Essays} volume. In such a case, at least
-according to the \emph{Manual} (17.73), such details needn't be
-provided in notes, only in the bibliography, and then only if these
-details are \enquote{of particular interest.} The data would follow
-an introductory phrase like \enquote{originally published as,} making
-the problem strictly parallel to that of including details of a work
-in the original language alongside the details of its translation. I
-have addressed the latter problem with the \textsf{userf} field, which
-provides a sort of cross-referencing method for this purpose, and
-\textsf{reprinttitle} works in \emph{exactly} the same way. In the
-.bib entry for the reprint you include a cross-reference to the cite
-key of the original location using the \textsf{reprinttitle} field
-(which it may help mnemonically to think of as a \enquote{reprinted
- title} field). The main difference between the two forms is that
-\textsf{userf} prints all but the \textsf{author} of the original
-work, whereas \textsf{reprinttitle} suppresses both the
-\textsf{author} and the \textsf{title} of the original, giving only
-the more general details, beginning with, e.g., the
-\textsf{journaltitle} or \textsf{booktitle} and continuing from there.
-The string prefacing this information will be \enquote{Originally
- published in.} Please see the documentation on \textsf{userf} below
-for all the details on how to create .bib entries for presenting your
-data.
-
-\mybigspace A \mymarginpar{\textbf{series}} standard \textsf{biblatex}
-field, usually just a number in an \textsf{article},
-\textsf{periodical}, or \textsf{review} entry, almost always the name
-of a publication series in \textsf{book}-like entries. If you need to
-attach further information to the \textsf{series} name in a
-\textsf{book}-like entry, then the \textsf{number} field is the place
-for it, whether it be a volume, a number, or even something like
-\enquote{2nd ser.} or \enquote{\cmd{bibstring\{oldseries\}}.} Of
-course, you can also use \cmd{bibstring\{oldseries\}} or
-\cmd{bibstring\{newseries\}} in an \textsf{article} entry, but there
-you would place it in the \textsf{series} field itself. (In fact, the
-\textsf{series} field in \textsf{article}, \textsf{periodical}, and
-\textsf{review} entries is one of the places where \textsf{biblatex}
-allows you just to use the plain bibstring \texttt{oldseries}, for
-example, rather than making you type \cmd{bibstring\{oldseries\}}.
-The \textsf{type} field in \textsf{manual}, \textsf{patent},
-\textsf{report}, and \textsf{thesis} entries also has this
-auto-detection mechanism in place; see the discussion of
-\cmd{bibstring} below for details.) In whatever entry type, these
-bibstrings produce the required abbreviation, which thankfully is the
-same in both notes and bibliography. (For books and similar entries,
-see \emph{Manual} 17.90--95; boxer:china, browning:aurora,
-palmatary:pottery, plato:republic:gr, wauchope:ceramics; for
-periodicals, see 17.178; garaud:gatine, sewall:letter.) Cf.\
-\textsf{number} for more information on the \emph{Manual}'s
-preferences regarding the formatting of numerals.
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{shortauthor}} is a standard
-\textsf{biblatex} field, but \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} makes
-considerably grea\-ter use of it than the standard styles. For the
-purposes of the Chicago style, the field provides the name to be used
-in the short form of a footnote. In the vast majority of cases, you
-don't need to specify it, because the \textsf{biblatex} system selects
-the author's last name from the \textsf{author} field and uses it in
-such a reference, but in a few cases this default behavior won't work.
-In books without an author and listed under an editor,
-\textsf{biblatex} does the right thing and uses the surname of the
-editor in a short note (zukowsky:chicago), but if the work is listed
-under a compiler (or any of the non-standard names
-\textsf{name[a-c]}), you need to provide that person's name in
-\textsf{shortauthor}, and also remember to provide a \textsf{sortkey}
-to make sure the work will be alphabetized correctly in the
-bibliography. (The current version of \textsf{biblatex} will now
-automatically alphabetize by \textsf{translator} if that is the name
-given at the head of an entry.) You no longer, however, need to
-provide one in an author-less \textsf{article} or \textsf{review}
-entry (\textsf{entrysubtype} \texttt{magazine}), where you allow
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} to use the \textsf{journaltitle} as
-the author, nor in author-less \textsf{manual} entries, where the
-\textsf{organization} will be so used. The style now automatically
-provides the same substitution in the short note form, though you'll
-still need to help the alphabetization routines by providing a
-\textsf{sortkey} field in such cases (dyna:browser, gourmet:052006,
-lakeforester:pushcarts, nyt:trevorobit).
-
-\mylittlespace As mentioned under \textsf{editortype}, the
-\emph{Manual} (17.41) recommends against providing the identifying
-string (e.g., ed.\ or trans.)\ in the short note form, and
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} follows their recommendation. If you
-need to provide these strings in such a citation, then you'll have to
-do so by hand in the \textsf{shortauthor} field, or in the
-\textsf{shorteditor} field, whichever you are using.
-
-\mybigspace Like \mymarginpar{\textbf{shorteditor}}
-\textsf{shortauthor}, a field to provide a name for a short footnote,
-in this case for, e.g., a \textsf{collection} entry that typically
-lacks an author. The \textsf{shortauthor} field works just as well in
-most situations, but if you have set \texttt{useauthor=false} (and not
-\texttt{useeditor=false}) in an entry's \textsf{options} field, then
-only \textsf{shorteditor} will be recognized. Cf.\
-\textsf{editortype}, above.
-
-%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{shorthand}} is
-\textsf{biblatex}'s mechanism for using abbreviations in place of the
-usual short note form, and I've left it effectively unmodified in
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes}, apart from a few formatting tweaks.
-Any entry which contains such a field will produce a normal first
-note, either long or short according to your package options,
-informing the reader that the work will hereafter be cited by this
-abbreviation. As in \textsf{biblatex}, the \cmd{printshorthands}
-command will produce a formatted list of abbreviations for reference
-purposes, a list which the \emph{Manual} suggests should be placed
-either in the front matter (when using footnotes) or before the
-endnotes, in case these are used. (See 16.39--40, and also
-\textsf{biblatex.pdf} for more information.)
-
-\mylittlespace As I mentioned above under \textbf{crossref}, extra
-care is needed when using shorthands with cross-references, and I
-would avoid them in all parent entries, at least in the current state
-of \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes}.
-
-\mybigspace When \mymarginpar{\textbf{shorthandintro}} you include a
-\textsf{shorthand} in an entry, it will ordinarily appear the first
-time you cite the work, at the end of a long note, prefaced by the
-phrase \enquote{Henceforth cited as.} With this standard
-\textsf{biblatex} field, you can change that phrase to suit your
-needs. Please note, first, that you need to include the shorthand in
-this field as you intend it to appear and, second, that you still need
-the \textsf{shorthand} field present in order to ensure the
-appropriate presentation of the shorthand in later citations and in
-the list of shorthands.
-
-\mybigspace A \colmarginpar{\textbf{shorttitle}} standard
-\textsf{biblatex} field, primarily used to provide an abbreviated
-title for short notes. In \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes}, you need
-to take particular care with \textsf{letter} entries, where, as
-explained above, the \emph{Manual} requires a special format
-(\enquote{\texttt{to Recipient}}). (See 17.76--78;
-jackson:paulina:letter, white:ross:memo, white:russ.) Some
-\textsf{misc} entries (with an \textsf{entrysubtype}) also need
-special attention. (See creel:house, where the full \textsf{title} is
-used as the \textsf{shortauthor} + \textsf{shorttitle} by using
-\cmd{headlesscite} commands. Placing \cmd{isdot} into the
-\textsf{shortauthor} field no longer works in \textsf{biblatex} 1.6
-and later, so be sure to check your .bib files when you upgrade.)
-Remember, also, that the generic titles in \textsf{review} and
-\textsf{misc} entries may not want capitalization in all contexts, so,
-as with the \textsf{title} field, if you begin a \textsf{shorttitle}
-with a lowercase letter the style will do the right thing
-(barcott:review, bundy:macneil, Clemens:letter, kozinn:review,
-ratliff:review, unsigned:ranke:15).
-
-\mybigspace A \mymarginpar{\textbf{sortkey}} standard
-\textsf{biblatex} field, designed to allow you to specify how you want
-an entry alphabetized in a bibliography. In general, if an entry
-doesn't turn up where you expect or want it, this field should provide
-the solution. More particularly, entries without an \textsf{author}
-or an \textsf{editor}, or with a corporate author beginning with the
-definite or indefinite article, will usually require your assistance
-in this way (chaucer:alt, cotton:manufacture:15, gourmet:052006,
-lakeforester:pushcarts, nyt:obittrevor, nyt:trevorobit, silver:gawain,
-unsigned:ranke:15, virginia:plantation). Lehman also provides
-\textbf{sortname}, \textbf{sorttitle}, and \textbf{sortyear} for more
-fine-grained control. Please consult \textsf{biblatex.pdf} for the
-details.
-
-\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\textbf{subtitle}} subtitle for a
-\textsf{title} --- see next entry.
-
-\mybigspace In \mymarginpar{\textbf{title}} the vast majority of
-cases, this field works just as it always has in \textsc{Bib}\TeX, and
-just as it does in \textsf{biblatex}. Nearly every entry will have
-one, the most likely exceptions being \textsf{incollection} or
-\textsf{online} entries with a merely generic title, instead of a
-specific one (centinel:letters, powell:email). The main source of
-difficulties flows from the \emph{Manual}'s rules for formatting
-\textsf{titles}, rules which also hold for \textsf{booktitles} and
-\textsf{maintitles}. The whole point of using a
-\textsc{Bib}\TeX-based system is for it to do the formatting for you,
-and in most cases \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} does just that,
-surrounding titles with quotation marks, italicizing them, or
-occasionally just leaving them alone. When, however, a title is
-quoted within a title, then you need to know some of the rules. A
-summary here should serve to clarify them, and help you to understand
-when \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} might need your help in order to
-comply with them.
-
-\mylittlespace The internal rules of \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes}
-are as follows:
-
-\begin{description}
-\item[\qquad Italics:] \textsf{booktitle}, \textsf{maintitle}, and
- \textsf{journaltitle} in all entry types; \textsf{title} of
- \textsf{artwork}, \textsf{book}, \textsf{bookinbook},
- \textsf{booklet}, \textsf{collection}, \textsf{inbook},
- \textsf{manual}, \textsf{misc} (with no \textsf{entrysubtype}),
- \textsf{periodical}, \textsf{proceedings}, \textsf{report},
- \textsf{suppbook}, and \textsf{suppcollection} entry types.
-\item[\qquad Quotation Marks:] \textsf{title} of \textsf{article},
- \textsf{image}, \textsf{incollection}, \textsf{inproceedings},
- \textsf{online}, \textsf{patent}, \textsf{periodical},
- \textsf{thesis}, and \textsf{unpublished} entry types,
- \textsf{issuetitle} in \textsf{article}, \textsf{periodical}, and
- \textsf{review} entry types.
-\item[\qquad Unformatted:] \textsf{booktitleaddon},
- \textsf{maintitleaddon}, and \textsf{titleaddon} in all entry types,
- \textsf{title} of \textsf{customc}, \textsf{letter}, \textsf{misc}
- (with an \textsf{entrysubtype}), \textsf{review}, and
- \textsf{suppperiodical} entry types.
-\item[\qquad Italics or Quotation Marks:] All of the audiovisual entry
- types --- \textsf{audio}, \textsf{music}, and \textsf{video} ---
- have to serve as analogues both to \textsf{book} and to
- \textsf{inbook}. Therefore, if there is both a \textsf{title} and a
- \textsf{booktitle}, then the \textsf{title} will be in quotation
- marks. If there is no \textsf{booktitle}, then the \textsf{title}
- will be italicized.
-\end{description}
-
-Now, the rules for which entry type to use for which sort of work tend
-to be fairly straightforward, but in cases of doubt you can consult
-section \ref{sec:entrytypes} above, the examples in
-\textsf{notes-test.bib}, or go to the \emph{Manual} itself,
-8.164--210. Assuming, then, that you want to present a title within a
-title, and you know what sort of formatting each of the two would, on
-its own, require, then the following rules apply:
-
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item Inside an italicized title, all other titles are enclosed in
- quotation marks and italicized, so in such cases all you need to do
- is provide the quotation marks using \cmd{mkbibquote}, which will
- take care of any following punctuation that needs to be brought
- within the closing quotation mark(s) (17.58; donne:var,
- mchugh:wake).
-\item Inside a quoted title, you should present another title as it
- would appear if it were on its own, so in such cases you'll need to
- do the formatting yourself. Within the double quotes of the title
- another quoted title would take single quotes --- the
- \cmd{mkbibquote} command does this for you automatically, and also,
- I repeat, takes care of any following punctuation that needs to be
- brought within the closing quotation mark(s). (See 17.157; garrett,
- loften:hamlet, murphy:silent, white:callimachus.)
-\item Inside a plain title (most likely in a \textsf{review} entry or
- a \textsf{titleaddon} field), you should present another title as it
- would appear on its own, once again formatting it yourself using
- \cmd{mkbibemph} or \cmd{mkbibquote}. (barcott:review, gibbard,
- osborne:poison, ratliff:review, unsigned:ranke:15).
-\end{enumerate}
-
-\enlargethispage{-2\baselineskip}
-
-The \emph{Manual} provides a few more rules, as well. A word normally
-italicized in text should also be italicized in a quoted or plain-text
-title, but should be in roman (\enquote{reverse italics}) in an
-italicized title. A quotation used as a (whole) title (with or
-without a subtitle) retains its quotation marks when it is quoted or
-plain, but loses them when it is italicized (17.60, 17.157; lewis). A
-word or phrase in quotation marks, but that isn't a quotation, retains
-those marks in all title types (kimluu:diethyl).
-
-\mylittlespace Finally, please note that in all \textsf{review} (and
-\textsf{suppperiodical}) entries, and in \textsf{misc} entries with an
-\textsf{entrysubtype}, and only in those entries,
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} will automatically capitalize the
-first word of the \textsf{title} after sentence-ending punctuation,
-assuming that such a \textsf{title} begins with a lowercase letter in
-your .bib database. See \textbf{\textbackslash autocap} below for
-more details.
-
-\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{titleaddon}}
-\textsf{biblatex} intends this field for use with additions to titles
-that may need to be formatted differently from the titles themselves,
-and \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} uses it in just this way, with the
-additional wrinkle that it can, if needed, replace the \textsf{title}
-entirely, and this in, effectively, any entry type, providing a fairly
-powerful, if somewhat complicated, tool for getting \textsc{Bib}\TeX\
-to do what you want (cf.\ centinel:letters, powell:email). This field
-will always be unformatted, that is, neither italicized nor placed
-within quotation marks, so any formatting you may need within it
-you'll need to provide manually yourself. The single exception to
-this rule is when your data begins with a word that would ordinarily
-only be capitalized at the beginning of a sentence, in which case you
-need then simply ensure that that word is in lowercase, and
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} will automatically do the right thing.
-See\ \textbf{\textbackslash autocap}, below. (Cf.\ brown:bremer,
-osborne:poison, reaves:rosen, and white:ross:memo for examples where
-the field starts with a lowercase letter; morgenson:market provides an
-example where the \textsf{titleaddon} field, holding the name of a
-regular column in a newspaper, is capitalized, a situation that is
-handled as you would expect.)
-
-\mybigspace As \mymarginpar{\textbf{translator}} far as possible, I
-have implemented this field as \textsf{biblatex}'s standard styles do,
-but the requirements specified by the \emph{Manual} present certain
-complications that need explaining. Lehman points out in his
-documentation that the \textsf{translator} field will be associated
-with a \textsf{title}, a \textsf{booktitle}, or a \textsf{maintitle},
-depending on the sort of entry. More specifically,
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago} associates the \textsf{translator} with the
-most comprehensive of those titles, that is, \textsf{maintitle} if
-there is one, otherwise \textsf{booktitle}, otherwise \textsf{title},
-if the other two are lacking. In a large number of cases, this is
-exactly the correct behavior (adorno:benj, centinel:letters,
-plato:republic:gr, among others). Predictably, however, there are
-numerous cases that require, for example, an additional translator for
-one part of a collection or for one volume of a multi-volume work.
-For these cases I have provided the \textsf{nameb} field. You should
-format names for this field as you would for \textsf{author} or
-\textsf{editor}, and these names will always be associated with the
-\textsf{title} (euripides:orestes).
-
-\mylittlespace I have also provided a \textsf{namea} field, which
-holds the editor of a given \textsf{title} (euripides:orestes). If
-\textsf{namea} and \textsf{nameb} are the same,
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago} will concatenate them, just as
-\textsf{biblatex} already does for \textsf{editor},
-\textsf{translator}, and \textsf{namec} (i.e., the compiler).
-Furthermore, it is conceivable that a given entry will need separate
-translators for each of the three sorts of title. For this, and for
-various other tricky situations, there is the \cmd{parttrans} macro
-(and its siblings), designed to be used in a \textsf{note} field or in
-one of the \textsf{titleaddon} fields (ratliff:review). (Because the
-strings identifying a translator differ in notes and bibliography, one
-can't simply write them out in such a field, hence the need for a
-macro, which I discuss further in the commands section below
-[\ref{sec:formatcommands}].)
-
-\mylittlespace Finally, as I detailed above under \textbf{author}, in
-the absence of an \textsf{author} or an \textsf{editor}, the
-\textsf{translator} will be used at the head of an entry
-(silver:gawain), and the bibliography entry alphabetized by the
-translator's name, behavior that can be controlled with the
-\texttt{{usetranslator}} switch in the \textsf{options} field. Cf.\
-\textsf{author}, \textsf{editor}, \textsf{namea}, \textsf{nameb}, and
-\textsf{namec}.
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{type}} is a standard
-\textsf{biblatex} field, and in its normal usage serves to identify
-the type of a \textsf{manual}, \textsf{patent}, \textsf{report}, or
-\textsf{thesis} entry. \textsf{Biblatex} 0.7 introduced the ability,
-in some circumstances, to use a bibstring without inserting it in a
-\cmd{bibstring} command, and in these entry types the \textsf{type}
-field works this way, allowing you simply to input, e.g.,
-\texttt{patentus} rather than \cmd{bibstring\{patentus\}}, though both
-will work. (See petroff:impurity; herwign:office, murphy:silent, and
-ross:thesis all demonstrate how the \textsf{type} field may sometimes
-be automatically set in such entries by using one of the standard
-entry-type aliases).
-
-\mylittlespace With the arrival of Lehman's remarkable
-punctuation-tracking code in \textsf{biblatex} 0.8, there can be
-almost no use for the \textsf{type} field as a switch for the
-\cmd{custpunct} macro, so I have been able to reuse it in order to
-generalize the functioning of the \textsf{suppbook} entry type, and of
-its alias \textsf{suppcollection}. In such entries, you can now use
-the \textsf{type} field to specify what sort of supplemental material
-you are citing, e.g., \enquote{\texttt{preface to}} or
-\enquote{\texttt{postscript to}.} Cf.\ \textsf{suppbook} above for the
-details. (See \emph{Manual} 17.74--75; polakow:afterw, prose:intro).
-
-\mylittlespace You can also use the \textsf{type} field in
-\textsf{artwork}, \textsf{audio}, \textsf{image}, \textsf{music}, and
-\textsf{video} entries to identify the medium of the work, e.g.,
-\texttt{oil on canvas}, \texttt{albumen print}, \texttt{compact disc}
-or \texttt{MPEG}. If the first word in this field would normally only
-be capitalized at the beginning of a sentence, then leave it in
-lowercase in your .bib file and \textsf{biblatex} will automatically
-do the right thing in citations. Cf.\ \textsf{artwork},
-\textsf{audio}, \textsf{image}, \textsf{music}, and \textsf{video},
-above, for all the details. (See auden:reading, bedford:photo,
-cleese:holygrail, leo:madonna, nytrumpet:art:15.)
-
-%\enlargethispage{-\baselineskip}
-
-\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{url}} \textsf{biblatex}
-field, it holds the url of an online publication, though you can
-provide one for all entry types. The required \LaTeX\ package
-\textsf{url} will ensure that your documents format such references
-properly, in the text and in the reference apparatus.
-
-\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{urldate}} \textsf{biblatex}
-field, it identifies exactly when you accessed a given url. This
-field would contain the whole date, in \textsc{iso}8601 format
-(evanston:library, grove:sibelius, hlatky:hrt, osborne:poison,
-sirosh:visualcortex, wikiped:bibtex). Please note that the
-\textbf{urlday}, \textbf{urlmonth}, and \textbf{urlyear} fields are
-all now obsolete.
-
-\mybigspace A \mymarginpar{\textbf{usera}} supplemental
-\textsf{biblatex} field which functions in \textsf{biblatex-chicago}
-almost as a \enquote{\textsf{journaltitleaddon}} field. In
-\textsf{article}, \textsf{periodical}, and \textsf{review} entries
-with \textsf{entrysubtype} \texttt{magazine}, the contents of this
-field will be placed, unformatted and between commas, after the
-\textsf{journaltitle} and before the date. The main use is for
-identifying the broadcast network when you cite a radio or television
-program (bundy:macneil), though you may also want to use it to
-identify the section of a newspaper in which you've found a particular
-article (morgenson:market). (See \emph{Manual} 17.190, 17.207. As
-far as I can work out, newspaper section information may be placed
-either before the date [\textsf{usera}] or after it [\textsf{pages}].
-Cp. kozinn:review [17.202] and morgenson:market [17.190]. The choice
-would appear to be yours.)
-
-\mybigspace \textbf{NB:} \mymarginpar{\textbf{userb}} \textbf{this
- field is now deprecated, mainly because it is very unlikely you will
- have any further need for the \textbackslash custpunct macros. I
- leave the code, and the instructions for how to use it, in place,
- because it's barely possible that a need for it might still arise.}
-A supplemental \textsf{biblatex} field, with a very specific use in
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes}. If the occasion does arise when you
-need to supply some context-sensitive punctuation yourself, then
-usually the \cmd{custpunct} command will then be needed, controlled in
-certain circumstances by a toggle in the \textsf{type} field. If,
-however, you already need the \textsf{type} field for its regular
-usage in a \textsf{suppbook}, \textsf{manual}, \textsf{patent},
-\textsf{report}, or \textsf{thesis} entry, and if you need to control
-the \cmd{custpunct} with a toggle, then you'll have to use
-\cmd{custpunctb}, toggled by putting the exact string \texttt{plain}
-in \textsf{userb}.
-
-\mybigspace I \mymarginpar{\textbf{userc}} have now implemented this
-supplemental \textsf{biblatex} field as part of Chicago's name
-cross-referencing system. (The \enquote{c} part is meant as a sort of
-mnemonic for this function, though it's perfectly possible to use the
-field in other contexts.) If you use the \textbf{customc} entry type
-to include alphabetized cross-references to other, separate entries in
-a bibliography, it is unlikely that you will cite the \textsf{customc}
-entry in the body of your text. Therefore, in order for it to appear
-in the bibliography, you have two choices. You can either include the
-entry key of the \textsf{customc} entry in a \cmd{nocite} command
-inside your document, or you can place that entry key in the
-\textsf{userc} field of another .bib entry that you will be citing.
-In the latter case, \textsf{biblatex-chicago} will call \cmd{nocite}
-for you, and this method should ensure that there will be at least one
-entry in the bibliography to which the cross-reference will point.
-(See 17.39--40; lecarre:cornwell, lecarre:quest.)
-
-\mybigspace NB: \mymarginpar{\textbf{userd}} this field is now
-obsolete. If it appears in a .bib file it will be ignored.
-
-\mybigspace Another \mymarginpar{\textbf{usere}} supplemental
-\textsf{biblatex} field, which \textsf{biblatex-chicago} uses
-specifically to provide a translated \textsf{title} of a work,
-something that may be needed if you deem the original language
-unparseable by a significant portion of your likely readership. The
-\emph{Manual} offers two alternatives in such a situation: either you
-can translate the title and use that translation in your
-\textsf{title} field, providing the original language in
-\textsf{language}, or you can give the original title in
-\textsf{title} and the translation in \textsf{usere}. If you choose
-the latter, you may need to provide a \textsf{shorttitle} so that the
-short note form is also parseable. Cf.\ \textbf{language}, above.
-(See 17.65--67, 17.166, 17.177; kern, weresz.)
-
-%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{userf}} is the last of the
-supplemental fields which \textsf{biblatex} provides, used by
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago} for a very specific purpose. When you cite
-both a translation and its original, the \emph{Manual} (17.66)
-recommends that, in the bibliography at least, you combine references
-to both texts in one entry, though the presentation in notes is pretty
-much up to you. In order to follow this specification, I have
-provided a third cross-referencing system (the others being
-\textsf{crossref} and \textsf{xref}), and have chosen the name
-\textsf{userf} because it might act as a mnemonic for its function.
-
-\mylittlespace In order to use this system, you should start by
-entering both the original and its translation into your .bib file,
-just as you normally would. The mechanism works for any entry type,
-and the two entries need not be of the same type. In the entry for
-the \emph{translation}, you put the cite key of the original into the
-\textsf{userf} field. In the \emph{original's} entry, you need to
-include a toggle in the \textsf{keywords} field that will prevent that
-entry from being printed separately in the bibliography --- I have
-chosen the string \texttt{original}, and use
-\texttt{notkeyword=original} in the \cmd{printbibliography} command,
-though you can use anything you want. In this standard case, the data
-for the translation will be printed first, followed by the string
-\texttt{originally published as}, followed by the original, author
-omitted, in what amounts to the same format that the \emph{Manual}
-uses for long footnotes (furet:passing:eng, furet:passing:fr). As
-explained above (\textbf{origlanguage}), I have also included a way to
-modify the string printed before the original. In the entry for the
-\emph{translation}, you put the original's language in
-\textsf{origlanguage}, and instead of \texttt{originally published
- as}, you'll get \texttt{French edition:} or \texttt{Latin edition:},
-etc.\ (aristotle:metaphy:gr, aristotle:metaphy:trans).
-
-\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{venue}} \textsf{biblatex}
-offers this field for use in \textsf{proceedings} and
-\textsf{inproceedings} entries, but I haven't yet implemented it,
-mainly because the \emph{Manual} has nothing to say about it. Perhaps
-the \textsf{organization} field could be used, for the moment,
-instead. Anything in a \textsf{venue} field will be ignored.
-
-\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{version}} \textsf{biblatex}
-field, currently only available in \textsf{misc} and \textsf{patent}
-entries in \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes}.
-
-\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{volume}} \textsf{biblatex}
-field. It holds the volume of a \textsf{journaltitle} in
-\textsf{article} (and some \textsf{review}) entries, and also the
-volume of a multi-volume work in many other sorts of entry. Cf.\
-\textsf{part}.
-
-\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{volumes}} \textsf{biblatex}
-field. It holds the total number of volumes of a multi-volume work,
-and its use in an entry triggers particular behavior in short notes
-referring to such an entry, which notes will not print any punctuation
-between the title of the work and the volume+page reference given in
-the optional postnote field of the relevant \cmd{cite} command
-(17.134; meredith:letters). If this behavior is inconvenient in a
-particular entry, you may need to provide a \textsf{shorttitle} field
-ending in an \cmd{addcomma}, though in such a case you'd need to
-ensure that the \cmd{cite} command's postnote field contained
-something, as otherwise the note would end, wrongly, with a comma.
-(The \emph{Manual} appears to be somewhat inconsistent on this
-question [cf.\ 16.47], so if this feature proves onerous in use I
-could remove it.)
-
-\mybigspace A \mymarginpar{\textbf{xref}} modified \textsf{crossref}
-field provided by \textsf{biblatex}. See \textbf{crossref}, above.
-
-\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{year}} \textsf{biblatex}
-field. It usually identifies the year of publication, though unlike
-the \textsf{date} field it allows non-numeric input, so you can put
-\enquote{n.d.}\ (or, to be language agnostic,
-\cmd{bibstring\{nodate\}}) here if required, or indeed any other sort
-of non-numerical date information. If you can guess the date then you
-can include that guess in square brackets instead of, or after, the
-\enquote{n.d.}\ abbreviation. Cf.\ bedford:photo, clark:mesopot,
-ross:leo, thesis:madonna.
-
-\subsection{Commands}
-\label{sec:commands}
-
-In this section I shall attempt to document all those commands you may
-need when using \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} that I have either
-altered with respect to the standard provided by \textsf{biblatex} or
-that I have provided myself. Some of these, unfortunately, will make
-your .bib file incompatible with other \textsf{biblatex} styles, but
-I've been unable to avoid this. Any ideas for more elegant, and more
-compatible, solutions will be warmly welcomed.
-
-\subsubsection{Formatting Commands}
-\label{sec:formatcommands}
-
-These commands allow you to fine-tune the presentation of your
-references in both notes and bibliography. You can find many examples
-of their usage in \textsf{notes-test.bib}, and I shall try to point
-you toward a few such entries in what follows. \textbf{NB:}
-\textsf{biblatex's} \cmd{mkbibquote} command is now mandatory in some
-situations. See its entry below.
-
-\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
-
-\mybigspace Version \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash autocap}} 0.8
-of \textsf{biblatex} introduced the \cmd{autocap} command, which
-capitalizes a word inside a note or bibliography entry if that word
-follows sentence-ending punctuation, and leaves it lowercase
-otherwise. As this command is both more powerful and more elegant
-than the kludge I designed for a previous version of
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} (see\ \textbf{\textbackslash
- bibstring} below), you should be aware that the use of the
-single-letter \cmd{bibstring} commands in your .bib file is obsolete.
-
-\mylittlespace In order somewhat to reduce the burden on users even
-further, I have, following Lehman's example, implemented a new system
-which automatically tracks the capitalization of certain fields in
-your .bib file. I chose these fields after a non-scientific survey of
-entries in my own databases, so of course if you have ideas for the
-extension of this facility I would be most interested to hear them.
-In order to take advantage of this functionality, all you need do is
-begin the data in the appropriate field with a lowercase letter,
-e.g.,\ \texttt{note = \{with the assistance of X\}}. If the data
-begins with a capital letter --- and this is not infrequent --- that
-capital will always be retained. (cf., e.g., creel:house,
-morgenson:market.) If, on the other hand, you for some reason need
-such a field always to start with a lowercase letter, then you can try
-using the \cmd{isdot} macro at the start, which turns off the
-mechanism without printing anything itself. Here, then, is the
-complete list of fields where this functionality is active:
-
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item The \textbf{addendum} field in all entry types.
-\item The \textbf{booktitleaddon} field in all entry types.
-\item The \textbf{edition} field in all entry types. (Numerals work
- as you expect them to here.)
-\item The \textbf{maintitleaddon} field in all entry types.
-\item The \textbf{note} field in all entry types.
-\item The \textbf{shorttitle} field in the \textsf{review}
- (\textsf{suppperiodical}) entry type and in the \textsf{misc} type,
- in the latter case, however, only when there is an
- \textsf{entrysubtype} defined, indicating that the work cited is
- from an archive.
-\item The \textbf{title} field in the \textsf{review}
- (\textsf{suppperiodical}) entry type and in the \textsf{misc} type,
- in the latter case, however, only when there is an
- \textsf{entrysubtype} defined, indicating that the work cited is
- from an archive.
-\item The \textbf{titleaddon} field in all entry types.
-\item The \textbf{type} field in \textsf{artwork}, \textsf{audio},
- \textsf{image}, \textsf{music}, \textsf{suppbook},
- \textsf{suppcollection}, and \textsf{video} entry types.
-\end{enumerate}
-
-In any other cases --- and there are only two examples of this in
-\textsf{notes-test.bib} (centinel:letters, powell:email) --- you'll
-need to provide the \cmd{autocap} command yourself. Indeed, if you
-accidentally do so in one of the above fields, it shouldn't matter at
-all, and you'll still get what you want, but taking advantage of the
-automatic provisions should at least save some typing.
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash bibstring}} is
-Lehman's very powerful mechanism to allow \textsf{biblatex}
-automatically to provide a localized version of a string, and to
-determine whether that string needs capitalization, depending on where
-it falls in an entry. In the first release of
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes}, the style relied very heavily on this
-macro, particularly on an extension I provided by defining all 26
-letters of the (ASCII) alphabet as \texttt{bibstrings}
-(\cmd{bibstring\{a\}}, \cmd{bibstring\{b\}}, etc.) While you should
-continue to use the standard, whole-word bibstrings, \textbf{all use
- of the single-letter variants I formerly provided is obsolete, and
- will generate an error}. This functionality has been replaced by
-the \cmd{autocap} command, which does the same thing, only more
-elegantly. This command was designed by Philipp Lehman, and has now
-been included in version 0.8 of \textsf{biblatex}. For yet greater
-convenience I have implemented, following Lehman's example, a system
-automating this functionality in all of the entry fields where its use
-was, by my reckoning, most frequent. This means that, when you
-require this functionality, all you need do is input the data in such
-a field starting with a lowercase letter, and
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} will do the rest with no further
-assistance. In my \textsf{notes-test.bib} file, this new mechanism in
-effect eliminated all need for the single-letter \texttt{bibstrings}
-and very nearly all need for the \cmd{autocap} command ---
-centinel:letters and powell:email being the only exceptions. Please
-see \textbf{\textbackslash autocap} above for full details.
-
-%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
-
-\mylittlespace I should also mention here that \textsf{biblatex 0.7}
-introduced a new functionality which sometimes allows you simply to
-input, for example, \texttt{newseries} instead of
-\cmd{bib\-string\{newseries\}}, the package auto-detecting when a
-bibstring is involved and doing the right thing, though in all such
-cases either form will work. This functionality is available in the
-\textsf{series} field of \textsf{article}, \textsf{periodical}, and
-\textsf{review} entries; in the \textsf{type} field of
-\textsf{manual}, \textsf{patent}, \textsf{report}, and \textsf{thesis}
-entries; in the \textsf{location} field of \textsf{patent} entries; in
-the \textsf{language} field in all entry types; and in the
-\textsf{nameaddon} field in \textsf{customc} entries. These are the
-places, as far as I can make out, where \textsf{biblatex's} standard
-styles support this feature, and I have added the last,
-style-specific, one. If Lehman generalizes it still further in a
-future release, I shall do the same, if possible.
-
-\mybigspace In \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash custpunct} \\
- \textbf{\textbackslash custpunctb}} common with other American
-citation styles, the \emph{Manual} requires that the commas and
-periods separating units of a reference go inside any quotation marks
-that happen to be present. As of version 0.8c, \textsf{biblatex}
-contains truly remarkable code that handles this situation in very
-nearly complete generality, detecting punctuation after the closing
-quotation mark and moving it inside when necessary, and also
-controlling which punctuation marks can be printed after which other
-punctuation marks, whether quotation marks intervene or not. This
-functionality is now mature, and \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes}
-relies on this code to place punctuation in the \enquote{American
- style,} rather than on complicated \cmd{DeclareFieldFormat}
-instructions that attempt to anticipate all possible permutations.
-One result of this, thankfully, is that both \cmd{custpunct} and
-\cmd{custpunctb} are now basically unnecessary, as their only purpose
-was to supply context-appropriate punctuation inside any quotation
-marks that users themselves provided as part of various entry fields.
-A second consequence, and I've already recommended this in previous
-releases anyway, is that users now \emph{must} use \cmd{mkbibquote}
-instead of \cmd{enquote} or the usual \LaTeX\ mechanisms inside their
-.bib files. For further details, please see the \cmd{mkbibquote}
-entry below.
-
-%\enlargethispage{-\baselineskip}
-
-\mylittlespace I have retained the code for the \cmd{custpunct}
-commands in \textsf{chicago-notes.cbx}, in case a particularly gnarly
-entry might still require them, but I have already started to re-use
-the \textsf{type} field, which formerly served as a switch for
-\cmd{custpunct}, in other contexts (see \textbf{artwork},
-\textbf{image}, and \textbf{suppbook} above).
-
-\mybigspace This \colmarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash isdot}} is a
-standard \textsf{biblatex} macro, which in previous releases of
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago} could function as a convenient placeholder
-in entry fields that, for one reason or another, you may have wanted
-to have defined and yet to print nothing. With the release of
-\textsf{biblatex} 1.6, this no longer works as before, a situation
-which has revealed a number of inconsistencies and bugs in my code,
-the rectification of which may therefore require some changes to your
-.bib files, assuming you've taken advantage of this mechanism. I
-believe that all the situations formerly calling for this specific use
-of the macro can now be addressed by more standard means, i.e., the
-\cmd{headlesscite} commands and the \texttt{useauthor=false}
-declaration in the \textsf{options} field. (See creel:house,
-nyt:obittrevor, sewall:letter, unsigned:ranke:15, and white:total.)
-
-\mybigspace I \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash letterdatelong}}
-have provided this macro mainly for use in the optional postnote field
-of the various citation commands. When citing a letter (published or
-unpublished, \textsf{letter} or \textsf{misc}), it may be useful to
-append the date to the usual short note form in order to disambiguate
-references. This macro simply prints the date of a letter, or indeed
-of any other sort of correspondence. (If your main document language
-isn't English, it's better just to use the standard \textsf{biblatex}
-command \cmd{printorigdate}.)
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash mkbibquote}} is
-the standard \textsf{biblatex} command, which requires attention here
-because it is a crucial part of the mechanism of Lehman's
-\enquote{American} punctuation system. If you look in
-\textsf{chicago-notes.cbx} you'll see that the quoted fields, e.g., an
-\textsf{article} or \textsf{incollection title}, have this command in
-their formatting, which does most of the work for you. If, however,
-you need to provide additional quotation marks in a field --- a quoted
-title within a title, for example --- then you may need to use this
-command so that any following period or comma will be brought within
-the closing quotation marks. Its use is \emph{required} when the
-quoted material comes at the end of a field, and I recommend always
-using it in your .bib database, as it does no harm even when that
-condition is not fulfilled. A few examples from
-\textsf{notes-test.bib} should help to clarify this.
-
-\mylittlespace In an \textsf{article} entry, the \textsf{title}
-contains a quoted phrase:
-
-\begin{quotation}
- \noindent\texttt{title = \{Diethylstilbestrol and Media Coverage of the \\
- \indent\cmd{mkbibquote}\{Morning After\} Pill\}}
-\end{quotation}
-
-Here, because the quoted text doesn't come at the end of title, and no
-punctuation will ever need to be drawn within the closing quotation
-mark, you could instead use \texttt{\cmd{enquote}\{Morning After\}} or
-even \texttt{`Morning After'}. (Note the single quotation marks here
---- the other two methods have the virtue of taking care of nesting
-for you.) All of these will produce the formatted
-\enquote{Diethylstilbestrol and Media Coverage of the \enquote{Morning
- After} Pill.} Here, by contrast, is a \textsf{book title}:
-
-\begin{quotation}
- \noindent \texttt{title = \{Annotations to
- \cmd{mkbibquote}\{Finnegans Wake\}\}}
-\end{quotation}
-
-Because the quoted title within the title comes at the end of the
-field, and because this bibliographical unit will be separated from
-what follows by a period in the bibliography, then the
-\cmd{mkbibquote} command is necessary to bring that period within the
-final quotation marks, like so: \emph{Annotations to
- \enquote{Finnegans Wake.}}
-
-\mylittlespace Let me also add that this command interacts well with
-Lehman's \textsf{csquotes} package, which I highly recommend, though
-the latter isn't strictly necessary in texts using an American style,
-to which \textsf{biblatex} defaults when \textsf{csquotes} isn't
-loaded.
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash reprint}} and the
-following 7 macros all help \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} cope with
-the fact that many bibstrings in the Chicago system differ between
-notes and bibliography, the former sometimes using abbreviated forms
-when the latter prints them in full. In the current case, if a book
-is a reprint, then the macro \cmd{reprint}, followed by a comma,
-should go in the \textsf{location} field before the city of
-publication (aristotle:metaphy:gr, schweitzer:bach). See
-\textbf{location}, above.
-
-\mylittlespace \textbf{NB:} The rules for employing abbreviated or
-full bibstrings in the \emph{Manual} are remarkably complex, but I
-have attempted to make them as transparent for users as possible. In
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes}, if you don't see it mentioned in this
-section, then in theory you should always provide an abbreviated
-version, using the \cmd{bibstring} mechanism, if necessary
-(babb:peru). The standard \textsf{biblatex} bibstrings should also
-work (palmatary:pottery), and any that won't should be covered by the
-series of macros beginning here with \cmd{reprint} and ending below
-with \cmd{parttransandcomp}.
-
-\mybigspace Since \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash partcomp}} the
-\emph{Manual} specifies that the strings \texttt{editor},
-\texttt{translator}, and \texttt{compiler} all require different forms
-in notes and bibliography, and since it mentions these three apart
-from all the others \textsf{biblatex} provides (\textsf{annotator},
-\textsf{commentator}, et al.), and further since it may indeed happen
-that the available fields (\textsf{editor}, \textsf{namea},
-\textsf{translator}, \textsf{nameb}, and \textsf{namec}) aren't
-adequate for presenting some entries, I have provided 7 macros to
-allow you to print the correct strings for these functions in both
-notes and bibliography. Their names all begin with \cmd{part}, as
-originally I intended them for use when a particular name applied only
-to a specific \textsf{title}, rather than to a \textsf{maintitle} or
-\textsf{booktitle} (cf.\ \textbf{namea} and \textbf{nameb}, above).
-
-\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
-
-\mylittlespace In the present instance, you can use \cmd{partcomp} to
-identify a compiler when \textsf{namec} won't do, e.g., in a
-\textsf{note} field or the like. In such a case,
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} will print the appropriate string in
-your references.
-
-\mybigspace Use \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash partedit}} this
-macro when identifying an editor whose name doesn't conveniently fit
-into the usual fields (\textsf{editor} or \textsf{namea}). (N.B.: If
-you are writing in French and using \textsf{cms-french.lbx}, then
-currently you'll need to add either \texttt{de} or \texttt{d'} after
-this command in your .bib files to make the references come out right.
-I'm working on this.) See chaucer:liferecords.
-
-\mybigspace As \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash
- partedit-\\andcomp}} before, but for use when an editor is also a
-compiler.
-
-\vspace{1.3\baselineskip} As \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash
- partedit-\\andtrans}} before, but for when when an editor is also a
-translator (ratliff:review).
-
-\mybigspace As \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash
- partedit-\\transandcomp}} before, but for when an editor is also a
-translator and a compiler.
-
-\vspace{1.3\baselineskip} As \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash
- parttrans}} before, but for use when identifying a translator
-whose name doesn't conveniently fit into the usual fields
-(\textsf{translator} and \textsf{nameb}).
-
-\mybigspace As \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash
- parttrans-\\andcomp}} before, but for when a translator is also a
-compiler.
-
-\subsubsection{Citation Commands}
-\label{sec:citecommands}
-
-The \textsf{biblatex} package is particularly rich in citation
-commands, some of which (e.g., \cmd{supercite(s)}, \cmd{citeyear})
-provide functionality that isn't really needed by the Chicago notes
-and bibliography style offered here. If you are getting unexpected
-behavior when using them please have a look in your .log file. A
-command like \cmd{textcite}, listed in §~3.6.2 of the
-\textsf{biblatex} manual but not defined by \textsf{biblatex-chicago},
-defaults to \cmd{cite}, and leaves a warning in the .log. Others
-(e.g., \cmd{cite\-url}), though I haven't tested them extensively,
-should pretty much work out of the box. What remains are the commands
-I have found most useful and necessary for following the
-\emph{Manual}'s specifications, and I document in this section any
-alterations I have made to these. As always, if there are standard
-commands that don't work for you, or new commands that would be
-useful, please let me know, and it should be possible to fix or add
-them.
-
-\mylittlespace A number of users have run into a problem that appears
-when they've used a command like \cmd{cite} inside a \cmd{footnote}
-macro. In this situation, the automatic capitalization routines will
-not be in operation at the start of the footnote, so instead of
-\enquote{Ibid.,} for example, you'll see \enquote{ibid.} If you need
-to use the \cmd{cite} command within a \cmd{footnote} command, the
-solution is to use \cmd{Cite} instead. Alternatively, don't use a
-\cmd{footnote} macro at all, rather try \cmd{footcite} or
-\cmd{autocite} with the optional prenote and postnote arguments. Cf.\
-\cmd{Citetitle} below, and also section~3.6 of \textsf{biblatex.pdf}.
-
-\mybigspace I \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash autocite}} haven't
-adapted this in the slightest, but I thought it worth pointing out
-that \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} sets this command to use
-\cmd{footcite} as the default option. It is, in my experience, much
-the most common citation command you will use, and also works fine in
-its multicite form, \textbf{\textbackslash autocites}.
-
-\mybigspace While \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash cite*}} the
-\cmd{cite} command works just as you would expect it to, I have also
-provided a starred version for the rare situations when you might need
-to turn off the ibidem tracking mechanism. \textsf{Biblatex} provides
-very sophisticated algorithms for using \enquote{Ibid} in notes, so in
-general you won't find a need for this command, but in case you'd
-prefer a longer citation where you might automatically find
-\enquote{Ibid,} I've provided this. Of course, you'll need to put it
-inside a \cmd{footnote} command manually. (See also section
-\ref{sec:useropts}, below.)
-
-\mybigspace I \colmarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash citeauthor}} have
-adapted this standard \textsf{biblatex} command only very slightly to
-bring it into line with \textsf{biblatex-chicago's} needs. Its main
-usage will probably be for references to works from classical
-antiquity, when an \textsf{author's} name (abbreviated or not)
-sometimes suffices in the absence of a \textsf{title}, e.g.,
-Thuc.\ 2.40.2--3 (17.252). You'll need to put it inside a
-\cmd{footnote} command manually. (Cf.\ also \textsf{entrysubtype} in
-section~\ref{sec:entryfields}, above.)
-
-\mybigspace This \colmarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash citejournal}}
-command provides an alternative short form when citing journal
-\textsf{articles}, giving the \textsf{journaltitle} and
-\textsf{volume} number instead of the article \textsf{title} after the
-\textsf{author's} name. The \emph{Manual} suggests that this format
-might be helpful \enquote{in the absence of a full bibliography}
-(17.179).
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash Citetitle}}
-simply prepends \cmd{bibsentence} to the usual \cmd{citetitle}
-command. Some titles may need this for the automatic contextual
-capitalization facility to work correctly. (Included as standard from
-\textsf{biblatex} 0.8d.)
-
-\mybigspace Joseph \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash citetitles}}
-Reagle noticed that, because of the way
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} formats titles in quotation marks,
-using the \cmd{citetitle} command will often get you punctuation you
-don't want, especially when presenting a list of titles. I've
-included this multicite command to enable you to present such a list,
-if the need arises. Remember that you'll have to put it inside a
-\cmd{footnote} command manually.
-
-\mybigspace Another \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash footfullcite}}
-standard \textsf{biblatex} command, modified to work properly with
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes}, and provided in case you find
-yourself in a situation where you really need the full citation in a
-footnote, but where \cmd{autocite} would print a short note or even
-\enquote{Ibid.} This may be particularly useful if you've chosen to use all
-short notes by setting the \texttt{short} option in the arguments to
-\cmd{usepackage\{biblatex\}}, yet still feel the need for the
-occasional full citation.
-
-\mybigspace This, \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash fullcite}} too,
-is a standard command, and it too provides a full citation, but unlike
-the previous command it doesn't automatically place it in a footnote.
-It may be useful within long textual notes.
-
-\mybigspace Matthew \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash headlesscite}}
-Lundin requested a more generalized \cmd{headlesscite} macro,
-suppressing the author's name in specific contexts while allowing
-users not to worry about whether a particular citation needs the long
-or short form, a responsibility thereby handed over to
-\textsf{biblatex's} tracking mechanisms. This citation command
-attempts to fulfill this request. Please note that, in the short
-form, the result will be rather like a \cmd{citetitle} command, which
-may or may not be what you want. Note, also, that as I have provided
-only the most flexible form of the command, you'll have to wrap it in
-a \cmd{footnote} yourself. Please see the next entry for further
-discussion of some of the needs this command might help address.
-
-\mybigspace I \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash
- headless-\\fullcite}} have provided this command in case you want
-to print a full citation without the author's name. The \emph{Manual}
-(17.31, 17.42) suggests this for brevity's sake in cases where that
-name is already obvious enough from the title, and where repetition
-might seem awkward (creel:house, feydeau:farces, meredith:letters, and
-sewall:letter). \textsf{Letter} entries --- and only such entries ---
-do this for you automatically, and of course the repetition is
-tolerated in bibliographies for the sake of alphabetization, but in
-notes this command may help achieve greater elegance, even if it isn't
-strictly necessary. As I've provided only the most flexible form of
-the command, you'll have to wrap it in a \cmd{footnote} yourself.
-
-\mybigspace I \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash shortcite}} have
-provided this command in case, for any reason, you specifically
-require the short form of a note, and \textsf{biblatex} thinks you
-want something else. Again, I've provided only the most flexible form
-of the command, so you'll have to wrap it in a \cmd{footnote}
-manually.
-
-\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
-
-\mylittlespace If you look at \textsf{chicago-notes.cbx}, you'll see a
-number of other citation commands, but those are intended for internal
-use only, mainly in cross-references of various sorts. Use at your
-own risk.
-
-\subsection{Package Options}
-\label{sec:options}
-
-\subsubsection{Pre-Set \textsf{biblatex} Options}
-\label{sec:presetopts}
-
-Although a quick glance through \textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty} will
-tell you which \textsf{biblatex} options the package sets for you, I
-thought I might gather them here also for your perusal. These
-settings are, I believe, consistent with the specification, but you
-can alter them in the options to \textsf{biblatex-chicago} in your
-preamble or by loading the package via
-\cmd{usepackage[style=chicago-notes]\{biblatex\}}, which gives you the
-\textsf{biblatex} defaults unless you redefine them yourself inside
-the square brackets.
-
-\mylittlespace By \mymarginpar{\texttt{abbreviate=\\false}} default,
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} prints the longer bibstrings, mainly
-for use in the bibliography, but since notes require the shorter forms
-of many of them, I've had to define many new strings for use there.
-
-\mylittlespace \textsf{Biblatex-chicago-notes}
-\mymarginpar{\texttt{autocite=\\footnote}} places references in
-footnotes by default.
-
-\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\texttt{citetracker=\\true}} citetracker
-for the \cmd{ifciteseen} test is enabled globally.
-
-\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\texttt{alldates=comp}} specification calls
-for the long format when presenting dates, slightly shortened when
-presenting date ranges.
-
-\mylittlespace The \mymarginpar{\texttt{dateabbrev=\\false}}
-\emph{Manual} prefers full month names in the notes \&\ bibliography
-style.
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{ibidtracker=\\constrict}}
-enables the use of \enquote{Ibid} in notes, but only in the most
-strictly-defined circumstances. Whenever there might be any
-ambiguity, \textsf{biblatex} should default to printing a more
-informative reference. Remember also that you can use the \cmd{cite*}
-command to disable this functionality in any given reference, or
-indeed one of the \texttt{fullcite} commands if you need the long note
-form for any reason.
-
-%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
-
-\mylittlespace This \marginpar{\texttt{loccittracker\\=constrict}}
-allows the package to determine whether two consecutive citations of
-the same source also cite the same page of that source. In such a
-case, \texttt{Ibid} alone will be printed, without the page reference,
-following the specification (16.47).
-
-\mylittlespace These \colmarginpar{\textsf{\texttt{maxbibnames\\=10\\
- minbibnames\\=7}}} two options are new, and control the number
-of names printed in the bibliography when that number exceeds 10.
-These numbers follow the recommendations of the \emph{Manual}
-(17.29--30), and they are different from those for use in notes. With
-\textsf{biblatex} 1.6 and later you can no longer redefine
-\texttt{maxnames} and \texttt{minnames} in the \cmd{printbibliography}
-command at the bottom of your document, so \textsf{biblatex-chicago}
-now does this automatically for you, though of course you can change
-them in your document preamble.
-
-\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{pagetracker=\\true}} enables
-page tracking for the \cmd{iffirstonpage} and \cmd{ifsamepage}
-commands for controlling, among other things, the printing of
-\enquote{Ibid.} It tracks individual pages if \LaTeX\ is in oneside
-mode, or whole spreads in twoside mode.
-
-\mylittlespace This \colmarginpar{\texttt{sortcase=\\false}} turns off
-the sorting of uppercase and lowercase letters separately, a practice
-which the \emph{Manual} doesn't appear to recommend.
-
-\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{usetranslator\\=true}}
-enables automatic use of the \textsf{translator} at the head of
-entries in the absence of an \textsf{author} or an \textsf{editor}.
-In the bibliography, the entry will be alphabetized by the
-translator's surname. You can disable this functionality on a
-per-entry basis by setting \texttt{usetranslator=false} in the
-\textsf{options} field. Cf.\ silver:gawain.
-
-\subsubsection*{Other \textsf{biblatex} Formatting Options}
-\label{sec:formatopts}
-
-I've chosen defaults for many of the general formatting commands
-provided by \textsf{biblatex}, including the vertical space between
-bibliography items and between items in the list of shorthands
-(\cmd{bibitemsep} and \cmd{lositemsep}). I define many of these in
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty}, and of course you may want to redefine
-them to your own needs and tastes. It may be as well you know that
-the \emph{Manual} does state a preference for two of the formatting
-options I've implemented by default: the 3-em dash as a replacement
-for repeated names in the bibliography (16.103--106); and the
-formatting of note numbers, both in the main text and at the bottom of
-the page / end of the essay (superscript in the text, in-line in the
-notes; 16.25). The code for this last formatting is also in
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty}, and I've wrapped it in a test that
-disables it if you are using the \textsf{memoir} class, which I
-believe has its own commands for defining these parameters. You can
-also disable it by using the \texttt{footmarkoff} package option, on
-which see below.
-
-\subsubsection{{Pre-Set \textsf{chicago} Options}}
-\label{sec:chicpreset}
-
-At \mymarginpar{\texttt{bookpages=\\true}} the request of Scot
-Becker, I have included this rather specialized option, which controls
-the printing of the \textsf{pages} field in \textsf{book} entries.
-Some bibliographic managers, apparently, place the total page count in
-that field by default, and this option allows you to stop the printing
-of this information in notes and bibliography. It defaults to true,
-which means the field is printed, but it can be set to false either in
-the preamble, for the whole document, or on a per-entry basis in the
-\textsf{options} field (though rather than use this latter method it
-would make sense to eliminate the \textsf{pages} field from the
-affected entries).
-
-\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{doi=true}} option controls
-whether any \textsf{doi} fields present in the .bib file will be
-printed in notes and bibliography. It defaults to true, and can be
-set to false either in the preamble, for the whole document, or on a
-per-entry basis, in the \textsf{options} field.
-
-\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{isbn=true}} option controls
-whether any \textsf{isan}, \textsf{isbn}, \textsf{ismn},
-\textsf{isrn}, \textsf{issn}, and \textsf{iswc} fields present in the
-.bib file will be printed in notes and bibliography. It defaults to
-true, and can be set to false either in the preamble, for the whole
-document, or on a per-entry basis, in the \textsf{options} field.
-
-\mylittlespace Once \mymarginpar{\texttt{numbermonth=\\true}} again
-at the request of Scot Becker, I have included this option, which
-controls the printing of the \textsf{month} field in all the
-periodical-type entries when a \textsf{number} field is also present.
-Some bibliographic software, apparently, always includes the month of
-publication even when a \textsf{number} is present. When all this
-information is available the \emph{Manual} (17.181) prints everything,
-so this option defaults to true, which means the field is printed, but
-it can be set to false either in the preamble, for the whole document,
-or on a per-entry basis in the \textsf{options} field.
-
-\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{url=true}} option controls
-whether any \textsf{url} fields present in the .bib file will be
-printed in notes and bibliography. It defaults to true, and can be
-set to false either in the preamble, for the whole document, or on a
-per-entry basis, in the \textsf{options} field. Please note that, as
-in standard \textsf{biblatex}, the \textsf{url} field is always
-printed in \textsf{online} entries, regardless of the state of this
-option.
-
-\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{includeall=\\true}} is the
-one option that rules the five preceding, either printing all the
-fields under consideration --- the default --- or excluding all of
-them. It is set to \texttt{true} in \textsf{chicago-notes.cbx}, but
-you can change it either in the preamble for the whole document or in
-the \textsf{options} field of individual entries. The rationale for
-all of these options is the availability of bibliographic managers
-that helpfully present as much data as possible, in every entry, some
-of which may not be felt to be entirely necessary. Setting
-\texttt{includeall} to \texttt{true} probably works just fine for
-those compiling their .bib databases by hand, but others may find that
-some automatic pruning helps clear things up, at least to a first
-approximation. Some per-entry work afterward may then polish up the
-details.
-
-\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{usecompiler=\\true}} option
-enables automatic use of the name of the compiler (in the
-\textsf{namec} field) at the head of an entry, usually in the absence
-of an \textsf{author}, \textsf{editor}, or \textsf{translator}, in
-accordance with the specification (\emph{Manual} 17.41). It may also,
-like \texttt{useauthor}, \texttt{useeditor}, and
-\texttt{usetranslator}, be disabled on a per-entry basis by setting
-\texttt{usecompiler=false} in the \textsf{options} field. Please
-remember that, because \textsf{namec} isn't a standard
-\textsf{biblatex} field, this name won't be part of its standard name
-algorithms, and that any entry headed by a \textsf{namec} will
-therefore need a \textsf{shortauthor} for short notes and a
-\textsf{sortkey} or the like in order to have it appear in the correct
-place in the bibliography. (The exception to this is when you modify
-the \textsf{editor's} identifying string using the \textsf{editortype}
-field, which is the procedure I recommend if the entry-heading
-compiler is only a compiler, and not also, e.g., an editor or a
-translator.)
-
-\subsubsection{Style Options -- Preamble}
-\label{sec:useropts}
-
-These are parts of the specification that not everyone will wish to
-enable. All except the second can be used even if you load the
-package in the old way via a call to \textsf{biblatex}, but most users
-can just place the appropriate string(s) in the options to the
-\cmd{usepackage\{biblatex-chicago\}} call in your preamble.
-
-\mylittlespace At \mymarginpar{\texttt{annotation}} the request of
-Emil Salim, I included in \textsf{biblatex-chicago} the ability to
-produce annotated bibliographies. If you turn this option on then the
-contents of your \textsf{annotation} (or \textsf{annote}) field will
-be printed after the bibliographical reference. (You can also use
-external files to store annotations -- please see
-\textsf{biblatex.pdf} §~3.10.7 for details on how to do this.) This
-functionality is currently in a beta state, so before you use it
-please have a look at the documentation for the \textsf{annotation}
-field, on page~\pageref{sec:annote} above.
-
-\mylittlespace Although \mymarginpar{\texttt{footmarkoff}} the
-\emph{Manual} (16.25) recommends specific formatting for footnote (and
-endnote) marks, i.e., superscript in the text and in-line in foot- or
-endnotes, Charles Schaum has brought it to my attention that not all
-publishers follow this practice, even when requiring Chicago style. I
-have retained this formatting as the default setup, but if you include
-the \texttt{footmarkoff} option, \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} will
-not alter \LaTeX 's (or the \textsf{endnote} package's) defaults in
-any way, leaving you free to follow the specifications of your
-publisher. I have placed all of this code in
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty}, so if you load the package with a call
-to \textsf{biblatex} instead, then once again footnote marks will
-revert to the \LaTeX\ default, but of course you also lose a fair
-amount of other formatting, as well. See section~\ref{sec:loading},
-below.
-
-\mylittlespace The \mymarginpar{\texttt{juniorcomma}} \emph{Manual}
-(6.49) states that \enquote{commas are no longer required around
- \emph{Jr.}\ and \emph{Sr.},} so by default \textsf{biblatex-chicago}
-has followed standard \textsf{biblatex} in using a simple space in
-names like \enquote{John Doe Jr.} Charles Schaum has pointed out that
-traditional \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ practice was to include the comma, and
-since the \emph{Manual} has no objections to this, I have provided an
-option which allows you to turn this behavior back on, either for the
-whole document or on a per-entry basis. Please note, first, that
-numerical suffixes (John Doe III) never take the comma. The code
-tests for this situation, and detects cardinal numbers well, but if
-you are using ordinals you may need to set this to \texttt{false} in
-the \textsf{options} field of some entries. Second, I have fixed a
-bug in older releases which always printed the \enquote{Jr.}\ part of
-the name immediately after the surname, even when the surname came
-before the given names (as in a bibliography). The package now
-correctly puts the \enquote{Jr.}\ part at the end, after the given
-names, and in this position it always takes a comma, the presence of
-which is unaffected by this option.
-
-\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{natbib}} may look like the
-standard \textsf{biblatex} option, but to keep the coding of
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty} simpler for the moment I have
-reimplemented it there, from whence it is merely passed on to
-\textsf{biblatex}. If you load the Chicago style with
-\cmd{usepackage\{biblatex-chicago\}}, then the option should simply
-read \texttt{natbib}, rather than \texttt{natbib=true}. The shorter
-form also works if you load the style using
-\cmd{usepackage[style=chicago-notes]\{biblatex\}}, so I hope this
-requirement isn't too onerous.
-
-\mylittlespace At \mymarginpar{\texttt{noibid}} the request of an
-early tester, I have included this option to allow you globally to
-turn off the \texttt{ibidem} mechanism that
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} uses by default. Some publishers, it
-would appear, require this. Setting this option will mean that all
-possible instances of \emph{ibid.}\ will be replaced by the short note
-form. For more fine-grained control of individual citations you'll
-probably want to use specialized citation commands, instead. See
-section \ref{sec:citecommands}.
-
-%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
-
-\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{short}} option means that
-your text will only use the short note form, even in the first
-citation of a particular work. The \emph{Manual} (16.3) recommends
-this space-saving format only when you provide a \emph{full}
-bibliography, though even with such a bibliography you may feel it
-easier for your readers to present long first citations. If you do
-use the \texttt{short} option, remember that there are several
-citation commands which allow you to present the full reference in
-specific cases (see section \ref{sec:citecommands}). If your
-bibliography is not complete, then you should not use this option.
-
-\mylittlespace Chris Sparks \mymarginpar{\texttt{shorthandibid}}
-pointed out that \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} would never use
-\emph{ibid.}\ in the case of entries containing a \textsf{shorthand}
-field, but rather that consecutive references to such an entry
-continued to provide the shorthand, instead. The \emph{Manual} isn't,
-as far as I can tell, completely clear on this question. In 17.252,
-discussing references to works from classical antiquity, it states
-that \enquote{when abbreviations are used, these rather than
- \emph{ibid.}\ should be used in succeeding references to the same
- work,} but I can't make out whether this rule is specific to
-classical references or has more general scope. Given this ambiguity,
-I don't think it unreasonable to provide an option to allow printing
-of \emph{ibid.}\ instead of the shorthand in such circumstances,
-though the default behavior remains the same as it always has.
-
-\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{strict}} still-experimental
-option attempts to follow the \emph{Manual}'s recommendations (16.57)
-for formatting footnotes on the page, using no rule between them and
-the main text unless there is a run-on note, in which case a short
-rule intervenes to emphasize this continuation. I haven't tested this
-code very thoroughly, and it's possible that frequent use of floats
-might interfere with it. Let me know if it causes problems.
-
-
-\subsection{General Usage Hints}
-\label{sec:hints}
-
-\subsubsection{Loading the Style}
-\label{sec:loading}
-
-With the addition of the author-date style to the package, I have
-provided two keys for choosing which style to load, \texttt{notes} and
-\texttt{authordate}, one of which you put in the options to the
-\cmd{usepackage} command. The default way of loading the notes +
-bibliography style has therefore slightly changed. With early
-versions of \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes}, the standard way of
-loading the package was via a call to \textsf{biblatex}, e.g.:
-\begin{quote}
- \cmd{usepackage[style=chicago-notes,strict,backend=bibtex8,\%\\
- babel=other,bibencoding=inputenc]\{biblatex\}}
-\end{quote}
-Now, the default way to load the style, and one that will in the
-vast majority of standard cases produce the same results as the old
-invocation, will look like this:
-\begin{quote}
- \cmd{usepackage[notes,strict,backend=bibtex8,babel=other,\%\\
- bibencoding=inputenc]\{biblatex-chicago\}}
-\end{quote}
-
-(In point of fact, the previous \textsf{biblatex-chicago} loading
-method without the \texttt{notes} option will still work, but only
-because I've made the notes \&\ bibliography style the default if no
-style is explicitly requested.) If you read through
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty}, you'll see that it sets a number of
-\textsf{biblatex} options aimed at following the Chicago
-specification, as well as setting a few formatting variables intended
-as reasonable defaults (see section~\ref{sec:presetopts}, above).
-Some parts of this specification, however, are plainly more
-\enquote{suggested} than \enquote{required,} and indeed many
-publishers, while adopting the main skeleton of the Chicago style in
-citations, nonetheless maintain their own house styles to which the
-defaults I have provided do not conform.
-
-\mylittlespace If you only need to change one or two parameters, this
-can easily be done by putting different options in the call to
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago} or redefining other formatting variables in
-the preamble, thereby overriding the package defaults. If, however,
-you wish more substantially to alter the output of the package,
-perhaps to use it as a base for constructing another style altogether,
-then you may want to revert to the old style of invocation above.
-You'll lose all the definitions in \textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty},
-including those to which I've already alluded and also the code that
-sets the note number in-line rather than superscript in endnotes or
-footnotes. Also in this file is the code that calls
-\textsf{cms-american.lbx}, which means that you'll lose all the
-Chicago-specific bibstrings I've defined unless you provide, in your
-preamble, a \cmd{DeclareLanguageMapping} command adapted for your
-setup, on which see section~\ref{sec:international} below and also
-§§~4.9.1 and 4.11.7 in Lehman's \textsf{biblatex.pdf}.
-
-%\enlargethispage{-\baselineskip}
-
-\mylittlespace What you \emph{will not} lose is the ability to call
-the package options \texttt{annotation, strict, short,} and
-\texttt{noibid} (section~\ref{sec:useropts}, above), in case these
-continue to be useful to you when constructing your own modifications.
-There's very little code, therefore, actually in
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty}, but I hope that even this minimal
-separation will make the package somewhat more adaptable. Any
-suggestions on this score are, of course, welcome.
-
-\subsubsection{Other Hints}
-\label{sec:otherhints}
-
-One useful rule, when you are having difficulty creating a .bib entry,
-is to ask yourself whether all the information you are providing is
-strictly necessary. The Chicago specification is a very full one, but
-the \emph{Manual} is actually, in many circumstances, fairly relaxed
-about how much of the data from a work's title page you need to fit
-into a reference. Authors of introductions and afterwords, multiple
-publishers in different countries, the real names of authors more
-commonly known under pseudonyms, all of these are candidates for
-exclusion if you aren't making specific reference to them, and if you
-judge that their inclusion won't be of particular interest to your
-readers. Of course, any data that may be of such interest, and
-especially any needed to identify and track down a reference, has to
-be present, but sometimes it pays to step back and reevaluate how much
-information you're providing. I've tried to make
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} robust enough to handle the most
-complex, data-rich citations, but there may be instances where you can
-save yourself some typing by keeping it simple.
-
-\mylittlespace Scot Becker has pointed out to me that the inverse
-problem not only exists but may well become increasingly common, to
-wit, .bib database entries generated by bibliographic managers which
-helpfully provide as much information as is available, including
-fields that users may well wish not to have printed (ISBN, URL, DOI,
-\textsf{pagetotal}, inter alia). The standard \textsf{biblatex}
-styles contain a series of options, detailed in \textsf{biblatex.pdf}
-§3.1.2.2, for controlling the printing of some of these fields, and
-with this release I have implemented the ones that are relevant to
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago}, along with a couple that Scot requested and
-that may be of more general usefulness. There is also a general
-option to excise with one command all the fields under consideration
--- please see section~\ref{sec:chicpreset} above.
-
-\mylittlespace If you are having problems with the interaction of
-punctuation and quotation marks in notes or bibliography, first please
-check that you've used \cmd{mkbibquote} in the relevant part of your
-.bib file. If you are still getting errors, please let me know, as it
-may well be a bug.
-
-\mylittlespace For the \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} style, I have
-fully adopted \textsf{biblatex's} system for providing punctuation at
-the end of entries. Several users noted insufficiencies in previous
-releases of \textsf{biblatex-chicago}, sometimes related to the
-semicolon between multiple citations, sometimes to ineradicable
-periods after long notes, bugs that were byproducts of my attempt to
-fix other end-of-entry errors. One of the side effects of this older
-code was (wrongly) to put a period after a long note produced, e.g.,
-by a command like \cmd{footnote\{\textbackslash headlessfullcite\}},
-whereas only the \enquote{foot} cite commands (including
-\cmd{autocite} in the default \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} set up)
-should do so. If you came to rely on this side effect, please note
-now that you'll have to put the period in yourself when explicitly
-calling \cmd{footnote}, like so: \cmd{footnote\{\textbackslash
- headlessfullcite\{key\}.\}}
-
-\mylittlespace When you use abbreviations at the ends of fields in
-your .bib file (e.g., \enquote{\texttt{n.d.}} or
-\enquote{\texttt{Inc.},}) \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} should deal
-automatically with adding (or suppressing) appropriate punctuation
-after the final dot. This includes retaining periods after such dots
-when a closing parenthesis intervenes, as in (n.d.). Merely entering
-the abbreviation without informing \textsf{biblatex} that the final
-dot is a dot and not a period should always work, though you do have
-to provide manual formatting in those rare cases when you need a comma
-after the author's initials in a bibliography, usually in a
-\textsf{misc} entry (see house:papers). If you find you need to
-provide such formatting elsewhere, please let me know.
-
-\mylittlespace Finally, allow me to reiterate what Philipp Lehman says
-in \textsf{biblatex.pdf}, to wit, use \textsf{bibtex8}, rather than
-standard \textsc{Bib}\TeX, and avoid the cryptic errors that ensue
-when your .bib file gets to a certain size.
-
-\section{The Specification: Author-Date}
-\label{sec:authdate}
-
-In what follows, I attempt to explain all the parts of
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} that might be considered somehow
-\enquote{non standard,} at least with respect to the styles included
-with \textsf{biblatex} itself, though in the section on entry fields I
-have also duplicated a lot of the information in
-\textsf{biblatex.pdf}, which I hope won't badly annoy expert users of
-the system. Headings in \mycolor{green} \colmarginpar{\textsf{New in
- this release}} indicate material new to this release, or
-occasionally old material that has undergone significant revision.
-Numbers in parentheses refer to sections of the \emph{Chicago Manual
- of Style}, 15th edition. The file \textsf{dates-test.bib} contains
-many examples from the \emph{Manual} which, when processed using
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate}, should produce the same output
-as you see in the \emph{Manual} itself, or at least compliant output,
-where the specifications are vague or open to interpretation, a state
-of affairs which does sometimes occur. I have provided
-\textsf{cms-dates-sample.pdf}, which shows how my system processes
-\textsf{dates-test.bib}, and I have also included the reference keys
-from the latter file below in parentheses.
-
-\subsection{Entry Types}
-\label{sec:types:authdate}
-
-The complete list of entry types currently available in
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate}, minus the odd \textsf{biblatex}
-alias, is as follows: \textbf{article}, \textbf{artwork},
-\textbf{audio}, \textbf{book}, \textbf{bookinbook}, \textbf{booklet},
-\textbf{collection}, \textbf{customc}, \textbf{image},
-\textbf{inbook}, \textbf{incollection}, \textbf{inproceedings},
-\textbf{inreference}, \mycolor{\textbf{letter}}, \textbf{manual},
-\mycolor{\textbf{misc}}, \textbf{music}, \textbf{online} (with its
-alias \textbf{www}), \textbf{patent}, \textbf{periodical},
-\textbf{proceedings}, \textbf{reference}, \textbf{report} (with its
-alias \textbf{techreport}), \textbf{review}, \textbf{suppbook},
-\textbf{suppcollection}, \textbf{suppperiodical}, \textbf{thesis}
-(with its aliases \textbf{mastersthesis} and \textbf{phdthesis}),
-\textbf{unpublished}, and \textbf{video}.
-
-\mylittlespace What follows is an attempt to specify all the
-differences between these types and the standard provided by
-\textsf{biblatex}. If an entry type isn't discussed here, then it is
-safe to assume that it works as it does in the standard styles. In
-general, I have attempted not to discuss specific entry fields here,
-unless such a field is crucial to the overall operation of a given
-entry type. As a general and important rule, most entry types require
-very few fields when you use \textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate}, so
-it seemed to me better to gather information pertaining to fields in
-the next section.
-
-\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\textbf{article}} \emph{Chicago Manual of
- Style} (17.148) recognizes three different sorts of periodical
-publication, \enquote{journals,} \enquote{magazines,} and
-\enquote{newspapers.} The first (17.150) includes \enquote{scholarly
- or professional periodicals available mainly by subscription,} while
-the second refers to \enquote{weekly or monthly} publications that are
-\enquote{available either by subscription or in individual issues at
- bookstores or newsstands.} \enquote{Magazines} will tend to be
-\enquote{more accessible to general readers,} and typically won't have
-a volume number.
-
-\mylittlespace Now, for articles in \enquote{journals} you can simply
-use the traditional \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ --- and indeed \textsf{biblatex}
---- \textsf{article} entry type, which will work as expected and set
-off the page numbers with a colon in the list of references, as
-required by the \emph{Manual}. If, however, you need to refer to a
-\enquote{magazine} or a \enquote{newspaper,} then you need to add an
-\textsf{entrysubtype} field containing the exact string
-\texttt{magazine}. The main formatting differences between a
-\texttt{magazine} (which includes both \enquote{magazines} and
-\enquote{newspapers}) and a plain \textsf{article} are that time
-specifications (month, day, season) aren't placed within parentheses,
-and that page numbers are set off by a comma rather than a colon.
-Otherwise, the two sorts of reference have much in common. (For
-\textsf{article}, see \emph{Manual} 17.154--181; batson,
-beattie:crime, chu:panda, connell:chronic, conway:evolution,
-friedman:learning, garaud:gatine, garrett:15, hlatky:hrt, kern,
-lewis:15, loften:hamlet, loomis:structure:15, rozner:liberation,
-schneider:mittelpleistozaene, terborgh:preservation, wall:ra\-di\-o,
-white:callima\-chus. With \textsf{entrysubtype} \texttt{magazine},
-cf.\ 17.166, 17.182--198; assocpress:gun, lakeforester:pushcarts,
-morgenson:market, reaves:ro\-sen, stenger:privacy.)
-
-\mylittlespace The \emph{Manual} suggests that \enquote{a list of
- works cited need not list newspaper items if these have been
- documented in the text} (17.191). This involves giving the title of
-the journal and the full date of publication in a parenthetical
-reference, including any other information in the main text, thereby
-obviating the need to present such an entry in the list of references.
-To utilize this method in the author-date style, in addition to a
-\texttt{magazine} \textsf{entrysubtype}, you'll need to place
-\mycolor{\texttt{cmsdate=full}} into the \textsf{options} field,
-including \texttt{skipbib} there as well to stop the entry printing in
-the list of references. If the entry only contains a \textsf{date}
-and \textsf{journaltitle} that's enough, but if it's a fuller entry
-also containing an \textsf{author} then you'll also need
-\texttt{useauthor=false} in the \textsf{options} field. Other surplus
-fields will be ignored.
-
-\mylittlespace If you are familiar with the notes \&\ bibliography
-style, you'll know that the \emph{Manual} treats reviews (of books,
-plays, performances, etc.) as a sort of recognizable subset of
-\enquote{journals,} \enquote{magazines,} and \enquote{newspapers,}
-distinguished mainly by the way one formats the title of the review
-itself. In the author-date style, however, since both a generic title
-like \enquote{review of \ldots} and a specific one (cf. gibbard:15;
-osborne:poison:15) are formatted in the same way (no quotation marks or
-italics, sentence-style capitalization), all you really need,
-conveniently, is the \textsf{article} type, with the
-\textsf{entrysubtype} toggle to distinguish the sort of periodical
-which contains the review.
-
-%\enlargethispage{-\baselineskip}
-
-\mylittlespace In the case of a review with a specific as well as a
-generic title, the former goes in the \textsf{title} field, and the
-latter in the \textsf{titleaddon} field. Standard \textsf{biblatex}
-intends this field for use with additions to titles that may need to
-be formatted differently from the titles themselves, and
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} uses it in just this way, with
-the additional wrinkle that it can, if needed, replace the
-\textsf{title} entirely, and this in, effectively, any entry type,
-providing a fairly powerful, if somewhat complicated, tool for getting
-\textsc{Bib}\TeX\ to do what you want. Here, however, if all you need
-is a generic title like \enquote{review of \ldots,} then you can
-simply use the \textsf{title} field for it, ignoring
-\textsf{titleaddon}.
-
-\mylittlespace No less than seven more things need explication under
-this heading. First, since the \emph{Manual} specifies, for the
-author-date style, that what goes into the \textsf{title} or the
-\textsf{titleaddon} fields of \textsf{article} entries stays
-unformatted --- no italics, no quotation marks --- this plain style
-(with sentence-style capitalization, as usual) is the default for such
-text, which means that you'll have to format any titles within these
-fields yourself, e.g., with \cmd{mkbibemph\{\}}. Second, the
-\emph{Manual} specifies a similar plain style for the titles of other
-sorts of material found in \enquote{magazines} and
-\enquote{newspapers,} e.g., obituaries, letters to the editor,
-interviews, the names of regular columns, and the like, though the
-names of regular columns, please note, need to be capitalized headline
-style. References may contain both the title of an individual article
-and the name of the regular column, in which case the former should
-go, as usual, in a \textsf{title} field, and the latter in
-\textsf{titleaddon}. (See 17.188, 17.190, 17.193; morgenson:market,
-reaves:rosen.)
-
-\mylittlespace Third, the \emph{Manual} suggests that
-\enquote{unsigned newspaper articles or features are best dealt with
- in text or notes. But if a \ldots\ reference-list entry should be
- needed, the name of the newspaper stands in place of the author}
-(17.192). It doesn't always carry through on this in its own
-presentation of newspaper citations (see esp.\ 17.188), but I've
-implemented their recommendation nonetheless, which means that in an
-\textsf{article} (or a \textsf{review}) entry, \textsf{entrysubtype}
-\texttt{magazine}, and only in such an entry, a missing
-\textsf{author} field results in the name of the periodical (in the
-\textsf{journaltitle} field) being used as the missing author. You
-can also place \mycolor{\texttt{cmsdate=full}} and \texttt{skipbib}
-into the \textsf{options} field to produce an augmented in-text
-citation whilst keeping this material out of the reference list. If
-the citation does appear in the reference list, the new default
-sorting scheme in \textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} means that you
-no longer need the \textsf{sortkey} field to alphabetize by
-\textsf{journaltitle} instead of \textsf{title}, though you will still
-need one if you retain the definite or indefinite article at the
-beginning of the \textsf{journaltitle}. Also, if you want to
-abbreviate the \textsf{journaltitle} for use in citations, then the
-\textsf{shortauthor} field, somewhat surprisingly, is the place for
-it. (See section~\ref{sec:authformopts}, below;
-lakeforester:pushcarts, nyt:trevorobit, unsigned:ranke.)
-
-%\enlargethispage{-\baselineskip}
-
-\mylittlespace Fourth, in certain fields, just beginning your data
-with a lowercase letter activates the mechanism for capitalizing that
-letter depending on its context within a list of references entry.
-This is less important in the author-date style, where this
-information only turns up in the reference list and not in citations,
-but you can consult \textbf{\textbackslash autocap} below for all the
-details. Both the \textsf{titleaddon} and \textsf{note} fields are
-among those treating their data this way, and since both appear
-regularly in \textsf{article} entries, I thought the problem merited a
-preliminary mention here.
-
-\mylittlespace Fifth, if you need to cite an entire issue of any sort
-of periodical, rather than one article in an issue, then the
-\textsf{periodical} entry type, once again with or without the
-\texttt{magazine} toggle in \textsf{entrysubtype,} is what you'll
-need. (You can also use the \textsf{article} type, placing what would
-normally be the \textsf{issuetitle} in the \textsf{title} field and
-retaining the usual \textsf{journaltitle} field, but this arrangement
-isn't compatible with standard \textsf{biblatex}.) The \textsf{note}
-field is where you place something like \enquote{special issue} (with
-the small \enquote{s} enabling the automatic capitalization routines),
-whether you are citing one article or the whole issue
-(conley:fifthgrade, good:wholeissue). Indeed, this is a somewhat
-specialized use of \textsf{note}, and if you have other sorts of
-information you need to include in an \textsf{article} or
-\textsf{periodical} entry, then you shouldn't put it in the
-\textsf{note} field, but rather in \textsf{titleaddon} or perhaps
-\textsf{addendum} (brown:bremer).
-
-\mylittlespace Sixth, I would suggest that if you wish to cite a
-television or radio broadcast, the \textsf{article} type,
-\textsf{entrysubtype} \texttt{magazine} is the place for it. The name
-of the program would go in \textsf{journaltitle}, with the name of the
-episode in \textsf{title}. The network's name goes into the
-\textsf{usera} field. (8.196, 17.207; see bundy:macneil for an
-example of how this all might look in a .bib file.)
-
-\mylittlespace Finally, if you're planning to use the same .bib file
-for the author-date and for the notes \&\ bibliography style, you may
-need to look under the \textsf{article} and \textsf{review} entries in
-section~\ref{sec:entrytypes} above for the full instructions on their
-differences. Any well-constructed \textsf{review} entry will work
-just fine under author-date, but if you only need the author-date
-style then you can avoid the complexity of learning another entry
-type.
-
-\mylittlespace If you're still with me, allow me to recommend that you
-browse through \textsf{dates-test.bib} to get a feel for just how many of
-the \emph{Manual}'s complexities the \textsf{article} and
-\textsf{periodical} types attempt to address. It may be that in
-future releases of \textsf{biblatex-chicago} I'll be able to simplify
-these procedures somewhat, but if you are only using author-date at
-least you've avoided some of the worst of it.
-
-\mybigspace Arne \mymarginpar{\textbf{artwork}} Kjell Vikhagen has
-pointed out to me that none of the standard entry types were
-straightforwardly adaptable when referring to visual artworks. The
-\emph{Manual} doesn't give any thorough specifications for such
-references, and indeed it's unclear that it believes it necessary to
-include them in the reference apparatus at all. Still, it's easy to
-conceive of contexts in which a list of artworks studied might be
-desirable, and \textsf{biblatex} includes entry types for just this
-purpose, though the standard styles leave them undefined. The two I
-have adopted are \textsf{artwork} and \textsf{image}, the former
-intended for paintings, sculptures, etchings, and the like, the latter
-for photographs. The two entry types work in exactly the same way as
-far as constructing your .bib entry, and when printed the only
-difference will be that the titles of \textsf{artworks} are
-italicized, those of \textsf{images} in plain text.
-
-\mylittlespace As one might expect, the artist goes in \textsf{author}
-and the name of the work in \textsf{title}. The \textsf{type} field
-is intended for the medium --- e.g., oil on canvas, charcoal on paper
---- and the \textsf{version} field might contain the state of an
-etching. You can place the dimensions of the work in \textsf{note},
-and the current location in \textsf{organization},
-\textsf{institution}, and/or \textsf{location}, in ascending order of
-generality. The \textsf{type} field, as in several other entry types,
-uses \textsf{biblatex's} automatic capitalization routines, so if the
-first word only needs a capital letter at the beginning of a sentence,
-use lowercase in the .bib file and let \textsf{biblatex} handle it for
-you. (See \emph{Manual} 12.33; leo:madonna, bedford:photo.)
-
-\mylittlespace As a final complication, the \emph{Manual} (8.206) says
-that \enquote{the names of works of antiquity \ldots\,are usually set
- in roman.} If you should need to include such a work in the
-reference apparatus, you can either define an \textsf{entrysubtype}
-for an \textsf{artwork} entry --- anything will do --- or you could
-use the \textsf{image} type, or you could try the \textsf{misc} entry
-type with an \textsf{entrysubtype}. Fortunately, in this instance the
-other fields in a \textsf{misc} entry function pretty much as in
-\textsf{artwork} or \textsf{image}.
-
-\mybigspace For \mymarginpar{\textbf{audio}} this release of
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago}, following the request of Johan Nordstrom, I
-have included three new entry types, all undefined by the standard
-styles, designed to allow users to present audiovisual sources in
-accordance with the Chicago specifications. The \emph{Manual's}
-presentation of such sources (17.263--273), though admirably brief,
-seems to me somewhat inconsistent. I attempted to condense all the
-requirements into two new entry types, but ended up relying on three,
-the differences between which I shall attempt to delineate here.
-There are likely to be occasions when your choice of entry type is not
-obvious, but at the very least \textsf{biblatex-chicago} should help
-you maintain consistency. For users of the author-date style, it is
-as well to note here that the \emph{Manual} (17.265) suggests that
-\enquote{such materials are best mentioned in running text and grouped
- in the reference list under a subhead,} a suggestion you may wish to
-follow, particularly if your audiovisual entries don't typically
-contain the information --- \textsf{author} and \textsf{date} ---
-needed to produce a parseable parenthetical citation.
-
-\mylittlespace The \textbf{music} type is intended for all musical
-recordings that do not have a video component. This means, for
-example, digital media (whether on CD or hard drive), vinyl records,
-and tapes. The \textbf{video} type includes (nearly) all visual
-media, whether it be films, TV shows, tapes and DVDs of the preceding
-or of any sort of performance (including music), or online multimedia.
-Finally, the \textbf{audio} type, our current concern, fills gaps in
-the two others, and presents its sources in a more \enquote{book-like}
-manner. Published musical scores need this type --- unpublished ones
-would use \textsf{misc} with an \textsf{entrysubtype}
-(shapey:partita:15) --- as do such favorite educational formats as the
-slideshow and the filmstrip (greek:filmstrip:15, schubert:muellerin,
-verdi:corsaro). The \emph{Manual} (17.269--270) sometimes uses a
-similar format for audio books and even for films (twain:audio,
-weed:flatiron), though elsewhere these sorts of material are presented
-as \textsf{music} and \textsf{video}, respectively. It would appear
-to depend on which sorts of publication facts you wish to present ---
-cf.\ \emph{Manual} 17.269.
-
-\mylittlespace Once you've accepted the analogy of composer to
-\textsf{author}, constructing an \textsf{audio} entry should be fairly
-straightforward, since many of the fields function just as they do in
-\textsf{book} or \textsf{inbook} entries. Indeed, please note that I
-compare it to both these other types as, in common with the other
-audiovisual types, \textsf{audio} has to do double duty as an analogue
-for both books and collections, so while there will normally be an
-\textsf{author}, a \textsf{title}, a \textsf{publisher}, a
-\textsf{date}, and a \textsf{location}, there may also be a
-\textsf{booktitle} and/or a \textsf{maintitle} --- see
-schubert:muellerin for an entry that uses all three in citing one song
-from a cycle. If the medium in question needs specifying, the
-\textsf{type} field is the place for it. (It is characteristic of
-this entry type that such information is placed after the publisher
-information, whereas in the other audiovisual types their order is
-reversed.) Finally, the \textsf{titleaddon} field can specify
-functions for which \textsf{biblatex-chicago} provides no automated
-handling, e.g., a librettist (verdi:corsaro).
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{bookinbook}} type provides the
-means of referring to parts of books that are considered, in other
-contexts, themselves to be books, rather than chapters, essays, or
-articles. (Older versions of \textsf{biblatex-chicago} used
-\textbf{customb} for this purpose, but this is now deprecated.) Such
-an entry can have a \textsf{title} and a \textsf{maintitle}, but it
-can also contain a \textsf{booktitle}, all three of which will be
-italicized in the reference matter. In general usage it is,
-therefore, rather like the traditional \textsf{inbook} type, only with
-its \textsf{title} in italics rather than in plain text. (See
-\emph{Manual} 17.72, 17.89, 17.93; bernard:boris, euripides:orestes,
-plato:republic:gr.)
-
-\mylittlespace \textbf{NB}: The Euripides play receives slightly
-different presentations in 17.89 and 17.93. Although the
-specification is very detailed, it doesn't eliminate all choice or
-variation. Using a system like \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ should help to
-maintain consistency.
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{booklet}} is the first of two
-entry types --- the other being \textsf{manual}, on which see below
---- which are traditional in \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ styles, but which the
-\emph{Manual} (17.241) suggests may well be treated basically as
-books. In the interests of backward compatibility,
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} will so format such an entry,
-which uses the \textsf{howpublished} field instead of a standard
-\textsf{publisher}, though of course if you do decide just to use a
-\textsf{book} entry then any information you might have given in a
-\textsf{howpublished} field should instead go in \textsf{publisher}.
-(See clark:mesopot.)
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{customa}} entry type is now
-obsolete, and any such entries in your .bib file will trigger an
-error. Please use the standard \textsf{biblatex} \textbf{letter} type
-instead.
-
-%\enlargethispage{-\baselineskip}
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{customb}} entry type is now
-obsolete, and any such entries in your .bib file will trigger an
-error. Please use the standard \textsf{biblatex} \textbf{bookinbook}
-type instead.
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{customc}} entry type has
-undergone a metamorphosis with this release, as I previously warned
-both here and in the RELEASE file. Rather than being a (deprecated)
-alias of the standard \textsf{biblatex} \textbf{suppbook}, it now
-allows you to include the expansions of abbreviations and shorthands
-\emph{inside} the list of references itself, as recommended by the
-\emph{Manual} (17.47), rather than in the list of shorthands.
-
-\mylittlespace In its simplest form, you need merely place the
-abbreviation of the (often institutional) author's name into the
-\textsf{author} field, and its expansion into the \textsf{title}
-field. To make sure it appears in the list of references, you can
-either manually include the entry key in a \cmd{nocite} command, or
-you can put that entry key in the \textsf{userc} field in the main
-.bib entry, in which case \textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} will
-print the expanded abbreviation if and only if you cite the main
-entry. (See abbrev:BSI, abbrev:ISO, bsi:abbreviation:15,
-iso:electrodoc:15.) Under ordinary circumstances,
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago} will connect the abbreviation and its
-expansion with the word \enquote{\emph{See}} --- or its equivalent in
-the document's language --- in italics. If you wish to present the
-cross-reference differently, you can put the connecting word(s) into
-the \textsf{nameaddon} field.
-
-\mylittlespace I haven't disabled in any way the mechanisms
-\textsf{biblatex} uses to produce the list of shorthands, so the
-\cmd{printshorthands} command will still print that list in your
-document. Judicious use of \texttt{skiplos} in the \textsf{options}
-field will therefore enable simultaneous use of several methods of
-shorthand presentation, if that is useful. It may be as well to
-mention here that the \emph{Manual} (17.39--40) offers other uses for
-this alphabetized cross-referencing system in reference lists, which
-may also prove helpful for the author-date style. See the discussion
-of \textsf{customc} in section~\ref{sec:entrytypes} of the notes \&\
-bibliography docs, above.
-
-\mylittlespace Finally, you may need to use this entry type if you
-wish to include a comment inside the parentheses of a citation, as
-specified by the \emph{Manual} (16.111). If you have a
-\textsf{postnote}, then you can manually provide the punctuation and
-comment there, e.g., \cmd{autocite[4; the unrevised
- trans.]\{stendhal:parma\}}. Without a \textsf{postnote}, you'll
-need a separate \textsf{misc} or \textsf{customc} entry containing
-just the text of the comment in the \textsf{title} field,
-\textsf{entrysubtype} \texttt{classical}, and \textsf{options}
-\texttt{skipbib}. An \cmd{autocites} command calling both the main
-text and the comment will do the trick, e.g.,
-\cmd{autocites\{chicago:manual:15\}\{chicago:comment\}}.
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{image}} entry type, left
-undefined in the standard styles, is in
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} intended for referring to
-photographs. Excluding the possible use of the \textsf{entrysubtype}
-field, which in an \textsf{image} entry would be ignored, this type is
-a clone of \textsf{artwork}, so you should consult the latter's
-documentation above to see how to construct your .bib entry. (See
-\emph{Manual} 12.33; bedford:photo.)
-
-\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
-
-\mybigspace These \mymarginpar{\textbf{inbook}\\\textbf{incollection}}
-two standard \textsf{biblatex} types have very nearly identical
-formatting requirements as far as the Chicago specification is
-concerned, but I have retained both of them for compatibility.
-\textsf{Biblatex.pdf} (§~2.1.1) intends the first for \enquote{a part
- of a book which forms a self-contained unit with its own title,}
-while the second would hold \enquote{a contribution to a collection
- which forms a self-contained unit with a distinct author and its own
- title.} The \textsf{title} of both sorts will be in plain text, and
-in general you can use either type for most material falling into
-these categories. There is, however, an important difference between
-them, as it is only in \textsf{incollection} entries that I implement
-the \emph{Manual's} recommendations for space-saving abbreviations in
-the list of references when you cite multiple pieces from the same
-\textsf{collection}. These abbreviations are activated when you use
-the \textsf{crossref} or \textsf{xref} field in \textsf{incollection}
-entries, and not in \textsf{inbook} entries, mainly because the
-\emph{Manual} (17.70) here specifies a \enquote{multiauthor book.}
-(For more on this mechanism see \textbf{crossref}, below, and note
-that it is also active in \textsf{letter} and \textsf{inproceedings}
-entries. There is, of course, nothing to prevent you from using the
-mechanism when referring to, e.g., chapters from a single-author book,
-but you'll have to use \textsf{incollection} instead of
-\textsf{inbook}.) If the part of a book to which you are referring
-has had a separate publishing history as a book in its own right, then
-you may wish to use the \textsf{bookinbook} type, instead, on which
-see above. (See \emph{Manual} 17.68--72; \textsf{inbook}:
-ashbrook:brain, phibbs:diary, will:cohere; \textsf{incollection}:
-centinel:letters, contrib:contrib, sirosh:visualcortex; ellet:galena,
-keating:dearborn, and lippincott:chicago [and the \textsf{collection}
-entry prairie:state] demonstrate the use of the \textsf{crossref}
-field with its attendant abbreviations in the list of references.)
-
-\mylittlespace \textbf{NB}: The \emph{Manual} suggests that, when
-referring to a chapter, one use either a chapter number or the
-inclusive page numbers, not both. In-text citations, of course,
-require any \textsf{postnote} field to specify if it is a whole
-chapter to which you are referring.
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{inproceedings}} entry type works
-pretty much as in standard \textsf{biblatex}. Indeed, the main
-differences between it and \textsf{incollection} are the lack of an
-\textsf{edition} field and the possibility that an
-\textsf{organization} may be cited alongside the \textsf{publisher},
-even though the \emph{Manual} doesn't specify its use (17.71). Please
-note, also, that the \textsf{crossref} and \textsf{xref} mechanism for
-shortening citations of multiple pieces from the same
-\textsf{proceedings} is operative here, just as it is in
-\textsf{incollection} entries. See \textbf{crossref}, below, for more
-details.
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{inreference}} entry type is
-aliased to \textsf{incollection} in the standard styles, but the
-\emph{Manual's} requirements for the notes \&\ bibliography style
-prompted a thoroughgoing revision. Unfortunately, instructions for
-the author-date style are considerably less copious, so parts of what
-follows are my best guess at following the specification
-(17.238--239).
-
-\mylittlespace One thing, at least, seems clear. If your reference
-work can easily or conveniently be presented like a regular book, that
-is, with an author or editor, a year of publication, and a title, and
-if you you will be citing it by page or section number, then you
-should almost certainly simply choose the \textsf{book} entry type for
-your .bib entry. (Cf.\ mla:style, schellinger:novel, times:guide. The
-latter was presented as an \textsf{inreference} entry for the notes
-\&\ bibliography style, but because the \textsf{book} entry type can
-also present references to alphabetized headings [see below], at least
-in the list of references, then it seemed better just to choose a
-\textsf{book} entry for the author-date style.)
-
-\mylittlespace If you simply cannot make your source fit the template
-for a \textsf{book}, then you may need to use the \textsf{inreference}
-type, the main feature of which is the \textsf{lista} field, which you
-use to present citations from \enquote{alphabetically arranged} works
-by named article rather than by page number. You should present these
-article names just as they appear in the work, separated by the
-keyword \enquote{\texttt{and}} if there is more than one, and
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} will provide the appropriate
-prefatory string (\texttt{s.v.}, plural \texttt{s.vv.}), and enclose
-each in its own set of quotation marks (times:guide). More relevant
-to the author-date style is the fact that the \textsf{postnote} field
-works the same way in \textsf{inreference} entries, the only
-limitation on this system being that this field, unlike
-\textsf{lista}, is not a list, and therefore for the formatting to
-work correctly you can only put one article name in it. In the case
-of \enquote{[w]ell-known reference books, such as major dictionaries
- and encyclopedias,} you are encouraged not to include them in the
-list of references, so the \textsf{lista} field actually may be of
-less use than this special formatting of \textsf{postnote}. You may
-want to look at ency:britannica, where only a (carefully-formatted)
-\textsf{shorttitle} and an \textsf{options} field are necessary to
-allow you to produce in-text citations that look like (\emph{Ency.\
- Brit.}\ 15th ed., s.v. \enquote{Article}).
-
-\mylittlespace If it seems appropriate to include such a work in the
-list of references, perhaps because the work is not so well known that
-a short citation will be parseable by your readers, or perhaps because
-it is an online work, which requires you to provide a \textsf{urldate}
-(see below), be aware that the contents of the \textsf{lista} field
-will also be presented there, which may not be what you want. A
-separate \textsf{inreference} or \textsf{reference} entry might solve
-this problem, but you may also need a \textsf{sortkey} field to ensure
-proper alphabetization, as \textsf{biblatex} will attempt to use an
-\textsf{editor} or \textsf{author} name, if either is present. In a
-typical \textsf{inreference} entry, very few fields are needed, as
-\enquote{the facts of publication are often omitted, but the edition
- (if not the first) must be specified.} In practice, this means a
-\textsf{title} and possibly an \textsf{edition} field. The
-\textsf{author} field holds the author of the specific article (in
-\textsf{lista}), not the author of the \textsf{title} as a whole.
-This name will be printed in parentheses after the entry's name
-(grove:sibelius).
-
-\mylittlespace All of these rules apply to online reference works, as
-well, for which you need to provide not only a \textsf{url} but also,
-always, a \textsf{urldate}, as these sources are in constant flux
-(wikiped:bibtex, grove:sibelius). For author-date, it may be
-convenient to duplicate the \textsf{urlyear} in the \textsf{year}, as
-this will help to present and categorize the material both in
-citations and in the list of references. Please note, however, that
-the automatic provision of the \enquote{n.d.} abbreviation when a
-\textsf{year} is missing has been turned off for \textsf{inreference}
-entries, as for \textsf{misc} and \textsf{reference} entries.
-
-\mylittlespace Some of these presentational difficulties might make
-switching between the two Chicago styles rather more difficult,
-depending on the nature of your sources. The advice I offer in
-section~\ref{sec:twostyles} below may be of assistance.
-
-\mybigspace This \colmarginpar{\textbf{letter}} entry type was designed
-to be used for citing letters, memoranda, or similar texts, but
-\emph{only} when they appear in a published collection. (Unpublished
-material of this nature needs a \textsf{misc} entry, for which see
-below.) The author-date specification (17.77), however, recommends
-against individual letters appearing in a list of references,
-suggesting instead that you put the whole published collection in a
-\textsf{book} entry and use a notice in the text to specify the letter
-(white:total).
-
-\mylittlespace If you absolutely must include individual letters in
-the list of references, for whatever reason, then the instructions
-above for the notes \&\ bibliography style in
-section~\ref{sec:entrytypes}, s.v.\ \enquote{\textsf{letter,}} should
-get you started. There are a few wrinkles, related to date
-specifications, that I shall attempt to clarify here. If you look at
-white:ross:memo and white:russ, you'll see two letters from the same
-published collection, both written in the same year. You can now
-simply use the \textsf{origdate} field in both of them, because in the
-absence of a \textsf{date} (or an \textsf{eventdate}) \textsf{Biber}
-and \textsf{biblatex} will use the \textsf{origyear} as the
-\textsf{labelyear}, putting it at the head of the entry and in the
-citation, and also ensuring that the letters \texttt{a,b,c} are
-appended to disambiguate the two sources. You no longer need anything
-in the \textsf{options} field at all, thanks to the way
-\cmd{DeclareLabelyear} works through the possibilities and finds a
-date to head the entry. In this case, it works because we are using
-the \textsf{xref} mechanism to refer to the whole published collection
-(white:total), so a separate citation of that entry provides the
-\textsf{date} for the shortened cross-reference included in the list
-of references, and the \textsf{letter} entry never sees that
-\textsf{date} at all.
-
-\mylittlespace If this all seems clear as mud, I'm not surprised, but
-let me suggest that you experiment with the different date settings to
-see what kinds of effects they have on the final result, and also read
-the documentation of the \textsf{date} field in
-section~\ref{sec:fields:authdate} below.
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{manual}} is the second of two
-traditional \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ entry types that the \emph{Manual}
-suggests formatting as books, the other being \textsf{booklet}. As
-with this latter, I have retained it in
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} for backward compatibility, its
-main peculiarity being that, in the absence of a named author, the
-\textsf{organization} producing the manual will be provided both as
-author and as publisher. (You can give a shortened form of the
-\textsf{organization} in the \textsf{shortauthor} field for text
-citations, if needed.) Of course, if you were to use a \textsf{book}
-entry for such a reference, then you would need to define both
-\textsf{author} and \textsf{publisher} using the name you here might
-have put in \textsf{organization}. (See 17:47; chicago:manual:15,
-dyna:browser, natrecoff:camera.)
-
-\mybigspace As \colmarginpar{\textbf{misc}} its name suggests, the
-\textsf{misc} entry type was designed as a hold-all for citations that
-didn't quite fit into other categories. In \textsf{biblatex-chicago},
-I have somewhat extended its applicability, while retaining its
-traditional use. Put simply, with no \textsf{entrysubtype} field, a
-\textsf{misc} entry will retain backward compatibility with the
-standard styles, so the usual \textsf{howpublished}, \textsf{version},
-and \textsf{type} fields are all available for specifying an otherwise
-unclassifiable text, and the \textsf{title} will be italicized. (The
-\emph{Manual}, you may wish to note, doesn't give specific
-instructions on how such citations should be formatted, so when using
-the Chicago style I would recommend you have recourse to this
-traditional entry type as sparingly as possible.)
-
-\mylittlespace If you do provide an \textsf{entrysubtype} field, the
-\textsf{misc} type provides a means for citing unpublished letters,
-memoranda, private contracts, wills, interviews, and the like, making
-it something of an unpublished analogue to the \textsf{letter} and
-\textsf{article} entry types (which see). Typically, such an entry
-will cite part of an archive, and equally typically the text cited
-won't have a specific title, but only a generic one, whereas an
-\textsf{unpublished} entry will ordinarily have a specific author and
-title, and won't come from a named archive. As a rule, and as with
-the \textsf{letter} type, the \emph{Manual} (17.233) suggests that the
-list of references will usually contain only the name of the whole
-archived collection, with more specific information about individual
-items provided in the text, \enquote{outside the parentheses.} If, on
-the other hand, \enquote{only one item from a collection has been
- mentioned in text, the entry may begin with the writer's name (if
- known).} (See 17.205-206, 17.220, 17.222-232; house:papers cites a
-whole archive, while creel:house, dinkel:agassiz, and spock:interview
-cite individual pieces.)
-
-\mylittlespace As far as constructing your .bib entry goes, you should
-first know that, like the \textsf{inreference} and \textsf{reference}
-types, the absence of any date will not result in the \enquote{n.d.}
-abbreviation automatically being provided. As for presenting the
-date, the \emph{Manual} draws a distinction between archival material
-that is \enquote{letter-like} (letters, memoranda, reports, telegrams)
-and that which isn't (interviews, wills, contracts, or even personal
-communications you've received and which you wish to cite). This may
-not always be the easiest distinction to draw, and in previous
-releases of \textsf{biblatex-chicago} I have been ignoring it, but
-once you've decided to classify it one way or the other you put the
-date in the \textsf{origdate} field for letters, etc.\ (creel:house),
-and into the \textsf{date} field for the others (spock:interview).
-Like with the \textsf{letter} type, if the only date present is an
-\textsf{origdate}, you no longer need to set the \texttt{cmsdate}
-option in your .bib entry to make sure that that year appears at the
-head of the entry (and in citations) --- this now happens
-automatically. (Cf.\ particularly the documentation in
-section~\ref{sec:fields:authdate} below, s.v.\ \enquote{date}, and
-also the \textsf{letter} type above for some of the date-related
-complications that can arise, and how you can address them with
-judicious use of the \textsf{options}, \textsf{date}, and
-\textsf{origdate} fields.)
-
-\mylittlespace As in \textsf{letter} entries, the titles of
-unpublished letters are of the form \texttt{Author to Recipient},
-further information can be given in the \textsf{titleaddon} field,
-while the \textsf{origlocation} field can hold the place where the
-letter was written. Interviews or similar pieces will have a
-different sort of title, but all types will use the \textsf{note},
-\textsf{organization}, \textsf{institution}, and \textsf{location}
-fields (in ascending order of generality) to identify the archive,
-though the \emph{Manual} specifies (17.228) that well-known
-depositories don't usually need a city, state or country specified.
-(The traditional \textsf{misc} fields are all still available, also.)
-
-\mylittlespace When your .bib entry refers to an entire archived
-collection, then you may wish to use the word
-\enquote{\texttt{classical}} as your \textsf{entrysubtype}, which will
-have no effect on the list of references but will change the look of
-the in-text citations (house:papers). Instead of any date, the
-citation will include the \textsf{title}, separated from the
-\textsf{author's} name by a space, e.g., (House Papers). This same
-arrangement, happily, allows you easily to cite individual books of
-the Bible, and also certain other sacred texts (17.246--49; genesis).
-Please see under \textsf{entrysubtype} in
-section~\ref{sec:fields:authdate} below for all the details of the
-\texttt{classical} toggle.
-
-\mylittlespace In all this class of archived material, the
-\emph{Manual} (17.222) quite specifically requires more consistency
-within your own work than conformity to some external standard, so it
-is the former which you should pursue. I hope that
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago} proves helpful in this regard.
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{music}} is one of three new
-audiovisual entry types, and is intended primarily to aid in the
-presentation of musical recordings that do not have a video component,
-though it can also include audio books (auden:reading:15). A DVD or
-VHS of an opera or other performance, by contrast, should use the
-\textbf{video} type instead (handel:messiah:15). Because
-\textsf{biblatex} --- and \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ before it --- were
-designed primarily for citing book-like objects, some choices needed
-to be made in assigning the various roles found on the back of a CD to
-the fields in a typical .bib entry. I have also implemented several
-new bibstrings to help in identifying these roles within entries. If
-you can think of a simpler way to distribute the roles, please let me
-know, so that I can consider making changes before anyone gets used to
-the current equivalences.
-
-\mylittlespace These equivalences, in summary form, are:
-
-{\renewcommand{\descriptionlabel}[1]{\qquad\textsf{#1}}
-\begin{description}
-\item[author =] composer, songwriter, or performer(s),
- depending on whom you wish to emphasize by placing them at the head
- of the entry.
-\item[editor, editora, editorb =] conductor, director or
- performer(s). These will ordinarily follow the \textsf{title} of
- the work, though the usual \texttt{useauthor} and \texttt{useeditor}
- options can alter the presentation within an entry. Because these
- are non-standard roles, you will need to identify them using the
- following:
-\item[editortype, editoratype, editorbtype:] The most common roles,
- all associated with specific bibstrings (or their absence), will be
- \texttt{conductor}, \texttt{director}, \texttt{producer}, and,
- oddly, \texttt{none}. The last is particularly useful when
- identifying the group performing a piece, as it usually doesn't need
- further specifying and this role prevents \textsf{biblatex} from
- falling back on the default \texttt{editor} bibstring.
-\item[title, booktitle, maintitle:] As with the other audiovisual
- types, \textsf{music} serves as an analogue both to books and to
- collections, so the title will either be, e.g., the album title or a
- song title, in which latter case the album title would go into
- \textsf{booktitle}. The \textsf{maintitle} might be necessary for
- something like a box set of \emph{Complete Symphonies}.
-\item[series, number:] These two are closely associated, and are
- intended for presenting the catalog information provided by the
- music publisher, especially in the case when a publisher oversees
- more than one label. In nytrumpet:art:15, for example, the
- \textsf{series} field holds the label (\texttt{Vox/Turn\-about}) and
- the \textsf{number} field the catalog number (\texttt{PVT 7183}).
- You can certainly put all of this information into one of the above
- fields, but separating it may help make the .bib entry more
- readable.
-\item[howpublished/pubstate:] The \emph{Manual} (17.268) follows the
- rather specialized requirements for presenting publishing
- information for musical recordings. The normal symbol for musical
- copyright is\ \texttt{\textcircledP} (Unicode point u+2117, SOUND
- RECORDING COPYRIGHT), but other copyrights \texttt{\textcopyright}
- are often also asserted. The \textsf{howpublished} field is the
- place for these symbols, and it may also have to hold a year
- designation if the \texttt{\textcircledP} and the
- \texttt{\textcopyright} apply to different years, as sometimes
- happens. In keeping with its general usage in the author-date
- style, but also recognizing the peculiarities of this entry type, I
- have made the \textsf{pubstate} field a synonym for
- \textsf{howpublished}. Please choose only one of them per entry,
- and remember that the automatic presentation of reprints via the
- \textsf{pubstate} field is disabled in \textsf{music} entries. (See
- nytrumpet:art:15.)
-\item[date, publisher:] Ordinarily, you can use a combination of the
- \textsf{date} and \textsf{origdate} fields, along with the
- \texttt{cmsdate} entry option, to present the various dates of
- publication and republication of a work. This will mostly still
- work in \textsf{music} entries, but, as I just pointed out, the
- automatic presentation of reprints via the \textsf{pubstate} field
- has been turned off, as it doesn't provide a good fit for the
- materials at hand. Instead, the \textsf{howpublished} or
- \textsf{pubstate} field can be used manually to present the
- publishing complexities, including year information that won't be
- placed at the head of an entry. Any year data you do wish placed
- there needs to go in \textsf{date} or \textsf{origdate}, as usual.
- Thankfully, the \textsf{publisher} field itself is self-explanatory.
-\item[type:] As in all the audiovisual entry types, the \textsf{type}
- field holds the medium of the recording, e.g., vinyl, 33 rpm,
- 8-track tape, cassette, compact disc, mp3, ogg vorbis.
-\end{description}}
-
-I should also note here that I have implemented the standard
-\textsf{biblatex} \textbf{eventdate} field, in case you need it to
-identify a particular recording session or concert. It will be
-printed just after the \textsf{title}. The entries in
-\textsf{dates-test.bib} should at least give you a good idea of how
-this all works, and that file also contains an example of an audio
-book presented in a \textsf{music} entry. If you browse the examples
-in the \emph{Manual} you will see that no author-date examples are
-given, so I have generally adopted the formatting decisions I made for
-the notes \&\ bibliography style. Arguments as to why I'm wrong will,
-of course, be entertained. (Cf. 17.268; auden:reading:15,
-beethoven:sonata29, bernstein:shostakovich, nytrumpet:art:15.)
-
-\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\textbf{online}} \emph{Manual}'s
-instructions (17.142--147, 17.198, 17.234--237) for citing online
-materials are slightly different from those suggested by standard
-\textsf{biblatex}. Indeed, this is a case where complete backward
-compatibility with other \textsf{biblatex} styles may be impossible,
-because as a general rule the \emph{Manual} considers relevant not
-only where a source is found, but also the nature of that source,
-e.g., if it's an online edition of a book (james:ambassadors), then it
-calls for a \textsf{book} entry. Even if you cite an
-\enquote{intrinsically online} source, if that source is structured
-more or less like a conventional printed periodical, then you'll
-probably want to use \textsf{article} or \textsf{review} instead of
-\textsf{online} (stenger:privacy, which cites \emph{CNN.com} ---
-\emph{Yahoo!\ News} is another example that would be treated in such a
-way). If the \enquote{standard facts of publication} are missing,
-then the \textsf{online} type is usually the best choice
-(evanston:library, powell:email). Some online materials will, no
-doubt, make it difficult to choose an entry type, but so long as all
-locating information is present, then perhaps that is enough to
-fulfill the specification, or at least so I'd like to hope.
-
-\mylittlespace Constructing an \textsf{online} .bib file entry is much
-the same as in \textsf{biblatex}. The \textsf{title} field would
-contain the title of the page, the \textsf{organization} field could
-hold the title or owner of the whole site. If there is no specific
-title for a page, but only a generic one (powell:email), then in the
-author-date style the \textsf{title} will serve just as well as
-\textsf{titleaddon}, which latter is required for the notes \&\
-bibliography style.
-
-%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
-
-\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\textbf{patent}} \emph{Manual} is very
-brief on the subject of patents (17.219), but very clear about which
-information it wants you to present, so such entries may not work well
-with other \textsf{biblatex} styles. The important date, as far as
-Chicago is concerned, is the filing date. If a patent has been filed
-but not yet granted, then you can place the filing date in either the
-\textsf{date} field or the \textsf{origdate} field, and
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} will automatically prepend the
-bibstring \texttt{patentfiled} to it. If the patent has been granted,
-then you put the filing date in the \textsf{origdate} field, and you
-put the date it was issued in the \textsf{date} field, to which the
-bibstring \texttt{patentissued} will automatically be prepended. In
-this entry type, and in no other, the \texttt{cmsdate=on} option is
-turned on by default, so that the filing date will be at the head of
-the entry in the list of references and in the citation, as well. If
-you have more than one patent by the same author(s) filed in the same
-year, and if one or both of them have also been granted, then you'll
-need to reverse the dates (or put \texttt{switchdates} in the
-\textsf{options} field) so that \enquote{a,b,c} etc.\ can be appended
-to the year. (If there is just the one, filing, date, please don't
-use the \texttt{switchdates} option.) The patent number goes in the
-\textsf{number} field, and you should use the standard
-\textsf{biblatex} bibstrings in the \textsf{type} field. Though it
-isn't mentioned by the \emph{Manual},
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} will print the \textsf{holder}
-after the \textsf{author}, if you provide one. See petroff:impurity.
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{periodical}} is the standard
-\textsf{biblatex} entry type for presenting an entire issue of a
-periodical, rather than one article within it. It has the same
-function in \textsf{biblatex-chicago}, and in the main uses the same
-fields, though in keeping with the system established in the
-\textsf{article} entry type (which see) you'll need to provide
-\textsf{entrysubtype} \texttt{magazine} if the periodical you are
-citing is a \enquote{newspaper} or \enquote{magazine} instead of a
-\enquote{journal.} Also, remember that the \textsf{note} field is the
-place for identifying strings like \enquote{special issue,} with its
-initial lowercase letter to activate the automatic capitalization
-routines, though this isn't strictly necessary in the author-date
-style. (See \emph{Manual} 17.170; good:wholeissue.)
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{reference}} entry type is
-aliased to \textsf{collection} by the standard \textsf{biblatex}
-styles, but I intend it to be used in cases where you need to cite a
-reference work but not an alphabetized article or articles in that
-work. This could be because it doesn't contain such articles, and yet
-you still want the entry in the list of references to start with the
-\textsf{title}. Indeed, the only differences between it and
-\textsf{inreference} are the lack of a \textsf{lista} field to present
-an alphabetized entry, and the fact that any \textsf{postnote} field
-will be printed verbatim, rather than formatted as an alphabetized
-entry. (Cf.\ \textsf{inreference}, above.)
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{report}} entry type is a
-\textsf{biblatex} generalization of the traditional \textsc{Bib}\TeX\
-type \textsf{techreport}. Instructions for such entries are rather
-thin on the ground in the \emph{Manual} (17.241), so I have followed
-the generic advice about formatting it like a book, and hope that the
-results conform to the specification. Its main peculiarities are the
-\textsf{institution} field in place of a \textsf{publisher}, the
-\textsf{type} field for identifying the kind of report in question,
-and the \textsf{isrn} field containing the International Standard
-Technical Report Number of a technical report. As in standard
-\textsf{biblatex}, if you use a \textsf{techreport} entry, then the
-\textsf{type} field automatically defaults to
-\cmd{bibstring\{techreport\}}. As with \textsf{booklet} and
-\textsf{manual}, you can also use a \textsf{book} entry, putting the
-report type in \textsf{note} and the \textsf{institution} in
-\textsf{publisher}. (See herwign:office.)
-
-\mybigspace As \mymarginpar{\textbf{review}} its name suggests, this
-entry type was designed for reviews published in periodicals, and if
-you've already read the \textsf{article} documentation above you'll
-know that I haven't yet found an example where you absolutely need to
-use it for the author-date style. The code to process such an entry
-remains in \textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate}, so if you are
-building a .bib file for use with both Chicago styles then any
-\textsf{review} entries in it will work fine in both, but otherwise
-the \textsf{article} type will suffice. If you find I'm wrong about
-this, please let me know. (Cf.\ barcott:review:15, bundy:macneil,
-Clemens:letter, gourmet:052006, kozinn:review, nyt:trevorobit,
-ratliff:review:15, unsigned:ranke, wallraff:word.)
-
-%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{suppbook}} is the entry type to
-use if the main focus of a reference is supplemental material in a
-book or in a collection, e.g., an introduction, afterword, or forward,
-either by the same or by a different author. There are two mechanisms
-in \textsf{biblatex-chicago} for producing such a citation. First,
-these three just-mentioned types of material, and only these three
-types, can be referenced using the \textsf{introduction},
-\textsf{afterword}, or \textsf{foreword} fields, a system that
-requires you simply to define one of them in any way and leave the
-others undefined. The macros don't use the text provided by such an
-entry, they merely check to see if one of them is defined, in order to
-decide which sort of pre- or post-matter is at stake, and to print the
-appropriate string before the \textsf{title} in the list of
-references, and possibly also in the list of shorthands. This
-mechanism works without modification across multiple languages, but I
-have also provided functionality which allows you to cite any sort of
-supplemental material whatever, using the \textsf{type} field. Under
-this second system, simply put the nature of the material, including
-the relevant preposition, in that field, beginning with a lowercase
-letter so \textsf{biblatex} can decide whether it needs capitalization
-depending on the context. Examples might be \enquote{\texttt{preface
- to}} or \enquote{\texttt{colophon of}.} (Please note, however,
-that unless you use a \cmd{bibstring} command in the \textsf{type}
-field, the resultant entry will not be portable across languages.)
-
-\mylittlespace The other rules for constructing your .bib entry remain
-the same. The \textsf{author} field refers to the author of the
-introduction or afterword, while \textsf{bookauthor} refers to the
-author of the main text of the work, if the two differ. If the focus
-of the reference is the main text of the book, but you want to mention
-the name of the writer of an introduction or afterword for
-completeness, then the normal \textsf{biblatex} rules apply, and you
-can just put their name in the appropriate field of a \textsf{book}
-entry, that is, in the \textsf{foreword}, \textsf{afterword}, or
-\textsf{introduction} field. (See \emph{Manual} 17.74--75;
-friedman:intro, polakow:afterw, prose:intro).
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{suppcollection}} fulfills a
-function analogous to \textsf{suppbook}. Indeed, I believe the
-\textbf{suppbook} type can serve to present supplemental material in
-both types of work, so this entry type is an alias to
-\textsf{suppbook}, which see.
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{suppperiodical}} type is
-intended to allow reference to generically-titled works in
-periodicals, such as regular columns or letters to the editor.
-\textsf{Biblatex} also provides the \textsf{review} type for this
-purpose, and in the notes \&\ bibliography style
-\textsf{suppperiodical} is an alias of \textsf{review}. In the
-author-date style, however, as discussed above, you really only need
-the \textsf{article} entry type for this purpose, though I have
-retained \textsf{suppperiodical} in order to facilitate switching
-between the two Chicago styles.
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{video}} is the last of the new
-audiovisual entry types, and as its name suggests it is intended for
-citing visual media, be it films of any sort or TV shows, broadcast,
-on the Net, on VHS, DVD, or Blu-ray. As with the \textsf{music} type
-discussed above, certain choices had to be made when associating the
-production roles found, e.g., on a DVD, to those bookish ones provided
-by \textsf{biblatex}. Here are the main correspondences:
-
-{\renewcommand{\descriptionlabel}[1]{\qquad\textsf{#1}}
-\begin{description}
-\item[author:] This will not infrequently be left undefined, as the
- director of a film should be identified as such and therefore placed
- in the \textsf{editor} field with the appropriate
- \textsf{editortype} (see below). You will need it, however, to
- identify the composer of, e.g., an oratorio on VHS
- (handel:messiah:15), or perhaps the provider of commentaries or
- other extras on a film DVD (cleese:holygrail).
-\item[editor, editora, editorb:] The director or producer, or possibly
- the performer or conductor in recorded musical performances. These
- will ordinarily follow the \textsf{title} of the work, though the
- usual \texttt{useauthor} and \texttt{useeditor} options can alter
- the presentation within an entry. Because these are non-standard
- roles, you will need to identify them using the following:
-\item[editortype, editoratype, editorbtype:] The most common roles,
- all associated with specific bibstrings (or their absence), will
- likely be \texttt{director}, \texttt{produ\-cer}, and, oddly,
- \texttt{none}. The last is particularly useful if you want to
- identify performers, as they usually don't need further specifying
- and this role prevents \textsf{biblatex} from falling back on the
- default \texttt{editor} bibstring.
-\item[title, titleaddon, booktitle, maintitle:] As with the other
- audiovisual types, \textsf{video} serves as an analogue both to
- books and to collections, so the \textsf{title} may be of a whole
- film DVD or of a TV series, or it may identify one episode in a
- series or one scene in a film. In the latter cases, the title of
- the whole would go in \textsf{booktitle}. The \textsf{titleaddon}
- field may be useful for specifying the season and/or episode number
- of a TV series, or for any other information that needs to come
- between the \textsf{title} and the \textsf{booktitle}
- (cleese:holygrail, episode:tv, handel:messiah:15). As in the
- \textsf{music} type, \textsf{maintitle} may be necessary for a boxed
- set or something similar.
-\item[date, origdate, pubstate:] The publication details of this sort
- of material are usually straightforward, at least compared with the
- \textsf{music} type, but there will be occasions when you need two
- dates. When citing an episode of a long-running TV series you may
- need both a date for the episode and either a range for the whole
- run or a year for the release of the box set, and when citing a film
- on DVD you may want to present both the original release date and
- the date of release on DVD. In these cases, the usual
- \textsf{chicago-authordate} mechanisms for choosing the date to
- appear at the head of an entry apply. You can also use the standard
- \textsf{pubstate} field with \texttt{reprint} in it to control the
- printing of the original date in parentheses at the end of the
- entry, though I have altered the string that is printed there (see
- next item). I have also disabled the printing of the
- \cmd{bibstring\{reprint\}} before the publication information, as it
- doesn't really apply to this class of material. Cf.\ episode:tv,
- hitchcock:nbynw; \textsf{pubstate}, below.
-\item[entrysubtype:] In most entry types, the string printed in
- parentheses to date the original appearance of a work is
- \enquote{\texttt{Orig.\ pub.}} This won't work in \textsf{video},
- so by default in this entry type it will print
- \enquote{\texttt{Orig.\ released.}} As this isn't quite right for
- TV shows, you can place the exact string \texttt{tv} into the
- \textsf{entrysubtype} field to obtain \enquote{\texttt{Orig.\
- shown.}} Alternatively, you can put whatever you like in the
- \textsf{pubstate} field, including parentheses and the year if you
- want them, and all of it will appear where it should. (The
- \emph{Manual} gives no guidance on presenting televisual materials,
- so I've improvised. Any improvements will be gratefully
- considered.)
-\item[type:] As in all the audiovisual entry types, the \textsf{type}
- field holds the medium of the \textsf{title}, e.g., 8 mm, VHS, DVD,
- Blu-ray, MPEG.
-\end{description}}
-
-As with the \textsf{music} type, entries in \textsf{dates-test.bib}
-should at least give you a good idea of how all this works. (Cf.\
-17.270, 273; cleese:holygrail, episode:tv, handel:messiah:15,
-hitchcock:nbynw, loc:city.)
-
-\subsection{Entry Fields}
-\label{sec:fields:authdate}
-
-The following discussion presents, in alphabetical order, a complete
-list of the entry fields you will need to use
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate}. As in
-section~\ref{sec:types:authdate}, I shall include references to the
-numbered paragraphs of the \emph{Chicago Manual of Style}, and also to
-the entries in \textsf{dates-test.bib}. Many fields are most easily
-understood with reference to other, related fields. In such cases,
-cross references should allow you to find the information you need.
-
-\mybigspace As \mymarginpar{\textbf{addendum}} in standard
-\textsf{biblatex}, this field allows you to add miscellaneous
-information to the end of an entry, after publication data but before
-any \textsf{url} or \textsf{doi} field. In the \textsf{patent} entry
-type (which see), it will be printed in close association with the
-filing and issue dates. In any entry type, if your data begins with a
-word that would ordinarily only be capitalized at the beginning of a
-sentence, then simply ensure that that word is in lowercase, and the
-style will take care of the rest. Cf.\ \textsf{note}. (See
-\emph{Manual} 17.145, 17.123; davenport:attention, natrecoff:camera.)
-
-\mybigspace In most \mymarginpar{\textbf{afterword}} circumstances,
-this field will function as it does in standard \textsf{biblatex},
-i.e., you should include here the author(s) of an afterword to a given
-work. The \emph{Manual} suggests that, as a general rule, the
-afterword would need to be of significant importance in its own right
-to require mentioning in the reference apparatus, but this is clearly
-a matter for the user's judgment. As in \textsf{biblatex}, if the
-name given here exactly matches that of an editor and/or a translator,
-then \textsf{biblatex-chicago} will concatenate these fields in the
-formatted references.
-
-\mylittlespace As noted above, however, this field has a special
-meaning in the \textsf{suppbook} entry type, used to make an
-afterword, foreword, or introduction the main focus of a citation. If
-it's an afterword at issue, simply define \textsf{afterword} any way
-you please, leave \textsf{foreword} and \textsf{introduction}
-undefined, and \textsf{biblatex-chicago} will do the rest. Cf.\
-\textsf{foreword} and \textsf{introduction}. (See \emph{Manual} 17.46,
-17.74; polakow:afterw.)
-
-\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
-
-\mybigspace At \mymarginpar{\textbf{annotation}} the request of Emil
-Salim, \textsf{biblatex-chicago} has, as of version 0.9, added a
-package option (see \texttt{annotation} below, section
-\ref{sec:useropts}) to allow you to produce annotated lists of
-references. The formatting of such a list is currently fairly basic,
-though it conforms with the \emph{Manual's} minimal guidelines
-(16.77). The default in \textsf{chicago-authordate.cbx} is to define
-\cmd{DeclareFieldFormat\{an\-notation\}} using \cmd{par}\cmd{nobreak}
-\cmd{vskip} \cmd{bibitemsep}, though you can alter it by re-declaring
-the format in your preamble. The page-breaking algorithms don't
-always give perfect results here, but the default formatting looks, to
-my eyes, fairly decent. In addition to tweaking the field formatting
-you can also insert \cmd{par} (or even \cmd{vadjust\{\cmd{eject}\}})
-commands into the text of your annotations to improve the appearance.
-Please consider the \texttt{annotation} option a work in progress, but
-it is usable now. (N.B.: The \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ field \textsf{annote}
-serves as an alias for this.)
-
-\mybigspace I \mymarginpar{\textbf{annotator}} have implemented this
-\textsf{biblatex} field pretty much as that package's standard styles
-do, even though the \emph{Manual} doesn't actually mention it. It may
-be useful for some purposes. Cf.\ \textsf{commentator}.
-
-\mybigspace For \mymarginpar{\textbf{author}} the most part, I have
-implemented this field in a completely standard \textsc{Bib}\TeX\
-fashion. Remember that corporate or organizational authors need to
-have an extra set of curly braces around them (e.g.,
-\texttt{\{\{Associated Press\}\}}\,) to prevent \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ from
-treating one part of the name as a surname (17.47, 17.197;
-assocpress:gun, chicago:manual:15). If there is no \textsf{author}, then
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago} will look, in sequence, for an
-\textsf{editor}, \textsf{translator}, or \textsf{compiler} (actually
-\textsf{namec}, currently) and use that name (or those names) instead,
-followed by the appropriate identifying string (esp.\ 17.41, also
-17.28--29, 17.88, 17.95, 17.172; boxer:china, brown:bremer,
-harley:cartography, schellinger:novel, sechzer:women, silver:ga\-wain,
-soltes:georgia). \textsf{Biber} now takes care of alphabetizing
-entries no matter which name appears at their head, and the package
-also automatically provides a name for citations.
-
-\mylittlespace As its name suggests, the author-date style very much
-wants to have a name of some sort present both for the entries in the
-list of references and for the in-text citations. Indeed,
-\enquote{this system works best where all or most of the sources are
- easily convertible to author-date references} (16.4). The
-\emph{Manual} is nothing if not flexible, however, so with unsigned
-articles or encyclopedia entries the \textsf{journaltitle} or
-\textsf{title} may take the place of the \textsf{author}
-(gourmet:052006, lakeforester:pushcarts, nyt:trevorobit,
-unsigned:ranke, wikipedia:bibtex). Even in such \textsf{article}
-entries, however, it may be advantageous to provide a (formatted and
-abbreviated) \textsf{shortauthor} field to keep the in-text citations
-to a reasonable length, though not at the expense of making it hard to
-find the relevant entries in the reference list.
-
-\mylittlespace If you wish to emphasize the activity of an editor or a
-translator, you can use the \textsf{biblatex} and
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago} options \texttt{useauthor=false},
-\texttt{useeditor=false}, \texttt{usetranslator=false}, and
-\texttt{usecompiler=false} in the \textsf{options} field to choose
-which one appears at the head of an entry. A peculiarity of this
-system of toggles is that in order to ensure that the \textsf{title}
-of a book appears at the head of an entry, you would need to use
-\emph{all four} of the toggles, even though the hypothetical entry
-contains no \textsf{translator}. Internally,
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago} is either searching for an
-author-substitute, or it is skipping over elements of the ordered,
-unidirectional chain \textsf{author -> editor -> translator ->
- compiler -> title}. If you don't include
-\texttt{usetranslator=false} in the \textsf{options} field, then the
-package begins its search at \textsf{translator} and continues on to
-\textsf{namec}, even though you have \texttt{usecompiler=false} in
-\textsf{options}. The result will be that the compilers' names will
-appear at the head of the entry. If you want to skip over parts of
-the chain, you must turn off \emph{all} of the parts up to the one you
-wish printed. Another peculiarity of the system is that setting the
-Chicago-specific \texttt{usecompiler} option to \texttt{false} doesn't
-remove \textsf{namec} from the sorting list, whereas the other
-standard \textsf{biblatex} toggles \emph{do} remove their names from
-the sorting list, so in some corner cases you may need the
-\textsf{sortkey} field. See \cmd{DeclareSortingScheme} in
-section~\ref{sec:authformopts}, below.
-
-\mylittlespace This system of toggles, then, can turn off
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago}'s mechanism for finding a name to place at
-the head of an entry, but it also very usefully adds the possibility
-of citing a work with an \textsf{author} by its editor, compiler or
-translator instead (17.45; eliot:pound), something that wasn't
-possible before. For full details of how this works, see the
-\textsf{editortype} documentation below. (Of course, in
-\textsf{collection} and \textsf{proceedings} entry types, an
-\textsf{author} isn't expected, so there the \textsf{editor} is
-required, as in standard \textsf{biblatex}. Also, in \textsf{article}
-entries with \textsf{entrysubtype} \texttt{magazine}, the absence of
-an \textsf{author} triggers the use of the \textsf{journaltitle} in
-its stead. See those entry types for further details.)
-
-\mylittlespace \textbf{NB}: The \emph{Manual} provides specific
-instructions for formatting the names of both anonymous and
-pseudonymous authors (17.32--39). The use of \enquote{Anonymous} as
-the name is \enquote{generally to be avoided,} but may in some cases
-be useful \enquote{in a bibliography in which several anonymous works
- need to be grouped.} I would add that sometimes it's the simplest
-option for a difficult citation --- cf.\ virginia:plantation:15, where
-placing \enquote{\texttt{Anon.}\hspace{-2pt}}\ in the \textsf{author}
-field seems about the only way to fit this text into the author-date
-style. If \enquote{the authorship is known or guessed at but was
- omitted on the title page,} then you need to use the
-\textsf{authortype} field to let \textsf{biblatex-chicago} know this
-fact. If the author is known (horsley:prosodies), then put
-\texttt{anon} in the \textsf{authortype} field, if guessed at
-(cook:sotweed) put \texttt{anon?}\ there. (In both cases,
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago} tests for these \emph{exact} strings, so
-check your typing if it doesn't work.) This will have the effect of
-enclosing the name in square brackets, with or without the question
-mark indicating doubt. As long as you have the right string in the
-\textsf{authortype} field, \textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} will
-also do the right thing automatically in text citations.
-
-\mylittlespace The \textsf{nameaddon} field furnishes the means to
-cope with the case of pseudonymous authorship. If the author's real
-name isn't known, simply put \texttt{pseud.}\ (or
-\cmd{bibstring\{pseudonym\}}) in that field (centinel:letters). If
-you wish to give a pseudonymous author's real name, simply include it
-there, formatted as you wish it to appear, as the contents of this
-field won't be manipulated as a name by \textsf{biblatex}
-(lecarre:quest, stendhal:parma). If you have given the author's real
-name in the \textsf{author} field, then the pseudonym goes in
-\textsf{nameaddon}, in the form \texttt{Firstname Lastname,\,pseud.}\
-(creasey:ashe:blast, creasey:morton:hide, creasey:\\york:death). This
-latter method will allow you to keep all references to one author's
-work under different pseudonyms grouped together in the list of
-references, a method recommended by the \emph{Manual}.
-
-\mylittlespace One final piece of advice. An institutional author's
-name, or a journal's name being used in place of an author, can be
-rather too long for in-text citations. In unsigned:ranke I placed an
-abbreviated form of the \textsf{journaltitle} into
-\textsf{shortauthor}, a practice condoned by the \emph{Manual}
-(17.159) even in author-date reference lists. In iso:electrodoc:15, I
-provided a \textsf{shorthand} field, which by default in
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} will appear in text citations.
-With this release, you can expand the abbreviation inside the list of
-references itself, as suggested by the \emph{Manual}, (17.47). Please
-see \textsf{customc} above and \textsf{shorthands} below for the
-details. (A list of shorthands can still clarify the abbreviation, if
-you wish.)
-
-\mybigspace In \mymarginpar{\textbf{authortype}}
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago}, this field serves a function very much in
-keeping with the spirit of standard \textsf{biblatex}, if not with its
-letter. Instead of allowing you to change the string used to identify
-an author, the field allows you to indicate when an author is
-anonymous, that is, when his or her name doesn't appear on the title
-page of the work you are citing. As I've just detailed under
-\textsf{author}, the \emph{Manual} generally discourages the use of
-\enquote{Anonymous} (or \enquote{Anon.} as an author, though in some
-cases it may well be your best option. If, however, the name of the
-author is known or guessed at, then you're supposed to enclose that
-name within square brackets, which is exactly what
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago} does for you when you put either
-\texttt{anon} (author known) or \texttt{anon?} (author guessed at) in
-the \textsf{authortype} field. (Putting the square brackets in
-yourself doesn't work right, hence this mechanism.) The macros test
-for these \emph{exact} strings, so check your typing if you don't see
-the brackets. Assuming the strings are correct,
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago} will also automatically do the right thing
-in citations. (See the \textsf{author} docs just above. Also
-\emph{Manual} 17.33--34; cook:sotweed, horsley:prosodies.)
-
-%\enlargethispage{-\baselineskip}
-
-\mybigspace For \mymarginpar{\textbf{bookauthor}} the most part, as in
-\textsf{biblatex}, a \textsf{bookauthor} is the author of a
-\textsf{booktitle}, so that, for example, if one chapter in a book has
-different authorship from the book as a whole, you can include that
-fact in a reference (17.75; will:cohere). Keep in mind, however, that
-the entry type for introductions, forewords and afterwords
-(\textsf{suppbook}) uses \textsf{bookauthor} as the author of
-\textsf{title} (polakow:afterw, prose:intro).
-
-\mybigspace This, \mymarginpar{\vspace{-12pt}\textbf{bookpagination}}
-a standard \textsf{biblatex} field, allows you automatically to prefix
-the appropriate string to information you provide in a \textsf{pages}
-field. If you leave it blank, the default is to print no identifying
-string (the equivalent of setting it to \texttt{none}), as this is the
-practice the \emph{Manual} recommends for nearly all page numbers.
-Even if the numbers you cite aren't pages, but it is otherwise clear
-from the context what they represent, you can still leave this blank.
-If, however, you specifically need to identify what sort of unit the
-\textsf{pages} field represents, then you can either hand-format that
-field yourself, or use one of the provided bibstrings in the
-\textsf{bookpagination} field. These bibstrings currently are
-\texttt{column,} \texttt{line,} \texttt{paragraph,} \texttt{page,}
-\texttt{section,} and \texttt{verse}, all of which are used by
-\textsf{biblatex's} standard styles.
-
-\mylittlespace There are two points that may need explaining here.
-First, all the bibstrings I have just listed follow the Chicago
-specification, which may be confusing if they don't produce the
-strings you expect. Second, remember that \textsf{bookpagination}
-applies only to the \textsf{pages} field --- if you need to format a
-citation's \textsf{postnote} field, then you must use
-\textsf{pagination}, which see (15.45--46, 17.128--138).
-
-\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\textbf{booksubtitle}} subtitle for a
-\textsf{booktitle}. See the next entry for further information.
-
-\mybigspace In \mymarginpar{\textbf{booktitle}} the
-\textsf{bookinbook}, \textsf{inbook}, \textsf{incollection},
-\textsf{inproceedings}, and \textsf{letter} entry types, the
-\textsf{booktitle} field holds the title of the larger volume in which
-the \textsf{title} itself is contained as one part. It is important
-not to confuse this with the \textsf{maintitle}, which holds the more
-general title of multiple volumes, e.g., \emph{Collected Works}. It
-is perfectly possible for one .bib file entry to contain all three
-sorts of title (euripides:orestes, plato:republic:gr). You may also
-find a \textsf{booktitle} in other sorts of entries (e.g.,
-\textsf{book} or \textsf{collection}), but there it will almost
-invariably be providing information for the \textsc{Bib}\TeX\
-cross-referencing apparatus (prairie:state), which I discuss below
-(\textbf{crossref}). The \textsf{booktitle} takes sentence-style
-capitalization in author-date.
-
-%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
-
-\mybigspace An \mymarginpar{\textbf{booktitleaddon}} annex to the
-\textsf{booktitle}. It will be printed in the main text font, without
-quotation marks. If your data begins with a word that would
-ordinarily only be capitalized at the beginning of a sentence, then
-simply ensure that that word is in lowercase, and
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago} will automatically do the right thing.
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{chapter}} field holds the
-chapter number, mainly useful only in an \textsf{inbook} or an
-\textsf{incollection} entry where you wish to cite a specific chapter
-of a book (ashbrook:brain).
-
-\mybigspace I \mymarginpar{\textbf{commentator}} have implemented this
-\textsf{biblatex} field pretty much as that package's standard styles
-do, even though the \emph{Manual} doesn't actually mention it. It may
-be useful for some purposes. Cf.\ \textsf{annotator}.
-
-\mybigspace \textsf{Biblatex} \mymarginpar{\textbf{crossref}} uses the
-standard \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ cross-referencing mechanism, and has also
-introduced a modified one of its own (\textsf{xref}). The
-\textsf{crossref} field works exactly the same as it always has, while
-\textsf{xref} attempts to remedy some of the deficiencies of the usual
-mechanism by ensuring that child entries will inherit no data at all
-from their parents. Having said all that, a few further instructions
-may be in order for users of both \textsf{biblatex} and
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago}. First, remember that fields in a
-\textsf{collection} entry, for example, differ from those in an
-\textsf{incollection} entry. In order for the latter to inherit the
-\textsf{booktitle} field from the former, the former needs to have
-such a field defined, even though a \textsf{collection} entry has no
-use itself for such an entry (see ellet:galena, keating:dearborn,
-lippincott:chicago, and prairie:state). Note also that an entry with
-a \textsf{crossref} field will mechanically try to inherit all
-applicable fields from the entry it cross-references. In the case of
-ellet:galena et al., you can see that this includes the
-\textsf{subtitle} field found in prairie:state, which would then,
-quite incorrectly, be added to the \textsf{title} of ellet:galena. In
-cases like these, you could just make sure that prairie:state didn't
-contain such a field, by placing the entire title + subtitle in the
-\textsf{title} field, separated by a colon. Alternatively, as you can
-see in ellet:galena, you can just define an empty \textsf{subtitle}
-field to prevent it inheriting the unwanted subtitle from
-prairie:state.
-
-\mylittlespace Turning now more narrowly to \textsf{biblatex-chicago},
-the \emph{Manual} (17.70) specifies that if you cite several
-contributions to the same collection, all (including the collection
-itself) may be listed separately in the list of references, which the
-package does automatically, using the default inclusion threshold of 2
-in the case both of \textsf{crossref}'ed and \textsf{xref}'ed entries.
-(The familiar \cmd{nocite} command may also help in some
-circumstances.) In the list of references an abbreviated form will be
-appropriate for all the child entries. The current version of
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} implements these instructions,
-but only if you use a \textsf{crossref} or an \textsf{xref} field, and
-only in \textsf{incollection}, \textsf{inproceedings}, or
-\textsf{letter} entries (on the last named, see just below). If you
-look at ellet:galena, keating:dearborn, lippincott:chicago, and
-prairie:state you'll see this mechanism in action in the list of
-references. If you wish to disable this, then simply don't use a
-\textsf{crossref} or \textsf{xref} field in your entries.
-
-%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
-
-\mylittlespace A published collection of letters requires a somewhat
-different treatment (17.77--78). If you cite more than one letter
-from the same collection, then the \emph{Manual} specifies that only
-the collection itself --- probably in a \textsf{book} entry --- should
-appear in the list of references. In the author-date style, it
-discourages individual letters from appearing in that list at all,
-even if only one is cited from a collection. If you have special
-reason to do so, however, you can still present individual published
-letters there, and they too can use the system of shortened references
-just outlined, even though the \emph{Manual} doesn't explicitly
-require it. As with \textsf{incollection} and \textsf{inproceedings},
-mere use of a \textsf{crossref} or \textsf{xref} field will activate
-this mechanism, while avoidance of said fields will disable it. (See
-white:ross:memo, white:russ, and white:total, for examples of the
-\textsf{xref} field in action in this way, and please note that the
-second of these entries is entirely fictitious, provided merely for
-the sake of example.)
-
-\mylittlespace I should also take this opportunity to mention that you
-need to be careful when using the \textsf{shorthand} field in
-conjunction with the \textsf{crossref} or \textsf{xref} fields,
-bearing in mind the complicated questions of inheritance posed by all
-such cross-references, most especially in \textsf{letter},
-\textsf{incollection}, and \textsf{inproceedings} entries. A
-\textsf{shorthand} field in a parent entry is, at least in the current
-state of \textsf{biblatex-chicago}, a bad idea.
-
-\mybigspace Predictably, \colmarginpar{\textbf{date}} this is one of
-the key fields for the author-date style, and one which, as a general
-rule, every .bib entry designed for this system ought to contain. So
-important is it, that \textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} will, in
-most entry types, supply a missing \cmd{bibstring\{nodate\}} if there
-is no date otherwise provided; citations will look like (Author n.d.),
-and entries in the list of references will begin: Author, Firstname.\
-n.d. This seems simple enough, but there are a surprising number of
-complications which require attention.
-
-\mylittlespace First, with \textsf{Biber}, an absent \textsf{date}
-will automatically provoke it into searching for other sorts of dates
-in the entry, in the order \textsf{date, eventdate, origdate,
- urldate}. Only when it finds no year at all will it fall back on
-\cmd{bibstring\{nodate\}}. You can eliminate some of these dates from
-the running, or change the search order, using the
-\cmd{DeclareLabelyear} command in your preamble, but please be aware
-that I have hard-coded this order into the author-date style in order
-to cope with some tricky corners of the specification. If you reorder
-these dates, and your references enter these tricky corners, the
-results might be surprising. (Cf.\ section~4.5.2 in
-\textsf{biblatex.pdf} for the \cmd{DeclareLabelyear} command.)
-Second, the entry types in which this automatic provision is turned
-off are \textsf{inreference}, \textsf{misc}, and \textsf{reference},
-none of which may be expected in the standard case to have a date
-provided. In all other entry types \enquote{\texttt{n.d.}}\ will
-appear if no date is provided, though you can turn this off throughout
-the document in all entry types with the option \texttt{nodates=false}
-when loading \textsf{biblatex-chicago} in your preamble. (See
-section~\ref{sec:authpreset}, below.) Third, if you wish to provide
-the \enquote{\texttt{n.d.}}\ yourself in the \textsf{year} field,
-please instead put \cmd{bibstring\{nodate\}} there, as otherwise the
-punctuation in citations will come out (subtly) wrong. Fourth, while
-we're on the subject, the \textsf{year} field is also the place for
-things like \enquote{\texttt{forthcoming},} though you should use the
-\cmd{autocap} macro there to make sure the word comes out correctly in
-both citations and the list of references. The reason for this is
-that the \textsf{date} field accepts only numerical data, in
-\textsc{iso}8601 format (\texttt{yyyy-mm-dd}), whereas \textsf{year}
-can, conveniently, hold just about anything. It may be worth noting
-here that \textsf{Biber} is somewhat more exacting when parsing the
-\textsf{date} field than \textsc{Bib}\TeX, so a field looking like
-\texttt{1968/75} will simply be ignored, producing
-\enquote{\texttt{n.d.}}\ in the output --- you need \texttt{1968/1975}
-instead. If you want a more compressed year range, then you'll want
-to use the \textsf{year} field.
-
-\mylittlespace Fifth, for most entry types, only a year is really
-necessary, and in all types only the year --- or year range --- will
-be printed in text citations and at the head of entries in the list of
-references. More specific \textsf{date} fields are often present,
-however, in \textsf{article}, \textsf{misc}, \textsf{online},
-\textsf{patent}, and \textsf{unpublished} entries, for all of which
-any day or month provided will be printed later in the reference list
-entry. If you follow the recommendations of the \emph{Manual} and
-document newspaper articles within running text (17.191), then the
-citations need to contain the complete \textsf{date} along with the
-\textsf{journaltitle}. Placing \mycolor{\texttt{cmsdate=full}} (and
-\texttt{skipbib}) in the \textsf{options} field of an \textsf{article}
-or a \textsf{review} entry, alongside a possible
-\texttt{useauthor=false}, should allow you to achieve this. The
-\emph{Manual} is a little inconsistent when presenting the names of
-months in the author-date style, but currently
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} uses abbreviated forms, which you
-can change by setting the option \texttt{dateabbrev=false} in your
-document preamble. (Cf.\ assocpress:gun, barcott:review:15, batson,
-creel:house, nass:address, petroff:impurity, powell:email.)
-
-\mylittlespace Sixth, the \emph{Manual} (17.125--7) provides a number
-of options for when a particular entry --- a reprinted edition, say
---- has more than one date, and \textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate}
-allows you to choose among all of them. The user interface is a
-little more complicated than I had hoped, but I shall attempt to
-explain it here as clearly as I can. If a reprinted book, say, has
-both a \textsf{date} of publication for the reprint edition and an
-\textsf{origdate} for the original edition, then by default
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} will use the \textsf{date} in
-citations and at the head of the entry in the reference list. If you
-inform \textsf{biblatex-chicago} that the book is a reprint by putting
-the string \texttt{reprint} in the \textsf{pubstate} field, then a
-parenthetical notice will be printed at the end of the entry saying
-\enquote{(Orig.\ pub.\ 1898.)} With no \textsf{pubstate} field (and
-no \texttt{cmsdate} option), the algorithms will ignore the
-\textsf{origdate}.
-
-\mylittlespace If, for any reason, you wish the \textsf{origdate} to
-appear at the head of the entry, then you need to use the
-\texttt{cmsdate} toggle in the \textsf{options} field. This has 4
-possible states relevant to this context, though there is a fifth
-state (\mycolor{\texttt{full}}) which I've discussed two paragraphs
-up:
-
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item \texttt{cmsdate=on} prints the \textsf{origdate} at the head of
- the entry in the list of references and in citations: (Author 1898).
-\item \texttt{cmsdate=new} prints both the \textsf{origdate} and the
- \textsf{date}, using the \emph{Manual's}\ \enquote{new} format:
- (Author 1898/1952).
-\item \texttt{cmsdate=old} prints both the \textsf{origdate} and the
- \textsf{date}, using the \emph{Manual's}\ \enquote{old} format:
- (Author [1898] 1952).
-\item \texttt{cmsdate=off} is the default, discussed above:
- (Author 1952).
-\end{enumerate}
-
-In the first three cases, if you put the string \texttt{reprint} in
-the \textsf{pubstate} field, then the publication data in the list of
-references will include a notice, formatted according to the
-specifications, that the modern, cited edition is a reprint. In the
-first case, since the \textsf{date} hasn't yet been printed, this
-publication data will also include the date of the modern reprint.
-
-\mylittlespace Let us imagine, however, that your list of references
-contains another book by the same author, also a reprint edition:
-(Author 1896/1974). How will these two works be ordered in the list
-of references? By whatever appears in the \textsf{date} field, which
-appears first in the default definition of \cmd{DeclareLabelyear}, and
-which in this case will be wrong, because the entries should always be
-ordered by the \emph{first} date to appear there, in this case the
-contents of \textsf{origdate}. In this example, the solution can be
-as simple as a \textsf{sortyear} field set to something earlier than
-the date of the other work, e.g., 1951.
-
-\mylittlespace And if the original publication dates of the two works
-are the same? Just as when it is ordering entries, \textsf{biblatex}
-will always first process the contents of the \textsf{date} field when
-it is deciding whether to add the alphabetical suffix (\texttt{a,b,c}
-etc.) to the year to distinguish different works by the same author
-published in the same year. You can't even put the suffix on yourself
-because the \textsf{origdate} field only accepts numerical data.
-Citations of the two works should read, e.g., (Author 1898a) and
-(Author 1898b), but will in fact read, ambiguously, (Author 1898) and
-(Author 1898). Here we are forced to resort to an unusual expedient,
-which amounts to switching the two date fields, placing the earlier
-date in \textsf{date} and the later one in \textsf{origdate}.
-\textsf{Biblatex-chicago-authordate} tests for this condition using a
-simple arithmetical comparison between the two years, then printing
-the two dates according to the state of the \texttt{cmsdate} toggle.
-The four states of this toggle are the same as before, but there are
-only three possible outcomes, as follows:
-
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item \texttt{cmsdate=off} (the default) and \texttt{cmsdate=on}
- \emph{both} print the \textsf{date} at the head of the entry in the
- list of references and in citations: (Author 1898a), (Author 1898b).
-\item \texttt{cmsdate=new} prints both the \textsf{date} and the
- \textsf{origdate}, using the \emph{Manual's}\ \enquote{new} format:
- (Author 1898a/1952), (Author 1898b/1974).
-\item \texttt{cmsdate=old} prints both the \textsf{date} and the
- \textsf{origdate}, using the \emph{Manual's}\ \enquote{old} format:
- (Author [1898a] 1952), (Author [1898b] 1974).
-\end{enumerate}
-
-If, for some reason, the automatic switching of the dates cannot be
-achieved, perhaps in crossref'd \textsf{letter} entries that you
-really want to have in your list of references (white:ross:memo,
-white:russ), or perhaps in a reprint edition that hasn't yet appeared
-in print (preventing the comparison between a year and the word
-\enquote{forthcoming}), then you can use the per-entry option
-\texttt{switchdates} in the \textsf{options} field to achieve the
-required effects. It may also be worth remarking that the
-instructions in the \emph{Manual} aren't entirely clear on the subject
-of the alphabetical affix when both dates are used in a citation or at
-the head of an entry. It's possible that the differentiation between
-(Author 1898/1952) and (Author 1898/1974) is good enough without
-affixing anything to the first year, but then in this situation you
-would have to be using either \texttt{cmsdate=new} or
-\texttt{cmsdate=old}, so the switching functionality at least allows
-maximum flexibility.
-
-\mylittlespace Finally, in the \textsf{misc} entry type this field can
-help to distinguish between two classes of archival material, letters
-and \enquote{letter-like} sources using \textsf{origdate} while others
-(interviews, wills, contracts) use \textsf{date}. (See \textsf{misc}
-in section~\ref{sec:types:authdate} for the details.) If such an
-entry, as may well occur, contains only an \textsf{origdate}, as can
-also be the case in the \textsf{letter} entries I mentioned in the
-previous paragraph, \textsf{Biber} and the default
-\cmd{DeclareLabelyear} definition now make it possible to do without a
-\texttt{cmsdate} option, as \textsf{biblatex} will in such a case use
-the \textsf{origdate} to order the entries in a reference list, and
-will also append the alphabetical suffix if more than one entry by the
-same author has the same \textsf{origyear}. I recommend that you have
-a look through \textsf{dates-test.bib} to see how all these
-complications will affect the construction of your .bib database,
-especially at aristotle:metaphy:gr, creel:house, emerson:nature,
-james:ambassadors, maitland:canon, maitland:equity, schweit\-zer:bach,
-spock:in\-terview, white:ross:me\-mo, and white:russ. Cf.\ also
-\textsf{origdate} and \textsf{year}, below, and the \texttt{cmsdate},
-\texttt{nodates}, and \texttt{switchdates} options in
-sections~\ref{sec:preset:authdate} and \ref{sec:authentryopts}.
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{day}} field, as of
-\textsf{biblatex} 0.9, is obsolete, and will be ignored if you use it
-in your .bib files. Use \textsf{date} instead.
-
-\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{doi}} \textsf{biblatex}
-field. The Digital Object Identifier of the work, which the
-\emph{Manual} suggests you can use \enquote{in place of page numbers
- or other locators} (17.181; friedman:learn\-ing). Cf.\
-\textsf{url}.
-
-%\enlargethispage{-\baselineskip}
-
-\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{edition}} \textsf{biblatex}
-field. If you enter a plain cardinal number, \textsf{biblatex} will
-convert it to an ordinal (chicago:manual:15), followed by the appropriate
-string. Any other sort of edition information will be printed as is,
-though if your data begins with a word (or abbreviation) that would
-ordinarily only be capitalized at the beginning of a sentence, then
-simply ensure that that word (or abbreviation) is in lowercase, and
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago} will automatically do the right thing
-(babb:peru, times:guide). In most situations, the \emph{Manual}
-generally recommends the use of abbreviations in the list of
-references, but there is room for the user's discretion in specific
-citations (emerson:nature).
-
-\mybigspace As \mymarginpar{\textbf{editor}} far as possible, I have
-implemented this field as \textsf{biblatex}'s standard styles do, but
-the requirements specified by the \emph{Manual} present certain
-complications that need explaining. Lehman points out in his
-documentation that the \textsf{editor} field will be associated with a
-\textsf{title}, a \textsf{booktitle}, or a \textsf{maintitle},
-depending on the sort of entry. More specifically,
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago} associates the \textsf{editor} with the most
-comprehensive of those titles, that is, \textsf{maintitle} if there is
-one, otherwise \textsf{booktitle}, otherwise \textsf{title}, if the
-other two are lacking. In a large number of cases, this is exactly
-the correct behavior (adorno:benj, centinel:letters,
-plato:republic:gr, among others). Predictably, however, there are
-numerous cases that require, for example, an additional editor for one
-part of a collection or for one volume of a multi-volume work. For
-these cases I have provided the \textsf{namea} field. You should
-format names for this field as you would for \textsf{author} or
-\textsf{editor}, and these names will always be associated with the
-\textsf{title} (donne:var:15).
-
-\mylittlespace As you will see below, I have also provided a
-\textsf{nameb} field, which holds the translator of a given
-\textsf{title} (euripides:orestes). If \textsf{namea} and
-\textsf{nameb} are the same, \textsf{biblatex-chicago} will
-concatenate them, just as \textsf{biblatex} already does for
-\textsf{editor}, \textsf{translator}, and \textsf{namec} (i.e., the
-compiler). Furthermore, it is conceivable that a given entry will
-need separate editors for each of the three sorts of title. For this,
-and for various other tricky situations, there is the \cmd{partedit}
-macro (and its siblings), designed to be used in a \textsf{note}
-field, in one of the \textsf{titleaddon} fields, or even in a
-\textsf{number} field (howell:marriage). (Because the strings
-identifying an editor differ in notes and bibliography, one can't
-simply write them out in such a field when using the notes \&\
-bibliography style, but you can certainly do so in the author-date
-style, if you wish. Using the macros will make your .bib file more
-portable across both Chicago specifications, and also across multiple
-languages, but they are otherwise unnecessary.
-Cf. section~\ref{sec:international}, and also \textsf{namea},
-\textsf{nameb}, \textsf{namec}, and \textsf{translator}.)
-
-\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\textbf{editora\\editorb\\editorc}} newer
-releases of \textsf{biblatex} provide these fields as a means to
-specify additional contributors to texts in a number of editorial
-roles. In the Chicago styles they seem most relevant for the
-audiovisual types, especially \textsf{music} and \textsf{video}, where
-they help to identify conductors, directors, producers, and
-performers. To specify the role, use the fields \textsf{editoratype},
-\textsf{editorbtype}, and \textsf{editorctype}, which see. (Cf.\
-bernstein:shostakovich, handel:messiah:15.)
-
-\mybigspace Normally, \mymarginpar{\textbf{editortype}} with the
-exception of the \textsf{article} type,
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} will automatically find a name to
-put at the head of an entry, starting with an \textsf{author}, and
-proceeding in order through \textsf{editor}, \textsf{translator}, and
-\textsf{namec} (the compiler). If all four are missing, then the
-\textsf{title} will be placed at the head. (In \textsf{article}
-entries with a \texttt{magazine} \textsf{entrysubtype}, a missing
-author immediately prompts the use of \textsf{journaltitle} at the
-head of an entry. See above under \textsf{article} for details.) The
-\textsf{editortype} field provides even greater flexibility, allowing
-you to choose from a variety of editorial roles while only using the
-\textsf{editor} field. You can do this even though an author is named
-(eliot:pound shows this mechanism in action for a standard editor,
-rather than a compiler). Two things are necessary for this to happen.
-First, in the \textsf{options} field you need to set
-\texttt{useauthor=false} (if there is an \textsf{author)}, then you
-need to put the name you wish to see at the head of your entry into
-the \textsf{editor} or the \textsf{namea} field. If the
-\enquote{editor} is in fact a compiler, then you need to put
-\texttt{compiler} into the \textsf{editortype} field, and
-\textsf{biblatex} will print the correct string after the name in the
-list of references.
-
-\mylittlespace There are a few details of which you need to be aware.
-Because \textsf{biblatex-chicago} has added the \textsf{namea} field,
-which gives you the ability to identify the editor specifically of a
-\textsf{title} as opposed to a \textsf{maintitle} or a
-\textsf{booktitle}, the \textsf{editortype} mechanism checks first to
-see whether a \textsf{namea} is defined. If it is, that name will be
-used at the head of the entry, if it isn't it will go ahead and look
-for an \textsf{editor}. \textsf{Biblatex}'s sorting algorithms, and
-also its \textsf{labelname} mechanism, should both work properly no
-matter sort of name you provide, thanks to \textsf{Biber} and the
-(default) Chicago-specific definitions of \cmd{DeclareLabelname} and
-\cmd{DeclareSortingScheme}. (Cf.\ section~\ref{sec:authformopts},
-below). If, however, the \textsf{namea} field provides the name, and
-that name isn't automatically shortened properly by \textsf{biblatex},
-then your .bib entry will need to have a \textsf{shorteditor} defined
-to help with in-text citations, not a \textsf{shortauthor}, possibly
-ruled out because \texttt{useauthor=false}.
-
-\mylittlespace In \textsf{biblatex} 0.9 Lehman has reworked the string
-concatenation mechanism, for reasons he outlines in his RELEASE file,
-and I have followed his lead. In short, if you define the
-\textsf{editortype} field, then concatenation is turned off, even if
-the name of the \textsf{editor} matches, for example, that of the
-\textsf{translator}. In the absence of an \textsf{editortype}, the
-usual mechanisms remain in place, that is, if the \textsf{editor}
-exactly matches a \textsf{translator} and/or a \textsf{namec}, or
-alternatively if \textsf{namea} exactly matches a \textsf{nameb}
-and/or a \textsf{namec}, then \textsf{biblatex} will print the
-appropriate strings. The \emph{Manual} specifically (17.41)
-recommends not using these identifying strings in citations, and
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} follows that recommendation. If
-you nevertheless need to provide such a string, you'll have to do it
-manually in the \textsf{shorteditor} field, or perhaps, in a different
-sort of entry, in a \textsf{shortauthor} field.
-
-\mylittlespace It may also be worth noting that because of certain
-requirements in the specification -- absence of an \textsf{author},
-for example -- the \texttt{useauthor} mechanism won't work properly in
-the following entry types: \textsf{collection}, \textsf{letter},
-\textsf{patent}, \textsf{periodical}, \textsf{proceedings},
-\textsf{suppbook}, \textsf{suppcollection}, and
-\textsf{suppperiodical}.
-
-\mybigspace These
-\mymarginpar{\textbf{editoratype\\editorbtype\\editorctype}} fields
-identify the exact role of the person named in the corresponding
-\textsf{editor[a-c]} field. Note that they are not part of the string
-concatenation mechanism. I have implemented them just as the standard
-styles do, and they have now found a use particularly in
-\textsf{music} and \textsf{video} entries. Cf.\
-bernstein:shostakovich, handel:messiah:15.
-
-%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
-
-\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{eid}} \textsf{biblatex}
-field, providing a string or number some journals use uniquely to
-identify a particular article. Only applicable to the
-\textsf{article} entry type. Not typically required by the
-\emph{Manual}.
-
-\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{entrysubtype}} and very
-powerful \textsf{biblatex} field, left undefined by the standard
-styles. In \textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} it has five very
-specific uses, the first three of which I have designed in order to
-maintain, as much as possible, backward compatibility with the
-standard styles. First, in \textsf{article} and \textsf{periodical}
-entries, the field allows you to differentiate between scholarly
-\enquote{journals,} on the one hand, and \enquote{magazines} and
-\enquote{newspapers} on the other. Usage is fairly simple: you need
-to put the exact string \texttt{magazine} into the
-\textsf{entrysubtype} field if you are citing one of the latter two
-types of source, whereas if your source is a \enquote{journal,} then
-you need do nothing.
-
-\mylittlespace The second use involves references to works from
-classical antiquity and, according to the \emph{Manual}, from the
-Middle Ages, as well. When you cite such a work using the traditional
-divisions into books, sections, lines, etc., divisions which are
-presumed to be the same across all editions, then you need to put the
-exact string \texttt{classical} into the \textsf{entrysubtype} field.
-This has no effect in the list of references, which will still present
-the particular edition you are using, but it does affect the
-formatting of in-text citations, in two ways. First, it suppresses
-some of the punctuation. Second, and more importantly, it suppresses
-the \textsf{date} field in favor of the \textsf{title}, so that
-citations look like (Aristotle \emph{Metaphysics} 3.2.996b5--8)
-instead of (Aristotle 1997, 3.2.996b5--8). This mechanism may also
-prove useful in \textsf{misc} entries for citations from the Bible or
-other sacred texts (cf.\ genesis), and for citing archival collections
-(house:papers), where it produces citations of the form (House
-Papers). (Cf.\ the next but one paragraph.)
-
-\mylittlespace If you wish to reference a classical or medieval work
-by the page numbers of a particular, non-standard edition, then you
-shouldn't use the \texttt{classical} \textsf{entrysubtype} toggle.
-Also, and the specification isn't entirely clear about this, works
-from the Renaissance and later, even if cited by the traditional
-divisions, seem to have citations formatted normally, and therefore
-don't need an \textsf{entrysubtype} field. (See \emph{Manual}
-17.246--262; aristotle:metaphy:gr, plato:republic:gr;
-euripides:orestes is an example of a translation cited by page number
-in a modern edition.)
-
-\mylittlespace The third use of the \textsf{entrysubtype} field occurs
-in \textsf{misc} entries. If such an entry contains no such field,
-then the citation will be treated just as the standard
-\textsf{biblatex} styles would, including the use of italics for the
-\textsf{title}. Any string at all in \textsf{entrysubtype} tells
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago} to treat the source as part of an
-unpublished archive. Please see section~\ref{sec:types:authdate}
-above under \textbf{misc} for all the details on how these citations
-work.
-
-\mylittlespace Fourth, the field can be defined in the
-\textsf{artwork} entry type in order to refer to a work from antiquity
-whose title you do not wish to be italicized. Please see the
-documentation of \textsf{artwork} above for the details. Fifth, and
-finally, you can use the exact string \texttt{tv} to identify
-televisual material as a subset of the \textsf{video} entry type.
-This will only affect the entry in the list of references if you use
-\texttt{reprint} in the \textsf{pubstate} field in order to print
-the date a program was originally shown in parentheses at the end of
-such an entry. (It's a niche usage but it at least maintains
-consistency for the \texttt{reprint} mechanism. Cf.\
-\textsf{pubstate}, below.)
-
-\mybigspace Kazuo
-\colmarginpar{\textbf{eprint}\\\textbf{eprintclass}\\\textbf{eprinttype}}
-Teramoto suggested adding \textsf{biblatex's} excellent
-\textsf{eprint} handling to \textsf{biblatex-chicago}, and he sent me
-a patch implementing it. With minor alterations, I have applied it to
-this release, so these three fields now work more or less as they do
-in standard \textsf{biblatex}. They may prove helpful in providing
-more abbreviated references to online content than conventional URLs,
-though I can find no specific reference to them in the \emph{Manual}.
-
-\mybigspace This \colmarginpar{\textbf{eventdate}} is a standard
-\textsf{biblatex} field, added recently to the \textbf{music} entry
-type in case users need it to identify a particular recording session
-or concert. See the documentation of that type above. In the default
-configuration of \cmd{DeclareLabel\-year}, an entry missing a
-\textsf{date} will use the \textsf{eventdate} to find a year for the
-citation and list of references, though the rest of the field would in
-such a case be ignored in any entry other than \textsf{music}.
-
-\mybigspace As \mymarginpar{\textbf{foreword}} with the
-\textsf{afterword} field above, \textsf{foreword} will in general
-function as it does in standard \textsf{biblatex}. Like
-\textsf{afterword} (and \textsf{introduction}), however, it has a
-special meaning in a \textsf{suppbook} entry, where you simply need to
-define it somehow (and leave \textsf{afterword} and
-\textsf{introduction} undefined) to make a foreword the focus of a
-citation.
-
-\mybigspace A \mymarginpar{\textbf{holder}} standard \textsf{biblatex}
-field for identifying a \textsf{patent}'s holder(s), if they differ
-from the \textsf{author}. The \emph{Manual} has nothing to say on the
-subject, but \textsf{biblatex-chicago} prints it (them), in
-parentheses, just after the author(s).
-
-%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
-
-\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{howpublished}}
-\textsf{biblatex} field, mainly applicable in the \textsf{booklet}
-entry type, where it replaces the \textsf{publisher}. I have also
-retained it in the \textsf{misc} and \textsf{unpublished} entry types,
-for historical reasons, and either it or \textsf{pubstate} can be used
-in \textsf{music} entries to clarify publication details.
-
-\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{institution}}
-\textsf{biblatex} field. In the \textsf{thesis} entry type, it will
-usually identify the university for which the thesis was written,
-while in a \textsf{report} entry it may identify any sort of
-institution issuing the report.
-
-\mybigspace As \mymarginpar{\textbf{introduction}} with the
-\textsf{afterword} and \textsf{foreword} fields above,
-\textsf{introduction} will in general function as it does in standard
-\textsf{biblatex}. Like those fields, however, it has a special
-meaning in a \textsf{suppbook} entry, where you simply need to define
-it somehow (and leave \textsf{afterword} and \textsf{foreword}
-undefined) to make an introduction the focus of a citation.
-
-\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{isbn}} \textsf{biblatex}
-field, for providing the International Standard Book Number of a
-publication. Not typically required by the \emph{Manual}.
-
-\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{isrn}} \textsf{biblatex}
-field, for providing the International Standard Technical Report
-Number of a report. Only relevant to the \textsf{report} entry type,
-and not typically required by the \emph{Manual}.
-
-\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{issn}} \textsf{biblatex}
-field, for providing the International Standard Serial Number of a
-periodical in an \textsf{article} or a \textsf{periodical} entry. Not
-typically required by the \emph{Manual}.
-
-\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{issue}} \textsf{biblatex}
-field, designed for \textsf{article} or \textsf{periodical} entries
-identified by something like \enquote{Spring} or \enquote{Summer}
-rather than by the usual \textsf{month} or \textsf{number} fields
-(brown:bremer).
-
-\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\textbf{issuesubtitle}} subtitle for an
-\textsf{issuetitle} --- see next entry.
-
-\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{issuetitle}}
-\textsf{biblatex} field, intended to contain the title of a special
-issue of any sort of periodical. If the reference is to one article
-within the special issue, then this field should be used in an
-\textsf{article} entry (conley:fifthgrade), whereas if you are citing
-the entire issue as a whole, then it would go in a \textsf{periodical}
-entry, instead (good:wholeissue). The \textsf{note} field is the
-proper place to identify the type of issue, e.g.,\ \texttt{special
- issue}, with the initial letter lower-cased to enable automatic
-contextual capitalization.
-
-\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\textbf{journalsubtitle}} subtitle for a
-\textsf{journaltitle} --- see next entry.
-
-\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{journaltitle}}
-\textsf{biblatex} field, replacing the standard \textsc{Bib}\TeX\
-field \textsf{journal}, which, however, still works as an alias. It
-contains the name of any sort of periodical publication, and is found
-in the \textsf{article} entry type. In the case where a piece in an
-\textsf{article} (\textsf{entrysubtype} \texttt{magazine}) doesn't
-have an author, \textsf{biblatex-chicago} provides for this field to
-be used as the author. See above (section~\ref{sec:fields:authdate})
-under \textbf{article} for details. The lakeforester:pushcarts and
-nyt:trevorobit entries in \textsf{dates-test.bib} will give you some
-idea of how this works.
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{keywords}} field is
-\textsf{biblatex}'s extremely powerful and flexible technique for
-filtering entries in a list of references, allowing you to subdivide
-it according to just about any criteria you care to invent. See
-\textsf{biblatex.pdf} (3.10.4) for thorough documentation. In
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago}, the field provides one convenient means to
-exclude certain entries from making their way into a list of
-references, though the toggle \texttt{skipbib} in the \textsf{options}
-field works just as well, and perhaps more simply. There are a few
-reasons for so excluding entries. When citing both an original text
-and its translation (see \textbf{userf}, below), the \emph{Manual}
-(17.66) suggests including the original at the end of the
-translation's reference list entry, a procedure which requires that
-the original not also be printed as a separate entry
-(furet:passing:eng, furet:passing:fr, aristotle:metaphy:trans,
-aristotle:metaphy:gr). Well-known reference works (like the
-\emph{Encyclopaedia Britannica}, for example) and many sacred texts
-need only be presented in citations, and not in the list of references
-(17.238--239; ency:britannica, genesis, wikiped:bibtex; see
-\textsf{inreference} and \textsf{misc}, above).
-
-\mybigspace A \mymarginpar{\textbf{language}} standard
-\textsf{biblatex} field, designed to allow you to specify the
-language(s) in which a work is written. As a general rule, the
-Chicago style doesn't require you to provide this information, though
-it may well be useful for clarifying the nature of certain works, such
-as bilingual editions, for example. There is at least one situation,
-however, when the \emph{Manual} does specify this data, and that is
-when the title of a work is given in translation, even though no
-translation of the work has been published, something that might
-happen when a title is in a language deemed to be unparseable by a
-majority of your expected readership (17.65--67, 17.166, 17.177;
-chu:panda, pirumova, rozner:liberation). In such a case, you should
-provide the language(s) involved using this field, connecting multiple
-languages using the keyword \texttt{and}. (I have retained
-\textsf{biblatex's} \cmd{bibstring} mechanism here, which means that
-you can use the standard bibstrings or, if one doesn't exist for the
-language you need, just give the name of the language, capitalized as
-it should appear in your text. You can also mix these two modes
-inside one entry without apparent harm.)
-
-\mylittlespace An alternative arrangement suggested by the
-\emph{Manual} is to retain the original title of a piece but then to
-provide its translation, as well. If you choose this option, you'll
-need to make use of the \textbf{usere} field, on which see below. In
-effect, you'll probably only ever need to use one of these two fields
-in any given entry, and in fact \textsf{biblatex-chicago} will only
-print one of them if both are present, preferring \textsf{usere} over
-\textsf{language} for this purpose (see kern, pirumova:russian, and
-weresz). Note also that both of these fields are universally
-associated with the \textsf{title} of a work, rather than with a
-\textsf{booktitle} or a \textsf{maintitle}. If you need to attach a
-language or a translation to either of the latter two, you could
-probably manage it with special formatting inside those fields
-themselves.
-
-%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
-
-\mybigspace I \mymarginpar{\textbf{lista}} intend this field
-specifically for presenting citations from reference works that are
-arranged alphabetically, where the name of the article rather than a
-page or volume number should be given. The field is a
-\textsf{biblatex} list, which means you should separate multiple items
-with the keyword \texttt{and}. Each item receives its own set of
-quotation marks, and the whole list will be prefixed by the
-appropriate string (\enquote{s.v.,} \emph{sub verbo}, pl.\
-\enquote{s.vv.}). \textsf{Biblatex-chicago} will only print such a
-field in a \textsf{book} or an \textsf{inreference} entry, and you
-should look at the documentation of these entry types for further
-details. (See \emph{Manual} 17.238--239; grove:sibelius, times:guide,
-wikiped:bibtex.)
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{location}} is
-\textsf{biblatex}'s version of the usual \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ field
-\textsf{address}, though the latter is accepted as an alias if that
-simplifies the modification of older .bib files. According to the
-\emph{Manual} (17.99), a citation usually need only provide the first
-city listed on any title page, though a list of cities separated by
-the keyword \enquote{\texttt{and}} will be formatted appropriately.
-If the place of publication is unknown, you can use
-\cmd{autocap\{n\}.p.}\ instead (17.102), though in many or even most
-cases this isn't strictly necessary (17.32--34;
-virginia:plantation:15). For all cities, you should use the common
-English version of the name, if such exists (17.101).
-
-%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
-
-\mylittlespace One other use needs explanation here. In
-\textsf{article} and \textsf{periodical} entries, there is usually no
-need for a \textsf{location} field, but \enquote{if a journal might be
- confused with another with a similar title, or if it might not be
- known to the users of a bibliography,} then this field can present
-the place or institution where it is published (17.174, 17.196;
-garrett:15, kimluu:diethyl:15, and lakeforester:pushcarts).
-
-\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\textbf{mainsubtitle}} subtitle for a
-\textsf{maintitle} --- see next entry.
-
-\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\textbf{maintitle}} main title for a
-multi-volume work, e.g., \enquote{Opera} or \enquote{Collected Works.}
-It takes sentence-style capitalization in author-date. (See
-donne:var:15, euripides:\-orestes, harley:cartography, lach:asia,
-pelikan:chris\-tian, and plato:republic:gr.)
-
-\mybigspace An \mymarginpar{\textbf{maintitleaddon}} annex to the
-\textsf{maintitle}, for which see previous entry. Such an annex would
-be printed in the main text font. If your data begins with a word
-that would ordinarily only be capitalized at the beginning of a
-sentence, then simply ensure that that word is in lowercase, and
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago} will automatically do the right thing.
-
-\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{month}} \textsf{biblatex}
-field, containing the month of publication. This should be an
-integer, i.e., \texttt{month=\{3\}} not \texttt{month=\{March\}}. See
-\textsf{date} for more information.
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{namea}} is one of the fields
-\textsf{biblatex} provides for style writers to use, but which it
-leaves undefined itself. In \textsf{biblatex-chicago} it contains the
-name(s) of the editor(s) of a \textsf{title}, if the entry has a
-\textsf{booktitle} or \textsf{maintitle}, or both, in which situation
-the \textsf{editor} would be associated with one of these latter
-fields (donne:var:15). You should present names in this field exactly
-as you would those in an \textsf{author} or \textsf{editor} field, and
-the package will concatenate this field with \textsf{nameb} if they
-are identical. See under \textbf{editor} above for the full details.
-Cf.\ also \textsf{nameb}, \textsf{namec}, \textsf{translator}, and the
-macros \cmd{partedit}, \cmd{parttrans}, \cmd{parteditandtrans},
-\cmd{partcomp}, \cmd{parteditandcomp}, \cmd{parttransandcomp}, and
-\cmd{partedittransand\-comp}, for which see
-section~\ref{sec:formatting:authdate}.
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{nameaddon}} field is provided by
-\textsf{biblatex}, though not used by the standard styles. In
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago}, it allows you to specify that an author's
-name is a pseudo\-nym, or to provide either the real name or the
-pseudonym itself, if the other is being provided in the
-\textsf{author} field. The abbreviation
-\enquote{\texttt{pseud.}\hspace{-2pt}}\ (always lowercase in English)
-is specified, either on its own or after the pseudonym
-(centinel:letters, creasey:ashe:blast, creasey:morton:hide,
-creasey:york:death, and le\-carre:quest); \cmd{bibstring\{pseudonym\}}
-does the work for you. See under \textbf{author} above for the full
-details.
-
-\mylittlespace In the \textsf{customc} entry type, on the other hand,
-which is used to create alphabetized expansions of
-\textsf{shorthands}, the \textsf{nameaddon} field allows you to change
-the default string linking the two parts of the expansion. The code
-automatically tests for a known bibstring, which it will italicize.
-Otherwise, it prints the string as is.
-
-\mybigspace Like \mymarginpar{\textbf{nameb}} \textsf{namea}, above,
-this is a field left undefined by the standard \textsf{biblatex}
-styles. In \textsf{biblatex-chicago}, it contains the name(s) of the
-translator(s) of a \textsf{title}, if the entry has a
-\textsf{booktitle} or \textsf{maintitle}, or both, in which situation
-the \textsf{translator} would be associated with one of these latter
-fields (euripides:orestes). You should present names in this field
-exactly as you would those in an \textsf{author} or
-\textsf{translator} field, and the package will concatenate this field
-with \textsf{namea} if they are identical. See under the
-\textbf{translator} field below for the full details. Cf.\ also
-\textsf{namea}, \textsf{namec}, \textsf{origlanguage},
-\textsf{translator}, \textsf{userf} and the macros \cmd{partedit},
-\cmd{parttrans}, \cmd{parteditandtrans}, \cmd{partcomp},
-\cmd{parteditandcomp}, \cmd{parttransandcomp}, and
-\cmd{partedittransandcomp} in section~\ref{sec:formatting:authdate}.
-
-\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\textbf{namec}} \emph{Manual} (17.41)
-specifies that works without an author may be listed under an editor,
-translator, or compiler, assuming that one is available, and it also
-specifies the strings to be used with the name(s) of compiler(s). All
-this suggests that the \emph{Manual} considers this to be standard
-information that should be made available in a bibliographic
-reference, so I have added that possibility to the many that
-\textsf{biblatex} already provides, such as the \textsf{editor},
-\textsf{translator}, \textsf{commentator}, \textsf{annotator}, and
-\textsf{redactor}, along with writers of an \textsf{introduction},
-\textsf{foreword}, or \textsf{afterword}. Since \textsf{biblatex.bst}
-doesn't offer a \textsf{compiler} field, I have adopted for this
-purpose the otherwise unused field \textsf{namec}. It is important to
-understand that, despite the analogous name, this field does not
-function like \textsf{namea} or \textsf{nameb}, but rather like
-\textsf{editor} or \textsf{translator}, and therefore if used will be
-associated with whichever title field these latter two would be were
-they present in the same entry. Identical fields among these three
-will be concatenated by the package, and concatenated too with the
-(usually) unnecessary commentator, annotator and the rest. Also
-please note that I've arranged the concatenation algorithms to include
-\textsf{namec} in the same test as \textsf{namea} and \textsf{nameb},
-so in this particular circumstance you can, if needed, make
-\textsf{namec} analogous to these two latter, \textsf{title}-only
-fields. (See above under \textbf{editortype} for details of how you
-can use that field to identify a compiler.)
-
-\mylittlespace It might conceivably be necessary at some point to
-identify the compiler(s) of a \textsf{title} separate from the
-compiler(s) of a \textsf{booktitle} or \textsf{maintitle}, but for the
-moment I've run out of available \textsf{name} fields, so you'll have
-to fall back on the \cmd{partcomp} macro or the related
-\cmd{parteditandcomp}, \cmd{parttransandcomp}, and
-\cmd{partedittransandcomp}, on which see Commands
-(section~\ref{sec:formatting:authdate}) below. (Future releases may
-be able to remedy this.) It may be as well to mention here too that
-of the three names that can be substituted for the missing
-\textsf{author} at the head of an entry, \textsf{biblatex-chicago}
-will choose an \textsf{editor} if present, then a \textsf{translator}
-if present, falling back to \textsf{namec} only in the absence of the
-other two, and assuming that the fields aren't identical, and
-therefore to be concatenated. In a change from the previous behavior,
-these algorithms also now test for \textsf{namea} or \textsf{nameb},
-which will be used instead of \textsf{editor} and \textsf{translator},
-respectively, giving the package the greatest likelihood of finding a
-name to place at the head of an entry. \textsf{Biblatex}'s sorting
-algorithms, and also its \textsf{labelname} mechanism, should both
-work properly no matter sort of name you provide, thanks to
-\textsf{Biber} and the (default) Chicago-specific definitions of
-\cmd{DeclareLabelname} and \cmd{DeclareSortingScheme}. (Cf.\
-section~\ref{sec:authformopts}, below).
-
-\mybigspace As \mymarginpar{\textbf{note}} in standard
-\textsf{biblatex}, this field allows you to provide bibliographic data
-that doesn't easily fit into any other field. In this sense, it's
-very like \textsf{addendum}, but the information provided here will be
-printed just before the publication data. (See chaucer:alt,
-cook:sotweed, emerson:nature, and rodman:walk for examples of this
-usage in action.) It also has a specialized use in the periodical
-types (\textsf{article} and \textsf{periodical}), where it holds
-supplemental information about a \textsf{journaltitle}, such as
-\enquote{special issue} (conley:fifthgrade, good:wholeissue). In all
-uses, if your data begins with a word that would ordinarily only be
-capitalized at the beginning of a sentence, then simply ensure that
-that word is in lowercase, and \textsf{biblatex-chicago} will
-automatically do the right thing. Cf.\ \textsf{addendum}.
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{number}} is a standard
-\textsf{biblatex} field, containing the number of a
-\textsf{journaltitle} in an \textsf{article} entry, the number of a
-\textsf{title} in a \textsf{periodical} entry, or the volume/number of
-a book in a \textsf{series}. Generally, in an \textsf{article} or
-\textsf{periodical} entry, this will be a plain cardinal number, but
-in such entries \textsf{biblatex-chicago} now does the right thing if
-you have a list or range of numbers (unsigned:ranke). In any
-\textsf{book}-like entry it may well contain considerably more
-information, including even a reference to \enquote{2nd ser.,} for
-example, while the \textsf{series} field in such an entry will contain
-the name of the series, rather than a number. This field is also the
-place for the patent number in a \textsf{patent} entry. Cf.\
-\textsf{issue} and \textsf{series}. (See \emph{Manual} 17.90--95 and
-boxer:china, palmatary:pottery, wauchope:ceramics; 17.163 and
-beattie:crime, conley:fifthgrade, friedman:learning, garrett:15,
-gibbard:15, hlatky:hrt, mcmillen:antebellum, rozner:liberation,
-warr:ellison.)
-
-\mylittlespace \textbf{NB}: This may be an opportune place to point
-out that the \emph{Manual} (17.129) prefers arabic to roman numerals
-in most circumstances (chapters, volumes, series numbers, etc.), even
-when such numbers might be roman in the work cited. The obvious
-exception is page numbers, in which roman numerals indicate that the
-citation came from the front matter, and should therefore be retained.
-Another possible exception is in references to works \enquote{with
- many and complex divisions,} in which \enquote{a mixture of roman
- and arabic} may be \enquote{easier to disentangle.}
-
-\mybigspace A \mymarginpar{\textbf{options}} standard
-\textsf{biblatex} field, for setting certain options on a per-entry
-basis rather than globally. Information about some of the more common
-options may be found above under \textsf{author} and \textsf{date},
-and below in section~\ref{sec:authuseropts}. See creel:house,
-eliot:pound, emerson:nature, ency:britannica, herwign:office,
-lecarre:quest, and maitland:canon for examples of the field in use.
-
-% \enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
-
-\mybigspace A \mymarginpar{\textbf{organization}} standard
-\textsf{biblatex} field, retained mainly for use in the \textsf{misc},
-\textsf{online}, and \textsf{manual} entry types, where it may be of
-use to specify a publishing body that might not easily fit in other
-categories. In \textsf{biblatex}, it is also used to identify the
-organization sponsoring a conference in a \textsf{proceedings} or
-\textsf{inproceedings} entry, and I have retained this as a
-possibility, though the \emph{Manual} is silent on the matter.
-
-\mybigspace This \colmarginpar{\textbf{origdate}} is a standard
-\textsf{biblatex} field which replaced the obsolete \textsf{origyear},
-and which therefore allows more than one full date specification for
-those references which need to provide more than just one. As with
-the analogous \textsf{date} field, you provide the date (or range of
-dates) in \textsc{iso}8601 format, i.e., \texttt{yyyy-mm-dd}. In most
-entry types, you would use \textsf{origdate} to provide the date of
-first publication of a work, most usually needed only in the case of
-reprint editions, but also recommended by the \emph{Manual} for
-electronic editions of older works (17.123, 17.146--7;
-aristotle:metaphy:gr, emerson:nature, james:ambassadors,
-schweitzer:bach). In both the \textsf{letter} and \textsf{misc} (with
-\textsf{entrysubtype)} entry types, the \textsf{origdate} identifies
-when a letter (or similar) was written. In such \textsf{misc}
-entries, some \enquote{non-letter-like} materials (like interviews)
-need the \textsf{date} field for this purpose, while in
-\textsf{letter} entries the \textsf{date} applies to the publication
-of the whole collection. If such a published collection were itself a
-reprint, judicious use of the \textsf{pubstate} field or perhaps
-improvisation in the \textsf{location} field might be able to rescue
-the situation. (See white:ross:memo, white:russ, and white:total for
-how \textsf{letter} entries can work; creel:house shows the field in
-action in a \textsf{misc} entry, while spock:interview uses
-\textsf{date} instead.)
-
-\mylittlespace Because of the importance of date specifications in the
-author-date style, \textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} provides a
-series of options and automated behaviors to allow you to emphasize
-the \textsf{origdate} in citations and at the head of entries in the
-list of references. In entries which have \emph{only} an
-\textsf{origdate} --- usually \textsf{misc} with an
-\textsf{entrysubtype} --- \textsf{Biber} and the default
-\cmd{DeclareLabelyear} configuration now make it possible to do
-without a \texttt{cmsdate} option, as the \textsf{origdate} will
-automatically appear where and as it should. In entries with both
-dates you have a choice of which appears where. In some cases it may
-even be necessary to reverse the two date fields, putting the earlier
-year in \textsf{date} and the later in \textsf{origdate}. Please see
-above under \textbf{date} for all the details on how these options
-interact.
-
-\mylittlespace Because the \textsf{origdate} field only accepts
-numbers, some improvisation may be needed if you wish to include
-\enquote{n.d.}\ (\cmd{bibstring\{nodate\}}) in an entry. In
-\textsf{letter} and \textsf{misc}, this information can be placed in
-\textsf{titleaddon}, but in other entry types you may need to use the
-\textsf{location} field.
-
-%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
-
-\mybigspace In \mymarginpar{\textbf{origlanguage}} keeping with the
-\emph{Manual}'s specifications, I have fairly thoroughly redefined
-\textsf{biblatex}'s facilities for treating translations. The
-\textsf{origtitle} field isn't used, while the \textsf{language} and
-\textsf{origdate} fields have been press-ganged for other duties. The
-\textsf{origlanguage} field, for its part, retains a dual role in
-presenting translations in a list of references. The details of the
-\emph{Manual}'s suggested treatment when both a translation and an
-original are cited may be found below under \textbf{userf}. Here,
-however, I simply note that the introductory string used to connect
-the translation's citation with the original's is \enquote{Originally
- published as,} which I suggest may well be inaccurate in a great
-many cases, as for instance when citing a work from classical
-antiquity, which will most certainly not \enquote{originally} have
-been published in the Loeb Classical Library. Although not, strictly
-speaking, authorized by the \emph{Manual}, I have provided another way
-to introduce the original text, using the \textsf{origlanguage} field,
-which must be provided \emph{in the entry for the translation, not the
- original text} (aristotle:metaphy:trans). If you put one of the
-standard \textsf{biblatex} bibstrings there (enumerated below), then
-the entry will work properly across multiple languages. Otherwise,
-just put the name of the language there, localized as necessary, and
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago} will eschew \enquote{Originally published
- as} in favor of, e.g., \enquote{Greek edition:} or \enquote{French
- edition:}. This has no effect in citations, where only the work
-cited --- original or translation --- will be printed, but it may help
-to make the \emph{Manual}'s suggestions for the list of references
-more palatable.
-
-\mylittlespace That was the first usage, in keeping at least with the
-spirit of the \emph{Manual}. I have also, perhaps less in keeping
-with that specification, retained some of \textsf{biblatex}'s
-functionality for this field. If an entry doesn't have a
-\textsf{userf} field, and therefore won't be combining a text and its
-translation in the list of references, you can also use
-\textsf{origlanguage} as Lehman intended it, so that instead of
-saying, e.g., \enquote{translated by X,} the entry will read
-\enquote{translated from the German by X.} The \emph{Manual} doesn't
-mention this, but it may conceivably help avoid certain ambiguities in
-some citations. As in \textsf{biblatex}, if you wish to use this
-functionality, you have to provide \emph{not} the name of the
-language, but rather a bibstring, which may, at the time of writing,
-be one of \texttt{american}, \texttt{brazilian}, \texttt{danish},
-\texttt{dutch}, \texttt{english}, \texttt{french}, \texttt{german},
-\texttt{greek}, \texttt{italian}, \texttt{latin}, \texttt{norwegian},
-\texttt{portuguese}, \texttt{spanish}, or \texttt{swedish}, to which
-I've added \texttt{russian}.
-
-%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
-
-\mybigspace At \colmarginpar{\textbf{origlocation}} least one notes
-\&\ bibliography example in the \emph{Manual} provides a more complete
-specification of a reprinted book's original publication details than
-has been possible using previous releases of \textsf{biblatex-chicago}
-(17.123). It seems reasonable to include this in the author-date
-style, as well, so starting with this release, you can provide both an
-\textsf{origlocation} and an \textsf{origpublisher} to go along with
-the \textsf{origdate}, should you so wish, and all of this information
-will be printed in the reference list. You can now also use this
-field in a \textsf{letter} or \textsf{misc} (with
-\textsf{entrysubtype}) entry to give the place where a published or
-unpublished letter was written (17.76). (Jonathan Robinson has
-suggested that the \textsf{origlocation} may in some circumstances
-actually be necessary for disambiguation, his example being early
-printed editions of the same material printed in the same year but in
-different cities. The new functionality should make this simple to
-achieve. Cf.\ \textsf{origdate}, \textsf{origpublisher} and
-\textsf{pubstate}; schweitzer:bach.)
-
-\mybigspace As \colmarginpar{\textbf{origpublisher}} with the
-\textsf{origlocation} field just above, this new field allows you to
-provide fuller original publication details for reprinted books. You
-can now provide an \textsf{origpublisher} and/or an
-\textsf{origlocation} in addition to the \textsf{origdate}, and all
-will be presented in long notes and bibliography. (Cf.\
-\textsf{origdate}, \textsf{origlocation}, and \textsf{pubstate};
-schweitzer:bach.)
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{origyear}} field is, as of
-\textsf{biblatex} 0.9, obsolete. It is ignored if it appears in a
-.bib file. Please use \textsf{origdate} instead.
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{pages}} is the standard
-\textsf{biblatex} field for providing page references. In many
-\textsf{article} entries you'll find this contains something other
-than a page number, e.g. a section name or edition specification
-(17.188, 17.191, 17.202; kozinn:review, nyt:trevorobit). Of course,
-the same may be true of almost any sort of entry, though perhaps with
-less frequency. Curious readers may wish to look at brown:bremer
-(17.172) for an example of a \textsf{pages} field used to facilitate
-reference to a two-part journal article. Cf.\ \textsf{number} for
-more information on the \emph{Manual}'s preferences regarding the
-formatting of numerals; \textsf{bookpagination} and
-\textsf{pagination} provide details about \textsf{biblatex's}
-mechanisms for specifying what sort of division a given \textsf{pages}
-field contains; and \textsf{usera} discusses a different way to
-present the section information pertaining to a newspaper article.
-
-\mybigspace This, \mymarginpar{\textbf{pagination}} a standard
-\textsf{biblatex} field, allows you automatically to prefix the
-appropriate identifying string to information you provide in the
-\textsf{postnote} field of a citation command, whereas
-\textsf{bookpagination} allows you to prefix a string to the
-\textsf{pages} field. Please see \textbf{bookpagination} above for
-all the details on this functionality, as aside from the difference
-just mentioned the two fields are equivalent.
-
-\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{part}} \textsf{biblatex}
-field, which identifies physical parts of a single logical volume in
-\textsf{book}-like entries, not in periodicals. It has the same
-purpose in \textsf{biblatex-chicago}, but because the \emph{Manual}
-(17.88) calls such a thing a \enquote{book} and not a \enquote{part,}
-the string printed in the list of references will, at least in
-English, be \enquote{\texttt{bk.}\hspace{-2pt}}\ instead of the plain
-dot between volume number and part number (harley:cartography,
-lach:asia). This field should only be used in association with a
-\textsf{volume} number, so if you need to identify \enquote{parts} or
-\enquote{books} that are part of a published \textsf{series}, for
-example, then you'll need to use a different field, (which in the case
-of a series would be \textsf{number} [palmatary:pottery]). Cf.\
-\textsf{volume}; iso:electrodoc:15.
-
-\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{publisher}}
-\textsf{biblatex} field. Remember that \enquote{\texttt{and}} is a
-keyword for connecting multiple publishers, so if a publisher's name
-contains \enquote{and,} then you should either use the ampersand (\&)
-or enclose the whole name in additional braces. (See \emph{Manual}
-17.103--114; aristotle:metaphy:gr, cohen:schiff, creasey:ashe:blast,
-dunn:revolutions.)
-
-\mylittlespace There are, as one might expect, a couple of further
-subtleties involved here. Ordinarily, two publishers will be
-separated by a forward slash in the list of references, but if a
-company issues \enquote{certain books through a special publishing
- division or under a special imprint,} then the two names will be
-separated by a comma, which you will need to provide in the
-\textsf{publisher} field. The \emph{Manual}'s example (17.112) is
-\enquote{\texttt{Ohio University Press, Swallow Press},} which would
-cause \textsf{biblatex-chicago} no problems. If a book has two
-co-publishers, \enquote{usually in different countries,} (17.113) then
-the simplest thing to do is to choose one, probably the nearest one
-geographically. If you feel it necessary to include both, then
-levistrauss:savage demonstrates one way of doing so, using a
-combination of the \textsf{publisher} and \textsf{location} fields.
-Finally, if the publisher is unknown, then the \emph{Manual}
-recommends (17.109) simply using the place (if known) and the date.
-If for some reason you need to indicate the absence of a publisher,
-the abbreviation given by the \emph{Manual} is \texttt{n.p.}, though
-this can also stand for \enquote{no place.} Some style guides
-apparently suggest using \texttt{s.n.}\,(= \emph{sine nomine}) to
-specify the lack of a publisher, but the \emph{Manual} doesn't mention
-this.
-
-\mybigspace A \mymarginpar{\textbf{pubstate}} standard
-\textsf{biblatex} field, new to version 0.9. Because the author-date
-specification has fairly complicated rules about presenting reprinted
-editions, I have adopted this field as a means of simplifying the
-problem for users. Instead of hand-formatting in the
-\textsf{location} field, you can now simply put the string
-\texttt{reprint} into the \textsf{pubstate} field, and depending on
-which date you have chosen to appear at the head of the entry,
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} will either print the (localized)
-string \texttt{Repr.}\ in the proper place or otherwise provide a
-parenthesized notice at the end of the entry detailing the original
-publication date. See under \textbf{date} above for the available
-permutations. (Cf.\ aristotle:metaphy:gr, maitland:canon,
-maitland:equity, schweitzer:bach.) If the field contains something
-other than the word \texttt{reprint}, then it will be treated as in
-the standard styles, and printed after the publication information.
-In \textsf{music} entries, its literal contents will always be printed
-as part of the publication data.
-
-\mybigspace I \mymarginpar{\textbf{redactor}} have implemented this
-field just as \textsf{biblatex}'s standard styles do, even though the
-\emph{Manual} doesn't actually mention it. It may be useful for some
-purposes. Cf.\ \textsf{annotator} and \textsf{commentator}.
-
-\mybigspace \textbf{NB:} \mymarginpar{\textbf{reprinttitle}}
-\textbf{Please note that this feature is in an alpha state, and that
- I'm contemplating using a different field in the future for this
- functionality. I include it here in the hope that it might receive
- some testing in the meantime.} At the request of Will Small, I have
-included a means of providing the original publication details of an
-essay or a chapter that you are citing from a subsequent reprint,
-e.g., a \emph{Collected Essays} volume. In such a case, at least
-according to the \emph{Manual} (17.73), such details need be provided
-only if they are \enquote{of particular interest.} The data would
-follow an introductory phrase like \enquote{originally published as,}
-making the problem strictly parallel to that of including details of a
-work in the original language alongside the details of its
-translation. I have addressed the latter problem with the
-\textsf{userf} field, which provides a sort of cross-referencing
-method for this purpose, and \textsf{reprinttitle} works in
-\emph{exactly} the same way. In the .bib entry for the reprint you
-include a cross-reference to the cite key of the original location
-using the \textsf{reprinttitle} field (which it may help mnemonically
-to think of as a \enquote{reprinted title} field). The main
-difference between the two forms is that \textsf{userf} prints all but
-the \textsf{author} of the original work, whereas
-\textsf{reprinttitle} suppresses both the \textsf{author} and the
-\textsf{title} of the original, giving only the more general details,
-beginning with, e.g., the \textsf{journaltitle} or \textsf{booktitle}
-and continuing from there. The string prefacing this information will
-be \enquote{Orig.\ pub.\ in.} Please see the documentation on
-\textsf{userf} below for all the details on how to create .bib entries
-for presenting your data.
-
-%\enlargethispage{-\baselineskip}
-
-\mybigspace A \mymarginpar{\textbf{series}} standard \textsf{biblatex}
-field, usually just a number in an \textsf{article},
-\textsf{periodical}, or \textsf{review} entry, almost always the name
-of a publication series in \textsf{book}-like entries. If you need to
-attach further information to the \textsf{series} name in a
-\textsf{book}-like entry, then the \textsf{number} field is the place
-for it, whether it be a volume, a number, or even something like
-\enquote{2nd ser.} or \enquote{\cmd{bibstring\{oldseries\}}.} Of
-course, you can also use \cmd{bibstring\{oldseries\}} or
-\cmd{bibstring\{newseries\}} in an \textsf{article} entry, but there
-you would place it in the \textsf{series} field itself. (In fact, the
-\textsf{series} field in \textsf{article} and \textsf{periodical}
-entries is one of the places where \textsf{biblatex} allows you just
-to use the plain bibstring \texttt{oldseries}, for example, rather
-than making you type \cmd{bibstring\{oldseries\}}. The \textsf{type}
-field in \textsf{manual}, \textsf{patent}, \textsf{report}, and
-\textsf{thesis} entries also has this auto-detection mechanism in
-place; see the discussion of \cmd{bibstring} below for details.) In
-whatever entry type, these bibstrings produce the required
-abbreviation. (For books and similar entries, see \emph{Manual}
-17.90--95; boxer:china, browning:aurora, palmatary:pottery,
-plato:republic:gr, wauchope:ceramics; for periodicals, see 17.178;
-garaud:gatine, sewall:letter.) Cf.\ \textsf{number} for more
-information on the \emph{Manual}'s preferences regarding the
-formatting of numerals.
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{shortauthor}} is a standard
-\textsf{biblatex} field, but \textsf{biblatex-chicago} makes
-considerably grea\-ter use of it than the standard styles. For the
-purposes of the author-date specification, the field provides the name
-to be used in text citations. In the vast majority of cases, you
-don't need to specify it, because the \textsf{biblatex} system selects
-the author's last name from the \textsf{author} field and uses it in
-such a reference, and if there is no \textsf{author} it will search
-\textsf{namea}, \textsf{editor}, \textsf{nameb}, \textsf{translator},
-and \textsf{namec}, in that order. The current versions of
-\textsf{biblatex} and \textsf{biber} will now automatically
-alphabetize by any of these names if they appear at the head of an
-entry. If, in an author-less \textsf{article} entry
-(\textsf{entrysubtype} \texttt{magazine}), you allow
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago} to use the title of the periodical as the
-author --- the default behavior --- then your \textsf{shortauthor}
-field can optionally contain an abbreviated form of the periodical
-name, formatted appropriately, which usually means something like
-\enquote{\cmd{mkbibemph\{Abbrev.\ Period.\ Title\}}} (gourmet:052006,
-lakeforester:pushcarts, nyt:trevorobit, unsigned:ranke). Indeed, with
-long, institutional authors, a shortened version in
-\textsf{shortauthor} may save space in the running text
-(cotton:manufacture, evanston:library). See just below under
-\textbf{shorthand} for another method of saving space.
-
-\mylittlespace As mentioned under \textsf{editortype}, the
-\emph{Manual} (17.41) recommends against providing the identifying
-string (e.g., ed.\ or trans.)\ in text citations, and
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago} follows their recommendation. If you need
-to provide these strings in such a citation, then you'll have to do so
-by hand in the \textsf{shortauthor} field, or in the
-\textsf{shorteditor} field, whichever you are using.
-
-\mybigspace Like \mymarginpar{\textbf{shorteditor}}
-\textsf{shortauthor}, a field to provide a name for a text citation,
-in this case for, e.g., a \textsf{collection} entry that typically
-lacks an author. The \textsf{shortauthor} field works just as well in
-most situations, but if you have set \texttt{useauthor=false} (and not
-\texttt{useeditor=false}) in an entry's \textsf{options} field, then
-only \textsf{shorteditor} will be recognized. Cf.\
-\textsf{editortype}, above.
-
-%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{shorthand}} is
-\textsf{biblatex}'s mechanism for using abbreviations in citations.
-For \textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} I have modified it somewhat
-to conform to the needs of the specification, though there is a
-package option to revert the behavior to something closer to the
-\textsf{biblatex} standard --- see under \texttt{cmslos} in
-section~\ref{sec:authpreset}. The main problem when presenting
-readers with an abbreviation is to ensure that they know how to expand
-it. In the notes \&\ bibliography style this is accomplished with a
-notice in the first footnote citing a given work, which explains that
-henceforth the abbreviation will be used instead, and also, if needed,
-with a list of shorthands that summarizes all the abbreviations used
-in a particular text. The first part of this system isn't available
-in the author-date style of citation, and indeed these citations are
-in themselves already highly-abbreviated keys to the fuller
-information to be found in the list of references. There are cases,
-however, particularly when institutions or \textsf{journaltitles}
-appear as authors, when you may feel the need to provide a shortened
-version for citations. I have already discussed one option available
-to you just above (cf.\ \textbf{shortauthor}), but for this to work
-the abbreviation must either be instantly recognizable to your
-readership or at least easily parseable by them.
-
-\mylittlespace The \emph{Manual's} suggestion, particularly when
-\enquote{long names are cited several times} (17.47), is to provide an
-abbreviation which is then explained by an alphabetized
-cross-refer\-ence inside the list of references itself. In this
-release of \textsf{biblatex-chicago}, I have reclaimed one of the
-custom entry types (\textbf{customc}) to implement exactly this
-system. See the explanation of this entry type above, but basically
-you can put the abbreviation itself in the \textsf{author} field and
-its expansion in the \textsf{title} field, then use either
-\cmd{nocite} or a \textsf{userc} field to ensure the entry appears in
-the list of references. (Cf.\ abbrev:BSI, abbrev:ISO,
-bsi:abbreviation:15, iso:electrodoc:15.)
-
-\mylittlespace The author-date style will still automatically print
-the cross-reference in the list of shorthands too, as in standard
-\textsf{biblatex}, if the \cmd{printshorthands} command appears in
-your document. You can place \texttt{skiplos} in the \textsf{options}
-field to exclude a particular entry from the list of shorthands if you
-do decide to print that list, giving maximum flexibility. Indeed,
-\colmarginpar{New!} for this release, I have provided two new options
-to add to this flexibility. First, I have included two new
-\texttt{bibenvironments} for use with the \texttt{env} option to the
-\cmd{printshorthands} command: \mycolor{\texttt{losnotes}} is designed
-to allow a list of shorthands to appear inside footnotes, while
-\mycolor{\texttt{losendnotes}} does the same for endnotes. Their main
-effect is to change the font size, and in the latter case to clear up
-some spurious punctuation and white space that I see on my system when
-using endnotes. (You'll probably also want to use the option
-\texttt{heading=none} in order to get rid of the [oversized] default,
-providing your own within the \cmd{footnote} command.) Second, I have
-provided a new package option, \mycolor{\texttt{shorthandfull}}, which
-prints entries in the list of shorthands which contain full
-bibliographical information, effectively allowing you to eschew the
-list of references in favor of a fortified shorthand list. This
-option will only work if used in tandem with \texttt{cmslos=false}, as
-the whole functionality seems to me closely related to the more
-standard ways of presenting shorthands. (See 16.39--40, and also
-\textsf{biblatex.pdf} for more information.)
-
-%\enlargethispage{-\baselineskip}
-
-\mylittlespace As I mentioned above under \textbf{crossref}, extra
-care is needed when using shorthands with cross-references, and I
-would avoid them in all parent entries, at least in the current state
-of \textsf{biblatex-chicago}.
-
-\mybigspace A \mymarginpar{\textbf{shorttitle}} standard
-\textsf{biblatex} field, primarily used to provide an abbreviated
-title for citation styles that need one. In
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} such a field will be necessary
-only very rarely (unlike in the notes \&\ bibliography style), and is
-most likely to turn up in \textsf{inreference} or \textsf{reference}
-entries (where the \textsf{title} takes the place of the
-\textsf{author}), or in any sort of entry with a \texttt{classical}
-\textsf{entrysubtype}. This latter toggle makes citations use
-\textsf{author} and \textsf{title} instead of \textsf{author} and
-\textsf{year}, and if an abbreviated version of that title would save
-space in your running text this is the field where you can provide it.
-(Cf.\ ency:britannica, grove:sibelius, aristotle:metaphy:gr.)
-
-\mybigspace A \mymarginpar{\textbf{sortkey}} standard
-\textsf{biblatex} field, designed to allow you to specify how you want
-an entry alphabetized in a list of references. In general, if an
-entry doesn't turn up where you expect or want it, this field should
-provide the solution. More particularly, entries with a corporate
-author beginning with the definite or indefinite article will usually
-require your assistance in this way (cotton:manufacture,
-grove:sibelius). The default settings of \cmd{DeclareSortingScheme}
-now include the three supplemental name fields (\textsf{name[a-c]})
-and also the \textsf{journaltitle} in the sorting algorithm, so you
-should find these algorithms needing less help than before. There may
-be circumstances --- several reprinted books by the same author, for
-example --- when the \textbf{sortyear} field is more appropriate, on
-which see below. Lehman also provides \textbf{sortname} and
-\textbf{sorttitle} for equally fine-grained control. Please consult
-\textsf{biblatex.pdf} for the details.
-
-\mybigspace A \mymarginpar{\textbf{sortyear}} standard
-\textsf{biblatex} field, provided by Lehman for more fine-grained
-control over the sorting of entries in a list of references, and
-possibly useful in \textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} to help
-present several reprinted books by the same author. See
-\textsf{sortkey} above and maitland:equity.
-
-\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\textbf{subtitle}} subtitle for a
-\textsf{title} --- see next entry.
-
-%\enlargethispage{-\baselineskip}
-
-\mybigspace In \mymarginpar{\textbf{title}} the vast majority of
-cases, this field works just as it always has in \textsc{Bib}\TeX, and
-just as it does in \textsf{biblatex}. Nearly every entry for the
-author-date specification will have such a field, any exceptions
-likely stemming from the need to re-use a database for the notes \&\
-bibliography style. Aside from this, the main source of difficulties
-flows from the \emph{Manual}'s rules for formatting \textsf{titles},
-rules which also hold for \textsf{booktitles} and \textsf{maintitles}.
-The whole point of using a \textsc{Bib}\TeX-based system is for it to
-do the formatting for you, and in most cases
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} does just that, capitalizing them
-sentence-style, italicizing them, and sometimes both. There are two
-situations that require user intervention. First, in titles that take
-sentence-style capitalization, you need, as always in traditional
-\textsc{Bib}\TeX, to assist the algorithms by placing anything that
-needs to remain capitalized within an extra pair of curly braces.
-Second, when a title is quoted within a title, you need to know some
-of the rules of the Chicago style. A summary here should serve to
-clarify them, and help you to understand when
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} might need your help in order to
-comply with them.
-
-\mylittlespace With regard to sentence-style capitalization, the rules
-of the Chicago author-date style are fairly simple:
-
-\begin{description}
-\item[\qquad Headline Style:] \textsf{journaltitle} in all types,
- \textsf{series} in all \textsf{book}-like entries (i.e., not in
- \textsf{articles}), and \textsf{title} in \textsf{periodical}
- entries.
-\item[\qquad Sentence Style:] Every other \textsf{title},
- \emph{except} in \textsf{letter} entries and in \textsf{misc}
- entries with an \textsf{entrysubtype}. Also, the
- \textsf{booktitle}, \textsf{issuetitle}, and \textsf{maintitle} in
- all entry types.
-\item[\qquad Contextual Capitalization of First Word:]
- \textsf{titleaddon}, \textsf{booktitleaddon},
- \textsf{maintitleaddon} in all entry types, and the \textsf{title}
- of \textsf{misc} entries with an \textsf{entrysubtype}.
-\item[\qquad Plain:] \textsf{title} in \textsf{letter} entries.
-\end{description}
-
-What this means in practice is that to get a title like \emph{The
- Chicago manual of style}, your .bib entry needs to have a field that
-looks something like this:
-\begin{quote}
- \texttt{title = \{The \{Chicago\} Manual of Style\}}
-\end{quote}
-
-This is completely straightforward, but remember that if an
-\textsf{article} has a title like: Review of \emph{The Chicago manual
- of style}, then the curly braces enclosing material to be formatted
-in italics will cause the capitalization algorithm to stop and leave
-all of that material as it is, so your .bib entry would need to have a
-field something like this:
-
-\begin{quote}
- \texttt{title = \{}\cmd{bibstring\{reviewof\}} \cmd{mkbibemph\{The
- Chicago manual of style\}\}}
-\end{quote}
-
-(As an aside, the use of the \texttt{reviewof} bibstring isn't
-strictly necessary here, but it helps with portability across
-languages and across the two Chicago styles. If you've noticed a lot
-of lowercase letters starting fields in \textsf{dates-test.bib},
-they're present because in the notes \&\ bibliography style
-capitalization is complicated by notes using commas where the
-bibliography uses periods, and words like \enquote{review} start in
-uppercase only if the context demands it. There's considerably less
-of this in the author-date style [note the \textsf{*titleaddon}
-fields], but it still pays to be aware of the issue.)
-
-\mylittlespace With regard to italics, the rules of
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} are as follows:
-
-\begin{description}
-\item[\qquad Italics:] \textsf{booktitle}, \textsf{maintitle}, and
- \textsf{journaltitle} in all entry types; \textsf{title} of
- \textsf{artwork}, \textsf{book}, \textsf{bookinbook},
- \textsf{booklet}, \textsf{collection}, \textsf{inbook},
- \textsf{manual}, \textsf{misc} (with no \textsf{entrysubtype}),
- \textsf{periodical}, \textsf{proceedings}, \textsf{report},
- \textsf{suppbook}, and \textsf{suppcollection} entry types.
-\item[\qquad Main Text Font (Roman):] \textsf{title} of
- \textsf{article}, \textsf{image}, \textsf{incollection},
- \textsf{inproceedings}, \textsf{letter}, \textsf{misc} (with an
- \textsf{entrysubtype}), \textsf{online}, \textsf{patent},
- \textsf{periodical}, \textsf{suppperiodical}, \textsf{thesis}, and
- \textsf{unpublished} entry types, \textsf{issuetitle} in
- \textsf{article} and \textsf{periodical} entry types.
- \textsf{booktitleaddon}, \textsf{maintitleaddon}, and
- \textsf{titleaddon} in all entry types.
-\item[\qquad Italics or Roman:] All of the audiovisual entry types ---
- \textsf{audio}, \textsf{music}, and \textsf{video} --- have to serve
- as analogues both to \textsf{book} and to \textsf{inbook}.
- Therefore, if there is both a \textsf{title} and a
- \textsf{booktitle}, then the \textsf{title} will be in the main text
- font. If there is no \textsf{booktitle}, then the \textsf{title}
- will be italicized.
-\end{description}
-
-Now, the rules for which entry type to use for which sort of work tend
-to be fairly straightforward, but in cases of doubt you can consult
-section~\ref{sec:types:authdate} above, the examples in
-\textsf{dates-test.bib}, or go to the \emph{Manual} itself,
-8.164--210. Assuming, then, that you want to present a title within a
-title, and you know what sort of formatting each of the two would, on
-its own, require, then the following rules apply:
-
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item Inside an italicized title, all other titles are enclosed in
- quotation marks and italicized, so in such cases all you need to do
- is provide the quotation marks using \cmd{mkbibquote}, which will
- take care of any following punctuation that needs to be brought
- within the closing quotation mark(s) (17.58; donne:var:15,
- mchugh:wake:15).
-\item Inside a plain-text title, you should present another title as
- it would appear if it were on its own, so in such cases you'll need
- to do the formatting yourself, using \cmd{mkbibemph} or
- \cmd{mkbibquote}. (See 17.157; barcott:review:15, garrett:15,
- gibbard:15, loften:hamlet, loomis:structure:15, murphy:silent:15,
- osborne:poi\-son, ratliff:review:15, unsigned:ranke,
- white:\\callimachus.)
-\end{enumerate}
-
-\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
-
-The \emph{Manual} provides a few more rules, as well. A word normally
-italicized in text should also be italicized in a plain-text title,
-but should be in roman (\enquote{reverse italics}) in an italicized
-title. A quotation used as a (whole) title (with or without a
-subtitle) retains its quotation marks when it is plain, but loses them
-when it is italicized (17.60, 17.157; lewis:15). A word or phrase in
-quotation marks, but that isn't a quotation, retains those marks in
-all title types (kimluu:diethyl:15).
-
-\mylittlespace Finally, please note that in all \textsf{review} (and
-\textsf{suppperiodical}) entries (if you happen to be using those),
-and in \textsf{misc} entries with an \textsf{entrysubtype}, and only
-in those entries, \textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} will
-automatically capitalize the first word of the \textsf{title} after
-sentence-ending punctuation, assuming that such a \textsf{title}
-begins with a lowercase letter in your .bib database. See
-\textbf{\textbackslash autocap} below for more details.
-
-\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{titleaddon}}
-\textsf{biblatex} intends this field for use with additions to titles
-that may need to be formatted differently from the titles themselves,
-and \textsf{biblatex-chicago} uses it in just this way, with the
-additional wrinkle that it can, if needed, replace the \textsf{title}
-entirely, and this in, effectively, any entry type, providing a fairly
-powerful, if somewhat complicated, tool for getting \textsc{Bib}\TeX\
-to do what you want (cf.\ centinel:letters). This field will always
-be unformatted, that is, neither italicized nor placed within
-quotation marks, so any formatting you may need within it you'll need
-to provide manually yourself. The single exception to this rule is
-when your data begins with a word that would ordinarily only be
-capitalized at the beginning of a sentence, in which case you need
-then simply ensure that that word is in lowercase, and
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago} will automatically do the right thing. See\
-\textbf{\textbackslash autocap}, below. (Cf.\ brown:bremer,
-osborne:poison:15, reaves:rosen, and white:ross:memo for examples
-where the field starts with a lowercase letter; morgenson:market
-provides an example where the \textsf{titleaddon} field, holding the
-name of a regular column in a newspaper, is capitalized, a situation
-that is handled as you would expect.)
-
-%\enlargethispage{-\baselineskip}
-
-\mybigspace As \mymarginpar{\textbf{translator}} far as possible, I
-have implemented this field as \textsf{biblatex}'s standard styles do,
-but the requirements specified by the \emph{Manual} present certain
-complications that need explaining. Lehman points out in his
-documentation that the \textsf{translator} field will be associated
-with a \textsf{title}, a \textsf{booktitle}, or a \textsf{maintitle},
-depending on the sort of entry. More specifically,
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago} associates the \textsf{translator} with the
-most comprehensive of those titles, that is, \textsf{maintitle} if
-there is one, otherwise \textsf{booktitle}, otherwise \textsf{title},
-if the other two are lacking. In a large number of cases, this is
-exactly the correct behavior (adorno:benj, centinel:letters,
-plato:republic:gr, among others). Predictably, however, there are
-numerous cases that require, for example, an additional translator for
-one part of a collection or for one volume of a multi-volume work.
-For these cases I have provided the \textsf{nameb} field. You should
-format names for this field as you would for \textsf{author} or
-\textsf{editor}, and these names will always be associated with the
-\textsf{title} (euripides:orestes).
-
-\mylittlespace I have also provided a \textsf{namea} field, which
-holds the editor of a given \textsf{title} (euripides:orestes). If
-\textsf{namea} and \textsf{nameb} are the same,
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago} will concatenate them, just as
-\textsf{biblatex} already does for \textsf{editor},
-\textsf{translator}, and \textsf{namec} (i.e., the compiler).
-Furthermore, it is conceivable that a given entry will need separate
-translators for each of the three sorts of title. For this, and for
-various other tricky situations, there is the \cmd{parttrans} macro
-(and its siblings), designed to be used in a \textsf{note} field or in
-one of the \textsf{titleaddon} fields (ratliff:review:15). (Because the
-strings identifying a translator differ in notes and bibliography, one
-can't simply write them out in such a field when using the notes \&\
-bibliography style, but you can certainly do so in the author-date
-style, if you wish. Using the macros will make your .bib file more
-portable across both Chicago specifications, and also across multiple
-languages, but they are otherwise unnecessary. [See
-section~\ref{sec:international}].)
-
-\mylittlespace Finally, as I detailed above under \textbf{author}, in
-the absence of an \textsf{author} or an \textsf{editor}, the
-\textsf{translator} will be used at the head of an entry
-(silver:gawain), and the reference list entry alphabetized by the
-translator's name, behavior that can be controlled with the
-\texttt{{usetranslator}} switch in the \textsf{options} field. Cf.\
-\textsf{author}, \textsf{editor}, \textsf{namea}, \textsf{nameb}, and
-\textsf{namec}.
-
-% \enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{type}} is a standard
-\textsf{biblatex} field, and in its normal usage serves to identify
-the type of a \textsf{manual}, \textsf{patent}, \textsf{report}, or
-\textsf{thesis} entry. \textsf{Biblatex} implements the possibility,
-in some circumstances, to use a bibstring without inserting it in a
-\cmd{bibstring} command, and in these entry types the \textsf{type}
-field works this way, allowing you simply to input, e.g.,
-\texttt{patentus} rather than \cmd{bibstring\{patentus\}}, though both
-will work. (See petroff:impurity; herwign:office, murphy:silent:15,
-and ross:thesis all demonstrate how the \textsf{type} field may
-sometimes be automatically set in such entries by using one of the
-standard entry-type aliases).
-
-\mylittlespace Another use for the field is to generalize the
-functioning of the \textsf{suppbook} entry type, and of its alias
-\textsf{suppcollection}. In such entries, the \textsf{type} field can
-specify what sort of supplemental material you are citing, e.g.,
-\enquote{\texttt{preface to}} or \enquote{\texttt{postscript to}.}
-Cf.\ \textsf{suppbook} above for the details. (See \emph{Manual}
-17.74--75; polakow:afterw, prose:intro).
-
-\mylittlespace You can also use the \textsf{type} field in
-\textsf{artwork}, \textsf{audio}, \textsf{image}, \textsf{music}, and
-\textsf{video} entries to identify the medium of the work, e.g.,
-\texttt{oil on canvas}, \texttt{albumen print}, \texttt{compact disc},
-or \texttt{MPEG}. If the first word in this field would normally only
-be capitalized at the beginning of a sentence, then leave it in
-lowercase in your .bib file and \textsf{biblatex} will automatically
-do the right thing in citations. Cf.\ \textsf{artwork},
-\textsf{audio}, \textsf{image}, \textsf{music}, and \textsf{video},
-above, for all the details. (See auden:reading:15, bedford:photo,
-cleese:holygrail, leo:madonna, nytrumpet:art:15.)
-
-\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{url}} \textsf{biblatex}
-field, it holds the url of an online publication, though you can
-provide one for all entry types. The required \LaTeX\ package
-\textsf{url} will ensure that your documents format such references
-properly, in the text and in the reference apparatus.
-
-%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
-
-\mybigspace Standard \colmarginpar{\textbf{urldate}} \textsf{biblatex}
-field, it identifies exactly when you accessed a given url. This
-field would contain the whole date, in \textsc{iso}8601 format
-(evanston:library, grove:sibelius, hlatky:hrt, osborne:poison:15,
-sirosh:visualcortex, wikiped:bib\-tex). In the default setting of
-\cmd{DeclareLabelyear}, any entry without a \textsf{date},
-\textsf{eventdate}, or \textsf{origdate} will now use the
-\textsf{urldate} to find a year for citations and the list of
-references (grove:sibelius, wikiped:bibtex). Please note that the
-\textbf{urlday}, \textbf{urlmonth}, and \textbf{urlyear} fields are
-all now obsolete.
-
-%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
-
-\mybigspace A \mymarginpar{\textbf{usera}} supplemental
-\textsf{biblatex} field which functions in \textsf{biblatex-chicago}
-almost as a \enquote{\textsf{journaltitleaddon}} field. In
-\textsf{article} and \textsf{periodical} entries with
-\textsf{entrysubtype} \texttt{maga\-zine}, the contents of this field
-will be placed, unformatted and between commas, after the
-\textsf{journaltitle} and before the date. The main use is for
-identifying the broadcast network when you cite a radio or television
-program (bundy:macneil), though you may also want to use it to
-identify the section of a newspaper in which you've found a particular
-article (morgenson:market). (See \emph{Manual} 17.190, 17.207. As
-far as I can work out, newspaper section information may be placed
-either before the date [\textsf{usera}] or after it [\textsf{pages}].
-Cp. kozinn:review [17.202] and morgenson:market [17.190]. The choice
-would appear to be yours.)
-
-\mybigspace I \mymarginpar{\textbf{userc}} have now implemented this
-supplemental \textsf{biblatex} field as part of the Chicago
-author-date style's handling of the \textsf{shorthand} field and other
-cross-references within the list of references. (The \enquote{c} part
-is meant as a sort of mnemonic for this latter, general function,
-though its main use will probably be in association with the former.)
-If you use the \textbf{customc} entry type to include alphabetized
-expansions of \textsf{shorthands} in the reference list, or indeed to
-provide cross-references of any sort to separate entries in that list,
-it is unlikely that you will cite the \textsf{customc} entry itself in
-the body of your text. Therefore, in order for it to appear in the
-reference list, you have two choices. You can either include the
-entry key of the \textsf{customc} entry in a \cmd{nocite} command
-inside your document, or you can place that entry key in the
-\textsf{userc} field of the .bib entry that actually uses the
-\textsf{shorthand}. In the latter case, \textsf{biblatex-chicago}
-will call \cmd{nocite} for you when you cite the main entry. (See
-17.39--40,47; abbrev:BSI, abbrev:ISO, bsi:abbreviation:15,
-iso:electrodoc:15.)
-
-\mybigspace Another \mymarginpar{\textbf{usere}} supplemental
-\textsf{biblatex} field, which \textsf{biblatex-chicago} uses
-specifically to provide a translated \textsf{title} of a work,
-something that may be needed if you deem the original language
-unparseable by a significant portion of your likely readership. The
-\emph{Manual} offers two alternatives in such a situation: either you
-can translate the title and use that translation in your
-\textsf{title} field, providing the original language in
-\textsf{language}, or you can give the original title in
-\textsf{title} and the translation in \textsf{usere}. Cf.\
-\textbf{language}, above. (See 17.65--67, 17.166, 17.177; kern,
-pirumova:russian, weresz.)
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{userf}} is the last of the
-supplemental fields which \textsf{biblatex} provides, used by
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago} for a very specific purpose. When you cite
-both a translation and its original, the \emph{Manual} (17.66)
-recommends that, in a reference list at least, you combine references
-to both texts in one entry. Lacking specific instructions about the
-author-date style, I have nonetheless chosen to implement this
-possibility also for a list of references, though in-text citations
-will still only refer to individual works. In order to follow this
-specification, I have provided a third cross-referencing system (the
-others being \textsf{crossref} and \textsf{xref}), and have chosen the
-name \textsf{userf} because it might act as a mnemonic for its
-function.
-
-%\enlargethispage{-\baselineskip}
-
-\mylittlespace In order to use this system, you should start by
-entering both the original and its translation into your .bib file,
-just as you normally would. The mechanism works for any entry type,
-and the two entries need not be of the same type. In the entry for
-the \emph{translation}, you put the cite key of the original into the
-\textsf{userf} field. In the \emph{original's} entry, you need to
-include some means of preventing it appearing separately in the list
-of references, either a toggle in the \textsf{keywords} field or
-perhaps \texttt{skipbib} in the \textsf{options} field. In this
-standard case, the data for the translation will be printed first,
-followed by the string \texttt{orig. pub. as}, followed by the
-original, author omitted (furet:passing:eng, furet:passing:fr). As
-explained above (\textbf{origlanguage}), I have also included a way to
-modify the string printed before the original. In the entry for the
-\emph{translation}, you put the original's language in
-\textsf{origlanguage}, and instead of \texttt{originally published
- as}, you'll get \texttt{French edition:} or \texttt{Latin edition:},
-etc.\ (aristotle:metaphy:gr, aristotle:metaphy:trans).
-
-\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{venue}} \textsf{biblatex}
-offers this field for use in \textsf{proceedings} and
-\textsf{inproceedings} entries, but I haven't yet implemented it,
-mainly because the \emph{Manual} has nothing to say about it. Perhaps
-the \textsf{organization} field could be used, for the moment,
-instead. Anything in a \textsf{venue} field will be ignored.
-
-\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{version}} \textsf{biblatex}
-field, currently only available in \textsf{misc} and \textsf{patent}
-entries in \textsf{biblatex-chicago}.
-
-\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{volume}} \textsf{biblatex}
-field. It holds the volume of a \textsf{journaltitle} in
-\textsf{article} entries, and also the volume of a multi-volume work
-in many other sorts of entry. Cf.\ \textsf{part}; conway:evolution
-shows how sometimes this field may hold series information, as well.
-
-\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{volumes}} \textsf{biblatex}
-field. It holds the total number of volumes of a multi-volume work,
-and in such references you should provide the volume and page numbers
-in the \textsf{postnote} field of the relevant \cmd{cite} command,
-e.g.:
-
-\begin{quote}
-\cmd{autocite}\texttt{[3:25]\{bibfile:key\}}.
-\end{quote}
-
-Cf.\ 16.110; meredith:letters, tillich:system, weber:saugetiere,
-wright:evolution. The entry wright:theory presents one volume of such
-a multi-volume work, so you would no longer need to give the volume in
-any \textsf{postnote} field when citing it.
-
-\mybigspace A \mymarginpar{\textbf{xref}} modified \textsf{crossref}
-field provided by \textsf{biblatex}. See \textbf{crossref}, above.
-
-\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{year}} \textsf{biblatex}
-field, especially important for the author-date specification. Please
-see all the details under \textbf{date} above. Unlike the
-\textsf{date} field \textsf{year} allows non-numeric input, so you can
-put \cmd{bibstring\{nodate\}} here if required, or indeed any other
-sort of non-numerical date information. If you can guess the date
-then you can include that guess in square brackets instead of
-\cmd{bibstring\{nodate\}}. Cf.\ bedford:photo, clark:mesopot,
-ross:leo, thesis:madonna.
-
-\subsection{Commands}
-\label{sec:commands:authdate}
-
-In this section I shall attempt to document all those commands you may
-need when using \textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} that I have either
-altered with respect to the standard provided by \textsf{biblatex} or
-that I have provided myself. Some of these, unfortunately, will make
-your .bib file incompatible with other \textsf{biblatex} styles, but
-I've been unable to avoid this. Any ideas for more elegant, and more
-compatible, solutions will be warmly welcomed.
-
-\subsubsection{Formatting Commands}
-\label{sec:formatting:authdate}
-
-These commands allow you to fine-tune the presentation of your
-references in both citations and list of references. You can find
-many examples of their usage in \textsf{dates-test.bib}, and I shall
-try to point you toward a few such entries in what follows.
-\textbf{NB:} \textsf{biblatex's} \cmd{mkbibquote} command is now
-mandatory in some situations. See its entry below.
-
-\mybigspace Version \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash autocap}} 0.8
-of \textsf{biblatex} introduced the \cmd{autocap} command, which
-capitalizes a word inside a citation or list of references entry if
-that word follows sentence-ending punctuation, and leaves it lowercase
-otherwise. The whole question of capitalization is considerably more
-complicated in the notes \&\ bibliography style, where the former uses
-commas and the latter (often) periods to separate blocks of
-information, whereas the more streamlined author-date specification
-has few such issues. In \textsf{dates-test.bib} there are only two
-places where the \cmd{autocap} macro is necessary, and they both
-involve the string \texttt{forthcoming} in the \textsf{year} field
-(author:forthcoming, contrib:contrib).
-
-\mylittlespace I have nonetheless retained the system developed,
-following Lehman's example, for the notes \&\ bibliography style,
-which automatically tracks the capitalization of certain fields in
-your .bib file. I chose these fields after a non-scientific survey of
-entries in my own databases, so of course if you have ideas for the
-extension of this facility I would be most interested to hear them.
-In order to take advantage of this functionality, all you need do is
-begin the data in the appropriate field with a lowercase letter,
-e.g.,\ \texttt{note = \{with the assistance of X\}}. If the data
-begins with a capital letter --- and this is not infrequent --- that
-capital will always be retained. (cf., e.g., creel:house,
-morgenson:market.) If, on the other hand, you for some reason need
-such a field always to start with a lowercase letter, then you can try
-using the \cmd{isdot} macro at the start, which turns off the
-mechanism without printing anything itself. Here, then, for reference
-purposes, is the complete list of fields where this functionality is
-active:
-
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item The \textbf{addendum} field in all entry types.
-\item The \textbf{booktitleaddon} field in all entry types.
-\item The \textbf{edition} field in all entry types. (Numerals work
- as you expect them to here.)
-\item The \textbf{maintitleaddon} field in all entry types.
-\item The \textbf{note} field in all entry types.
-\item The \textbf{shorttitle} field in the \textsf{review}
- (\textsf{suppperiodical}) entry type and in the \textsf{misc} type,
- in the latter case, however, only when there is an
- \textsf{entrysubtype} defined, indicating that the work cited is
- from an archive.
-\item The \textbf{title} field in the \textsf{review}
- (\textsf{suppperiodical}) entry type and in the \textsf{misc} type,
- in the latter case, however, only when there is an
- \textsf{entrysubtype} defined, indicating that the work cited is
- from an archive.
-\item The \textbf{titleaddon} field in all entry types.
-\item The \textbf{type} field in \textsf{artwork}, \textsf{audio},
- \textsf{image}, \textsf{music}, \textsf{suppbook},
- \textsf{suppcollection}, and \textsf{video} entry types.
-\end{enumerate}
-
-If you accidentally use the \cmd{autocap} macro in one of the above
-fields, it frankly shouldn't matter at all, and you'll still get what
-you want, but taking advantage of the automatic provisions should at
-least save some typing.
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash bibstring}} is
-Lehman's very powerful mechanism to allow \textsf{biblatex}
-automatically to provide a localized version of a string, and to
-determine whether that string needs capitalization, depending on where
-it falls in an entry. \textsf{Biblatex} also provides functionality
-which allows you sometimes simply to input, for example,
-\texttt{newseries} instead of \cmd{bib\-string\{newseries\}}, the
-package auto-detecting when a bibstring is involved and doing the
-right thing, though in all such cases either form will work. This
-functionality is available in the \textsf{series} field of
-\textsf{article}, \textsf{periodical}, and \textsf{review} entries; in
-the \textsf{type} field of \textsf{manual}, \textsf{patent},
-\textsf{report}, and \textsf{thesis} entries; in the \textsf{location}
-field of \textsf{patent} entries; in the \textsf{language} field in
-all entry types; and in the \textsf{nameaddon} field in
-\textsf{customc} entries. These are the places, as far as I can make
-out, where \textsf{biblatex's} standard styles support this feature,
-though I have added the last, style-specific, one. If Lehman
-generalizes it still further in a future release, I shall do the same,
-if possible.
-
-%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash mkbibquote}} is
-the standard \textsf{biblatex} command, which requires attention here
-because it is a crucial part of the mechanism of Lehman's
-\enquote{American} punctuation system. No titles in the author-date
-system require quotation marks, but titles-within-titles frequently
-do, so it is best to get accustomed to using this command to make sure
-any periods or commas appearing in the neighborhood of the closing
-quotes will appear inside them automatically. A few examples from
-\textsf{dates-test.bib} should help to clarify this.
-
-\mylittlespace In an \textsf{article} entry, the \textsf{title}
-contains a quoted phrase:
-
-\begin{quotation}
- \noindent\texttt{title = \{Diethylstilbestrol and Media Coverage of the \\
- \indent\cmd{mkbibquote}\{morning after\} Pill\}}
-\end{quotation}
-
-Here, because the quoted text doesn't come at the end of title, and no
-punctuation will ever need to be drawn within the closing quotation
-mark, you could instead use \texttt{\cmd{enquote}\{morning after\}} or
-even \texttt{``morning after''}. (Note the double quotation marks here
---- the other two methods have the virtue of taking care of nesting
-for you.) All of these will produce the formatted: Diethylstilbestrol
-and media coverage of the \enquote{morning after} pill.
-
-\mylittlespace Here, by contrast, is a \textsf{book title}:
-
-\begin{quotation}
- \noindent \texttt{title = \{Annotations to
- \cmd{mkbibquote}\{Finnegans wake\}\}}
-\end{quotation}
-
-Because the quoted title within the title comes at the end of the
-field, and because this reference unit will be separated from
-what follows by a period in the list of references, then the
-\cmd{mkbibquote} command is necessary to bring that period within the
-final quotation marks, like so: \emph{Annotations to
- \enquote{Finnegans wake.}}
-
-\mylittlespace Note in both cases how you need to be careful with the
-sentence-style capitalization inside the curly brackets. The
-automatic algorithms assume anything inside the brackets doesn't need
-alteration, so you need to provide lower- or uppercase as they should
-appear in the list of references.
-
-\mylittlespace Let me also add that this command interacts well with
-Lehman's \textsf{csquotes} package, which I highly recommend, though
-the latter isn't strictly necessary in texts using an American style,
-to which \textsf{biblatex} defaults when \textsf{csquotes} isn't
-loaded.
-
-\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash partcomp}} and
-the following 6 macros were all designed to help
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago} cope with the fact that many bibstrings in
-the notes \&\ bibliography style differ between notes and
-bibliography, the former sometimes using abbreviated forms when the
-latter prints them in full. These problems do not arise in the
-author-date style, but using these macros will make your .bib database
-more portable across languages and across both Chicago styles, and may
-be slightly easier to remember than the strings themselves. On the
-other hand, of course, they will make your .bib file less portable
-across multiple \textsf{biblatex} styles.
-
-\mylittlespace These macros allow you to provide an \texttt{editor}, a
-\texttt{translator}, and/or a \texttt{compiler} in situations where
-the available fields (\textsf{editor}, \textsf{namea},
-\textsf{translator}, \textsf{nameb}, and \textsf{namec}) aren't
-adequate. Their names all begin with \cmd{part}, as originally I
-intended them for use when a particular name applied only to a
-specific \textsf{title}, rather than to a \textsf{maintitle} or
-\textsf{booktitle} (cf.\ \textbf{namea} and \textbf{nameb}, above).
-
-%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
-
-\mylittlespace In the present instance, you can use \cmd{partcomp} to
-identify a compiler when \textsf{namec} (or \textsf{editortype}) won't
-do, e.g., in a \textsf{note} field or the like. In such a case,
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago} will print the appropriate string in your
-references.
-
-\mybigspace Use \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash partedit}} this
-macro when identifying an editor whose name doesn't conveniently fit
-into the usual fields (\textsf{editor} or \textsf{namea}). (N.B.: If
-you are writing in French and using \textsf{cms-french.lbx}, then
-currently you'll need to add either \texttt{de} or \texttt{d'} after
-this command in your .bib files to make the references come out right.
-I'm working on this.) See howell:marriage.
-
-\mybigspace As \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash
- partedit-\\andcomp}} before, but for use when an editor is also a
-compiler.
-
-\vspace{1.3\baselineskip} As \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash
- partedit-\\andtrans}} before, but for when when an editor is also a
-translator (ratliff:review:15).
-
-\mybigspace As \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash
- partedit-\\transandcomp}} before, but for when an editor is also a
-translator and a compiler.
-
-\vspace{1.3\baselineskip} As \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash
- parttrans}} before, but for use when identifying a translator
-whose name doesn't conveniently fit into the usual fields
-(\textsf{translator} and \textsf{nameb}).
-
-\mybigspace As \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash
- parttrans-\\andcomp}} before, but for when a translator is also a
-compiler.
-
-\subsubsection{Citation Commands}
-\label{sec:cite:authordate}
-
-The \textsf{biblatex} package is particularly rich in citation
-commands, most of which, in \textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate},
-function as they do in the standard author-date styles. If you are
-getting unexpected behavior when using them please have a look in your
-.log file. A command like \cmd{supercite}, listed in §~3.6.2 of the
-\textsf{biblatex} manual but not defined by
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} or by core \textsf{biblatex},
-defaults to \cmd{cite}, and leaves a warning in the .log. The
-following commands may require some minimal explanation, but if there
-are standard commands that don't work for you, or new commands that
-would be useful, please let me know, and it should be possible to fix
-or add them.
-
-\mybigspace I \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash autocite}} haven't
-adapted this in the slightest, but I thought it worth pointing out
-that \textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} sets this command to use
-\cmd{parencite} as the default option. It is, in my experience, much
-the most common citation command you will use, and also works fine in
-its multicite form, \textbf{\textbackslash autocites}.
-
-\mybigspace In \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash textcite}} standard
-\textsf{biblatex} this command searches first for a
-\textsf{labelname}, usually taken from the \textsf{author} or
-\textsf{shortauthor} field, then uses the \textsf{shorthand} field if
-the former doesn't exist. Because of the way the Chicago author-date
-specification recommends handling abbreviations, I have switched this
-around, and the command now searches for a \textsf{shorthand} first.
-This holds also for the multicite form \textbf{\textbackslash
- textcites}, though both commands revert to their standard
-\textsf{biblatex} behavior when you give the \texttt{cmslos=false}
-option in the preamble.
-
-\subsection{Package Options}
-\label{sec:opts:authdate}
-
-\subsubsection{Pre-set \textsf{biblatex} Options}
-\label{sec:preset:authdate}
-
-Although a quick glance through \textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty} will
-tell you which \textsf{biblatex} options the package sets for you, I
-thought I might gather them here also for your perusal. These
-settings are, I believe, consistent with the specification, but you
-can alter them in the options to \textsf{biblatex-chicago} in your
-preamble or by loading the package using
-\cmd{usepackage[style=chicago-authordate]\{biblatex\}}, which gives
-you the \textsf{biblatex} defaults unless you redefine them yourself
-inside the square brackets.
-
-\mylittlespace \textsf{Biblatex-chicago-authordate}
-\mymarginpar{\texttt{autocite=\\inline}} places references in
-footnotes by default.
-
-\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\texttt{citetracker=\\true}} citetracker
-for the \cmd{ifciteseen} test is enabled globally.
-
-\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\texttt{alldates=comp}} specification
-calls for the long format when presenting dates, slightly shortened
-when presenting date ranges. Please note that because of the
-author-date style's complicated requirements with respect to dates,
-there will be cases when printed ranges don't look exactly right ---
-cf., e.g., nass:address. I'm working on this.
-
-\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{ibidtracker=\\constrict}}
-enables an \emph{ibidem} mechanism in citations, but only in the most
-strictly-defined circumstances. The Chicago author-date style doesn't
-print \enquote{Ibid} in citations, but in general a repeated citation
-on the same page will print only the page reference. Technically,
-this should only occur when a source is cited \enquote{more than once
- in one paragraph} (16.114), so you can use the \cmd{citereset}
-command from \textsf{biblatex} to achieve the greatest compliance, as
-the package only offers automatic resetting on part, chapter, section,
-and subsection boundaries, while \textsf{biblatex-chicago}
-automatically resets the tracker at page breaks. (Cf.\
-\textsf{biblatex.pdf} §3.1.2.1.) Whenever there might be any
-ambiguity, \textsf{biblatex} should default to printing a more
-informative reference.
-
-\mylittlespace If you are going to repeat a source, make sure that the
-cite command provides a \textsf{postnote} --- if you don't need to cite a
-specific page, then it's better only to use one citation rather than
-two, as otherwise, in the current state of the code, you'll get empty
-parentheses, like so: ().
-
-%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
-
-\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{labelyear=\\true}} option
-tells \textsf{biblatex} to provide the special \textsf{labelyear} and
-\textsf{extrayear} fields for author-date styles.
-
-\mylittlespace These \colmarginpar{\textsf{\texttt{maxbibnames\\=10\\
- minbibnames\\=7}}} two options are new, and control the number
-of names printed in the list of references when that number exceeds
-10. These numbers follow the recommendations of the \emph{Manual}
-(17.29--30), and they are different from those for use in citations.
-With \textsf{biblatex} 1.6 and later you can no longer redefine
-\texttt{maxnames} and \texttt{minnames} in the \cmd{printbibliography}
-command at the bottom of your document, so \textsf{biblatex-chicago}
-now does this automatically for you, though of course you can change
-them in your document preamble. Please see
-section~\ref{sec:otherhints:auth} below (and the file
-\textsf{cms-dates-sample.pdf}) for hints on dealing with entries with
-more than three authors.
-
-\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{pagetracker=\\true}} enables
-page tracking for the \cmd{iffirstonpage} and \cmd{ifsamepage}
-commands for controlling, among other things, the \emph{ibidem}
-mechanism. It tracks individual pages if \LaTeX\ is in oneside mode,
-or whole spreads in twoside mode.
-
-\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{punctfont=\\true}} fixes a
-minor problem with punctuation in titles, ensuring that the colon
-between a title and a subtitle appears in the correct, matching font.
-
-\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{sortcase=\\false}} turns off
-the sorting of uppercase and lowercase letters separately, a practice
-which the \emph{Manual} doesn't appear to recommend.
-
-\mylittlespace This \colmarginpar{\texttt{sorting=cms}} setting, new
-in this release, takes advantage of the \cmd{DeclareSortingScheme}
-command provided by \textsf{biblatex} and \textsf{biber}, in effect
-implementing a default sorting order in the list of references
-tailored to comply with the Chicago author-date specification. Please
-see the documentation of \cmd{DeclareSortingScheme} in
-section~\ref{sec:authformopts}, below.
-
-\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{uniquelist=\\minyear}}
-enables \textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} to disambiguate entries
-which have more than three \textsf{authors}, but which differ
-\emph{after} the first name in the list. This will only occur when
-two such entries have the same \textsf{year} (16.118). The option is
-\textsf{Biber}-only, like the following, which means that this
-next-generation \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ replacement is now required for the
-author-date style. Please see \textsf{cms-dates-sample.pdf} and
-section~\ref{sec:otherhints:auth}, below, for further details.
-
-\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{uniquename=\\minfull}}
-enables the package to distinguish different authors who share a
-surname, using initials in the first instance, and whole names if
-initials aren't enough (16.108). The option is now
-\textsf{Biber}-only, like the previous one.
-
-\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{usetranslator\\=true}}
-enables automatic use of the \textsf{translator} at the head of
-entries in the absence of an \textsf{author} or an \textsf{editor}.
-In the list of references, the entry will be alphabetized by the
-translator's surname. You can disable this functionality on a
-per-entry basis by setting \texttt{usetranslator=false} in the
-\textsf{options} field. Cf.\ silver:gawain.
-
-\subsubsection*{Other \textsf{biblatex} Formatting Options}
-\label{sec:authformopts}
-
-I've chosen defaults for many of the general formatting commands
-provided by \textsf{biblatex}, including the vertical space between
-items in the list of references and between items in the list of
-shorthands (\cmd{bibitemsep} and \cmd{lositemsep}). I define many of
-these in \textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty}, and of course you may want to
-redefine them to your own needs and tastes. It may be as well you
-know that the \emph{Manual} does state a preference for two of the
-formatting options I've implemented by default: the 3-em dash as a
-replacement for repeated names in the list of references
-(16.103--106); and the formatting of note numbers, both in the main
-text and at the bottom of the page / end of the essay (superscript in
-the text, in-line in the notes; 16.25). The code for this last
-formatting is also in \textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty}, and I've wrapped
-it in a test that disables it if you are using the \textsf{memoir}
-class, which I believe has its own commands for defining these
-parameters. You can also disable it by using the \texttt{footmarkoff}
-package option, on which see below.
-
-\mylittlespace Gildas Hamel pointed out that my default definition, in
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty}, of \textsf{biblatex's}
-\cmd{bibnamedash} didn't work well with many fonts, leaving a line of
-three dashes separated by gaps. He suggested an alternative, which
-I've adopted, with a minor tweak to make the dash thicker, though you
-can toy with all the parameters to find what looks right with your
-chosen font. The default definition is:
-\cmd{renewcommand*\{\textbackslash bibnamedash\}\{\textbackslash
- rule[.4ex]\{3em\}\{.6pt\}\}}.
-
-\mylittlespace With \colmarginpar{\texttt{losnotes}
- \&\\\texttt{losendnotes}} this release, and at the request of
-Kenneth Pearce, I have added two new \texttt{bibenvironments} to
-\textsf{chicago-authordate.bbx}, for use with the \texttt{env} option
-to the \cmd{printshorthands} command. The first, \texttt{losnotes},
-is designed to allow a list of shorthands to appear inside footnotes,
-while \texttt{losendnotes} does the same for endnotes. Their main
-effect is to change the font size, and in the latter case to clear up
-some spurious punctuation and white space that I see on my system when
-using endnotes. (You'll probably also want to use the option
-\texttt{heading=none} in order to get rid of the [oversized] default,
-providing your own within the \cmd{footnote} command.) Please see the
-documentation of \textsf{shorthand} in
-section~\ref{sec:fields:authdate} above for further options available
-to you for presenting and formatting the list of shorthands.
-
-\mylittlespace The next-generation backend \textsf{Biber} offers
-enhanced functionality in many areas, two of which I've implemented in
-this release. If the default definitions don't work well for you, you
-can redefine all of them in your document preamble --- see
-\textsf{biblatex.pdf} §§4.5.1 and 4.5.2.
-
-\mylittlespace This \colmarginpar{\cmd{Declare-}\\\texttt{Labelname}}
-option allows you to add name fields for consideration when
-\textsf{biblatex} is attempting to find a shortened name for in-text
-citations. This, for example, allows a compiler (=\textsf{namec}) to
-appear in citations without any other intervention from the user,
-rather than requiring a \textsf{shortauthor} field as previous
-releases of \textsf{biblatex-chicago} did. The default definition
-currently is
-\texttt{\{shortauthor,author,\\shorteditor,namea,editor,nameb,translator,namec\}}.
-
-\mylittlespace The
-\colmarginpar{\cmd{Declare-}\\\texttt{SortingScheme}} third
-\textsf{Biber} enhancement I have implemented allows you to include
-almost any field whatsoever in \textsf{biblatex's} sorting algorithms
-for the list of references, so that a great many more entries will be
-sorted correctly automatically rather than requiring manual
-intervention in the form of a \textsf{sortkey} field or the like.
-Code in \textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty} sets the \textsf{biblatex}
-option \texttt{sorting=cms}, which is a custom scheme, basically a
-Chicago-specific variant of the default \texttt{nyt}. You can find
-its definition in \textsf{chicago-authordate.cbx}.
-
-\mylittlespace The advantages of this scheme are, specifically, that
-any entry headed by one of the supplemental name fields
-(\textsf{name[a-c]}), a \textsf{manual} entry headed by an
-\textsf{organization}, or an \textsf{article} or \textsf{review} entry
-headed by a \textsf{journaltitle} will no longer need a
-\textsf{sortkey} set. The main disadvantage should only occur very
-rarely, and appears because the supplemental name fields are treated
-differently from the standard name fields by \textsf{biblatex}.
-Ordinarily, you can set, for example, \texttt{useauthor=false} in the
-\textsf{options} field to remove the \textsf{author's} name from
-consideration for sorting purposes. The Chicago-specific option
-\textsf{usecompiler=false}, however, doesn't remove \textsf{namec}
-from such consideration, so in some rare corner cases you may need a
-\textsf{sortkey}.
-
-\subsubsection{{Pre-set \textsf{chicago} Options}}
-\label{sec:authpreset}
-
-At \mymarginpar{\texttt{bookpages=\\true}} the request of Scot
-Becker, I have included this rather specialized option, which controls
-the printing of the \textsf{pages} field in \textsf{book} entries.
-Some bibliographic managers, apparently, place the total page count in
-that field by default, and this option allows you to stop the printing
-of this information in the reference list. It defaults to true, which
-means the field is printed, but it can be set to false either in the
-preamble, for the whole document, or on a per-entry basis in the
-\textsf{options} field (though rather than use this latter method it
-would make sense to eliminate the \textsf{pages} field from the
-affected entries).
-
-\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{doi=true}} option controls
-whether any \textsf{doi} fields present in the .bib file will be
-printed in the reference list. It defaults to true, and can be set to
-false either in the preamble, for the whole document, or on a
-per-entry basis, in the \textsf{options} field.
-
-\mylittlespace This \colmarginpar{\texttt{eprint=true}} option controls
-whether any \textsf{eprint} fields present in the .bib file will be
-printed in the list of references. It defaults to true, and can be
-set to false either in the preamble, for the whole document, or on a
-per-entry basis, in the \textsf{options} field. In \textsf{online}
-entries, the \textsf{eprint} field will always be printed.
-
-\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{isbn=true}} option controls
-whether any \textsf{isan}, \textsf{isbn}, \textsf{ismn},
-\textsf{isrn}, \textsf{issn}, and \textsf{iswc} fields present in the
-.bib file will be printed in the list of references. It defaults to
-true, and can be set to false either in the preamble, for the whole
-document, or on a per-entry basis, in the \textsf{options} field.
-
-%\enlargethispage{-\baselineskip}
-
-\mylittlespace Once \mymarginpar{\texttt{numbermonth=\\true}} again
-at the request of Scot Becker, I have included this option, which
-controls the printing of the \textsf{month} field in all the
-periodical-type entries when a \textsf{number} field is also present.
-Some bibliographic software, apparently, always includes the month of
-publication even when a \textsf{number} is present. When all this
-information is available the \emph{Manual} (17.181) prints everything,
-so this option defaults to true, which means the field is printed, but
-it can be set to false either in the preamble, for the whole document,
-or on a per-entry basis in the \textsf{options} field.
-
-\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{url=true}} option controls
-whether any \textsf{url} fields present in the .bib file will be
-printed in the reference list. It defaults to true, and can be set to
-false either in the preamble, for the whole document, or on a
-per-entry basis, in the \textsf{options} field. Please note that, as
-in standard \textsf{biblatex}, the \textsf{url} field is always
-printed in \textsf{online} entries, regardless of the state of this
-option.
-
-\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{includeall=\\true}} is the
-one option that rules the six preceding, either printing all the
-fields under consideration --- the default --- or excluding all of
-them. It is set to \texttt{true} in \textsf{chicago-authordate.cbx},
-but you can change it either in the preamble for the whole document or
-in the \textsf{options} field of individual entries. The rationale
-for all of these options is the availability of bibliographic managers
-that helpfully present as much data as possible, in every entry, some
-of which may not be felt to be entirely necessary. Setting
-\texttt{includeall} to \texttt{true} probably works just fine for
-those compiling their .bib databases by hand, but others may find that
-some automatic pruning helps clear things up, at least to a first
-approximation. Some per-entry work afterward may then polish up the
-details.
-
-\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{cmslos=true}} option alters
-\textsf{biblatex's} standard behavior when processing the
-\textsf{shorthand} field. Chicago's author-date style only seems to
-recommend the use of shorthands as abbreviations for long authors'
-names, particularly institutional names, which means the shorthand
-will replace only the name part in citations rather than the whole
-citation (17.47; bsi:abbreviation:15, iso:electrodoc:15). It suggests
-placing the expansion of the abbreviation into the reference list
-itself, a procedure that I have implemented in this release using the
-\textbf{customc} entry type, which see. Please note that you can
-still print a list of shorthands if you wish, and you can also get
-back something approaching the \enquote{standard} behavior of
-shorthands if you give the \texttt{cmslos=false} option to
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago} in your document preamble. Cf.\
-section~\ref{sec:fields:authdate}, s.v. \enquote{\textbf{shorthand}}
-above, and also \textsf{cms-dates-sample.pdf}.
-
-\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{nodates=true}} option means
-that for all entry types except \textsf{inreference}, \textsf{misc},
-and \textsf{reference}, \textsf{biblatex-chicago} will automatically
-provide \cmd{bibstring\{nodates\}} for any entry that doesn't
-otherwise provide a date for citations and for the heads of entries in
-the list of references. If you set \texttt{nodates=false} in your
-preamble, then the package won't perform this substitution in any
-entry type whatsoever. (The bibstring expands to
-\enquote{\texttt{n.d.}} in English.)
-
-\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{usecompiler=\\true}} option
-enables automatic use of the name of the compiler (in the
-\textsf{namec} field) at the head of an entry, usually in the absence
-of an \textsf{author}, \textsf{editor}, or \textsf{translator}, in
-accordance with the specification (\emph{Manual} 17.41). It may also,
-like \texttt{useauthor}, \texttt{useeditor}, and
-\texttt{usetranslator}, be disabled on a per-entry basis by setting
-\texttt{usecompiler=false} in the \textsf{options} field. The only,
-subtle, difference between this switch and those standard
-\textsf{biblatex} switches is that this one won't remove
-\textsf{namec} from the sorting list, whereas \texttt{useauthor=false}
-and \texttt{useeditor=false} do remove the \textsf{author} and
-\textsf{editor}. You may, therefore, in corner cases, require a
-\textsf{sortkey} in the entry.
-
-\subsubsection{Style Options -- Preamble}
-\label{sec:authuseropts}
-
-These are parts of the specification that not everyone will wish to
-enable. All except the second can be used even if you load the
-package in the old way via a call to \textsf{biblatex}, but most users
-can just place the appropriate string(s) in the options to the
-\cmd{usepackage\{biblatex-chicago\}} call in your preamble.
-
-\mylittlespace At \mymarginpar{\texttt{annotation}} the request of
-Emil Salim, I have added to this version of \textsf{biblatex-chicago}
-the ability to produce annotated reference lists. If you turn this
-option on then the contents of your \textsf{annotation} (or
-\textsf{annote}) field will be printed after the reference. (You can
-also use external files to store annotations -- please see
-\textsf{biblatex.pdf} §~3.10.7 for details on how to do this.) This
-functionality is currently in a beta state, so before you use it
-please have a look at the documentation for the \textsf{annotation}
-field, in section~\ref{sec:fields:authdate} above.
-
-\mylittlespace Although \mymarginpar{\texttt{footmarkoff}} the
-\emph{Manual} (16.25) recommends specific formatting for footnote (and
-endnote) marks, i.e., superscript in the text and in-line in foot- or
-endnotes, Charles Schaum has brought it to my attention that not all
-publishers follow this practice, even when requiring Chicago style. I
-have retained this formatting as the default setup, but if you include
-the \texttt{footmarkoff} option, \textsf{biblatex-chicago} will not
-alter \LaTeX 's (or the \textsf{endnote} package's) defaults in any
-way, leaving you free to follow the specifications of your publisher.
-I have placed all of this code in \textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty}, so if
-you load the package with a call to \textsf{biblatex} instead, then
-once again footnote marks will revert to the \LaTeX\ default, but of
-course you also lose a fair amount of other formatting, as well. See
-section~\ref{sec:loading:auth}, below.
-
-\mylittlespace Several \colmarginpar{\texttt{headline}} users have
-requested an option that turns off the automatic transformations that
-produce sentence-style capitalization in the title fields of the
-author-date style. If you set this option, the word case in your
-title fields will not be changed in any way, that is, this doesn't
-automatically transform your titles into headline-style, but rather
-allows the .bib file to determine capitalization. It works by
-redefining the command \cmd{MakeSentenceCase}, so in the unlikely
-event you are using the latter anywhere in your document please be
-aware that it will also be turned off there.
-
-\mylittlespace The \mymarginpar{\texttt{juniorcomma}} \emph{Manual}
-(6.49) states that \enquote{commas are no longer required around
- \emph{Jr.}\ and \emph{Sr.},} so by default \textsf{biblatex-chicago}
-has followed standard \textsf{biblatex} in using a simple space in
-names like \enquote{John Doe Jr.} Charles Schaum has pointed out that
-traditional \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ practice was to include the comma, and
-since the \emph{Manual} has no objections to this, I have provided an
-option which allows you to turn this behavior back on, either for the
-whole document or on a per-entry basis. Please note, first, that
-numerical suffixes (John Doe III) never take the comma. The code
-tests for this situation, and detects cardinal numbers well, but if
-you are using ordinals you may need to set this to \texttt{false} in
-the \textsf{options} field of some entries. Second, I have fixed a
-bug in older releases which always printed the \enquote{Jr.}\ part of
-the name immediately after the surname, even when the surname came
-before the given names (as in a reference list). The package now
-correctly puts the \enquote{Jr.}\ part at the end, after the given
-names, and in this position it always takes a comma, the presence of
-which is unaffected by this option.
-
-%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
-
-\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{natbib}} may look like the
-standard \textsf{biblatex} option, but to keep the coding of
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty} simpler for the moment I have
-reimplemented it there, from whence it is merely passed on to
-\textsf{biblatex}. If you load the Chicago style with
-\cmd{usepackage\{biblatex-chicago\}}, then the option should simply
-read \texttt{natbib}, rather than \texttt{natbib=true}. The shorter
-form also works if you use \cmd{usepackage}\\
-\texttt{[style=chicago-authordate]\{biblatex\}}, so I hope this
-requirement isn't too onerous.
-
-\mylittlespace At \mymarginpar{\texttt{noibid}} the request of an
-early tester, I have included this option to allow you globally to
-turn off the \texttt{ibidem} mechanism that
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} uses by default. This mechanism
-doesn't actually print \enquote{Ibid,} but rather includes only the
-\textsf{postnote} information in a citation, i.e., it will print (224)
-instead of (Author 2000, 224). Setting this option will mean that
-none of these shortened citations will appear automatically. For more
-fine-grained control of individual citations you'll probably want to
-use the \cmd{citereset} command, allied possibly with the
-\textsf{biblatex}\ \texttt{citereset} option, on which see
-\textsf{biblatex.pdf} §3.1.2.1.
-
-%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
-
-\mylittlespace Kenneth Pearce \colmarginpar{\texttt{shorthandfull}}
-has suggested that, in some fields of study, a list of shorthands
-providing full bibliographical information may replace the list of
-references itself. This option, which must be used in tandem with
-\texttt{cmslos=false}, prints this full information in the list of
-shorthands, though of course you should remember that any .bib entry
-not containing a \textsf{shorthand} field won't appear in such a list.
-Please see the documentation of the \textsf{shorthand} field in
-section~\ref{sec:fields:authdate} above for information on further
-options available to you for presenting and formatting the list of
-shorthands.
-
-\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{strict}} still-experimental
-option attempts to follow the \emph{Manual}'s recommendations (16.57)
-for formatting footnotes on the page, using no rule between them and
-the main text unless there is a run-on note, in which case a short
-rule intervenes to emphasize this continuation. I haven't tested this
-code very thoroughly, and it's possible that frequent use of floats
-might interfere with it. Let me know if it causes problems.
-
-\subsubsection{Style Options -- Entry}
-\label{sec:authentryopts}
-
-These options are settable on a per-entry basis in the
-\textsf{options} field; both relate to the presentation of dates in
-citations and the list of references.
-
-\mylittlespace The \colmarginpar{\texttt{cmsdate}} \emph{Manual}
-outlines a series of options for entries with more than one date
-(17.124--27). All of these possibilities are available in
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago} using the \texttt{cmsdate} entry option. It
-has 4 possible states relevant to this problem, alongside a fifth
-which I discuss below. An example should make this clearer. Let us
-assume that an entry presents a reprinted edition of a work by Smith,
-first published in 1926 (the \textsf{origdate}) and reprinted in 1985
-(the \textsf{date}):
-
-\begin{description}
-\item[\qquad \textbf{off}:] This is the default. The citation will
- look like (Smith 1985).
-\item[\qquad \textbf{on}:] The citation will look like (Smith 1926).
-\item[\qquad \textbf{new}:] The citation will look like (Smith
- 1926/1985).
-\item[\qquad \textbf{old}:] The citation will look like (Smith [1926]
- 1985).
-\end{description}
-
-As I explained in detail above in section~\ref{sec:fields:authdate},
-s.v.\ \enquote{\textbf{date},}\ because \textsf{biblatex's} sorting
-algorithms and automatic creation of the \textsf{extrayear} field
-refer by default to the \textsf{date} before the \textsf{origdate}
-when both are present, there may be situations when you need to have
-the \emph{earlier} year in the \textsf{date} field, and the later one
-in \textsf{origdate}, e.g., if you have another reprinted work by the
-same author originally printed in the same year.
-\textsf{Biblatex-chicago-authordate} will automatically detect this
-switch, and given the same reprinted work as above, the results will
-be as follows:
-
-\begin{description}
-\item[\qquad \textbf{off}:] This is the default. The citation will
- look like (Smith 1926a).
-\item[\qquad \textbf{on}:] The citation will look like (Smith 1926a).
-\item[\qquad \textbf{new}:] The citation will look like (Smith
- 1926a/1985).
-\item[\qquad \textbf{old}:] The citation will look like (Smith [1926a]
- 1985).
-\end{description}
-
-If, \mymarginpar{\texttt{switchdates}} for any reason, simply
-switching the \textsf{date} and the \textsf{origdate} isn't possible
-in a given entry, then you can put \texttt{switchdates} in the
-\textsf{options} field to achieve the same result. Please take a look
-at the full documentation of the \textbf{date} field to which I
-referred just above, and also at \textsf{cms-dates-sample.pdf} and
-\textsf{dates-test.bib} for examples of how all this works.
-
-\mylittlespace The \colmarginpar{New!} \emph{Manual} specifies that
-\enquote{a list of works cited need not list newspaper items if these
- have been documented in the text} (17.191). This will apply mainly
-to \textsf{article} and \textsf{review} entries with
-\textsf{entrysubtype} \texttt{magazine}, and involves a parenthetical
-citation giving the \textsf{journaltitle} and then the full
-\textsf{date}, not just the year, with any other relevant identifying
-information incorporated into running text. In order to facilitate
-this, I have added a further switch to the \texttt{cmsdate} option
-\colmarginpar{\mycolor{\texttt{cmsdate=full}}} ---
-\mycolor{\textbf{full}} --- which \emph{only} affects the presentation
-of citations, and causes the printing of the full date specification
-there. You can use the standard \textsf{biblatex} \texttt{skipbib}
-option to keep such entries from appearing in the list of references,
-and you may, if your .bib entry is a complete one, also need
-\texttt{useauthor=false} in order to ensure that the
-\textsf{journaltitle} appears in the citations rather than the
-\textsf{author}.
-
-\mylittlespace As a final note, I should point out that the code in
-\textsf{chicago-authordate.cbx} allows \texttt{cmsdate} to be used in
-the document preamble as a general setting. This leads to a world of
-pain, so I very strongly advise against it, though I'm leaving it in
-for testing purposes.
-
-\subsection{General Usage Hints}
-\label{sec:hints:auth}
-
-\subsubsection{Loading the Style}
-\label{sec:loading:auth}
-
-With the addition of the author-date style to the package, I have
-provided two keys for choosing which style to load, \texttt{notes} and
-\texttt{authordate}, one of which you put in the options to the
-\cmd{usepackage} command. With early versions of
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago}, the standard way of loading the package was
-via a call to \textsf{biblatex}, e.g.:
-\begin{quote}
- \cmd{usepackage[style=chicago-authordate,strict,backend=biber,\%\\
- babel=other,bibencoding=inputenc]\{biblatex\}}
-\end{quote}
-Now, the default way to load the style, and one that will in the
-vast majority of standard cases produce the same results as the old
-invocation, will look like this:
-\begin{quote}
- \cmd{usepackage[authordate,strict,backend=biber,babel=other,\%\\
- bibencoding=inputenc]\{biblatex-chicago\}}
-\end{quote}
-
-If you read through \textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty}, you'll see that it
-sets a number of \textsf{biblatex} options aimed at following the
-Chicago specification, as well as setting a few formatting variables
-intended as reasonable defaults (see section~\ref{sec:preset:authdate},
-above). Some parts of this specification, however, are plainly more
-\enquote{suggested} than \enquote{required,} and indeed many
-publishers, while adopting the main skeleton of the Chicago style in
-citations, nonetheless maintain their own house styles to which the
-defaults I have provided do not conform.
-
-\mylittlespace If you only need to change one or two parameters, this
-can easily be done by putting different options in the call to
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago} or redefining other formatting variables in
-the preamble, thereby overriding the package defaults. If, however,
-you wish more substantially to alter the output of the package,
-perhaps to use it as a base for constructing another style altogether,
-then you may want to revert to the old style of invocation above.
-You'll lose all the definitions in \textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty},
-including those to which I've already alluded and also the code that
-sets the note number in-line rather than superscript in endnotes or
-footnotes. Also in this file is the code that calls
-\textsf{cms-american.lbx}, which means that you'll lose all the
-Chicago-specific bibstrings I've defined unless you provide, in your
-preamble, a \cmd{DeclareLanguageMapping} command adapted for your
-setup, on which see section~\ref{sec:international} below and also
-§§~4.9.1 and 4.11.7 in Lehman's \textsf{biblatex.pdf}.
-
-\mylittlespace What you \emph{will not} lose is the ability to call
-the package options \texttt{annotation, strict, cmslos=false} and
-\texttt{noibid} (section~\ref{sec:authuseropts}, above), in case these
-continue to be useful to you when constructing your own modifications.
-There's very little code, therefore, actually in
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty}, but I hope that even this minimal
-separation will make the package somewhat more adaptable. Any
-suggestions on this score are, of course, welcome.
-
-\subsubsection{Other Hints}
-\label{sec:otherhints:auth}
-
-Starting with \textsf{biblatex} version 1.5, in order to adhere to the
-author-date specification you will need to use \textsf{Biber} to
-process your .bib files, as \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ (and its more recent
-variants) will no longer provide all the required features. The
-previous release of \textsf{Biber} (0.9.5), however, contained bugs
-that made it tricky to use with \textsf{biblatex-chicago}. These bugs
-have been addressed in 0.9.6, so I recommend you upgrade to it and to
-the latest \textsf{biblatex} (1.7), which are designed to work
-together. This document assumes that you are using \textsf{Biber}; if
-you wish to continue using \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ then you need
-\textsf{biblatex} version 1.4c and, if you have any problems with the
-current release, possibly \textsf{biblatex-chicago} 0.9.7a.
-
-\mylittlespace If your .bib file contains a large number of entries
-with more than three authors, then you may run into some limitations
-of the \textsf{biblatex-chicago} code. The default settings in the
-package are \texttt{maxnames=3,minnames=1} in citations and
-\texttt{max\-bibnames=10,minbibnames=7} in the list of references. In
-practice, this means that an entry like hlatky:hrt, with 5 authors,
-will present all of them in the list of references but will truncate
-to one in citations, like so: (Hlatky et al. 2002). For the vast
-majority of circumstances, these settings are exactly right for the
-Chicago author-date specification. However, if \enquote{a reference
- list includes another work \emph{of the same date} that would also
- be abbreviated as [\enquote{Hlatky et al.}] but whose coauthors are
- different persons or listed in a different order, the text citations
- must distinguish between them} (16.118). The new
-(\textsf{Biber}-only) \textsf{biblatex} option \texttt{uniquelist},
-set for you in \textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty}, will automatically
-handle many of these situations for you, but it is as well to
-understand that it does so by temporarily suspending the limits,
-listed above, on how many names to print in a citation. Without
-\texttt{uniquelist}, \textsf{biblatex} would present such a work as,
-e.g., (Hlatky et al. 2002b), while hlatky:hrt would be (Hlatky et
-al. 2002a). This does distinguish between them, but inaccurately, as
-it suggests that the two different author lists are exactly the same.
-With \texttt{uniquelist}, the two citations might look like (Hlatky,
-Boothroyd et al.\ 2002) and (Hlatky, Smith et al.\ 2002), which is
-what the specification requires.
-
-\mylittlespace If, however, the distinguishing name occurs further
-down the author list --- in fourth or fifth position in our examples
---- then the default settings would produce citations with all 4 or 5
-names printed, which can become awkwardly long. In such a situation,
-you can provide \textsf{shortauthor} fields that look like this:
-\{\{Hlatky et al., \textbackslash mkbibquote\{Quality of Life,\}\}\}
-and \{\{Hlatky et al., \textbackslash mkbibquote\{Depressive
-Symptoms,\}\}\}, using a shortened title to distinguish the
-references. This would produce (Hlatky et al., \enquote{Quality of
- Life,} 2002) and (Hlatky et al., \enquote{Depressive Symptoms,}
-2002), again as the spec requires. There is, unfortunately, no
-simpler way that I know of to deal with this situation.
-
-\mylittlespace One useful rule, when you are having difficulty
-creating a .bib entry, is to ask yourself whether all the information
-you are providing is strictly necessary. The Chicago specification is
-a very full one, but the \emph{Manual} is actually, in many
-circumstances, fairly relaxed about how much of the data from a work's
-title page you need to fit into a reference. Authors of introductions
-and afterwords, multiple publishers in different countries, the real
-names of authors more commonly known under pseudonyms, all of these
-are candidates for exclusion if you aren't making specific reference
-to them, and if you judge that their inclusion won't be of particular
-interest to your readers. Of course, any data that may be of such
-interest, and especially any needed to identify and track down a
-reference, has to be present, but sometimes it pays to step back and
-reevaluate how much information you're providing. I've tried to make
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago} robust enough to handle the most complex,
-data-rich citations, but there may be instances where you can save
-yourself some typing by keeping it simple.
-
-\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
-
-\mylittlespace Scot Becker has pointed out to me that the inverse
-problem not only exists but may well become increasingly common, to
-wit, .bib database entries generated by bibliographic managers which
-helpfully provide as much information as is available, including
-fields that users may well wish not to have printed (ISBN, URL, DOI,
-\textsf{pagetotal}, inter alia). The standard \textsf{biblatex}
-styles contain a series of options, detailed in \textsf{biblatex.pdf}
-§3.1.2.2, for controlling the printing of some of these fields, and
-with this release I have implemented the ones that are relevant to
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago}, along with a couple that Scot requested and
-that may be of more general usefulness. There is also a general
-option to excise with one command all the fields under consideration
--- please see section~\ref{sec:authpreset} above.
-
-\mylittlespace Finally, allow me to reiterate what Philipp Lehman says
-in \textsf{biblatex.pdf}, to wit, use \textsf{bibtex8}, rather than
-standard \textsc{Bib}\TeX, and avoid the cryptic errors that ensue
-when your .bib file gets to a certain size.
-
-\section{Internationalization}
-\label{sec:international}
-
-Several users have requested that, in line with analogous provisions
-in other \enquote{American} \textsf{biblatex} styles (e.g.,
-\textsf{biblatex-apa} and \textsf{biblatex-mla}), I include facilities
-for producing a Chicago-like style in other languages. I have
-supplied three lbx files, \textsf{cms-german.lbx}, its clone
-\textsf{cms-ngerman.lbx}, and \textsf{cms-french.lbx}, in at least
-partial fulfillment of this request. For this release, Baldur
-Kristinsson has very kindly provided
-\mycolor{\textsf{cms-icelandic.lbx}} for speakers of that language,
-while Håkon Malmedal has equally kindly provided
-\mycolor{\textsf{cms-norsk.lbx}},
-\mycolor{\textsf{cms-norwegian.lbx}}, and
-\mycolor{\textsf{cms-nynorsk.lbx}}. I have added
-\mycolor{\textsf{cms-british.lbx}} in order to simplify and to improve
-the package's handling of non-American typographical conventions in
-English. This means that all --- or at least most --- of the
-Chicago-specific bibstrings are now available for documents and
-reference apparatuses written in these languages, with, as I intend,
-more languages to follow, limited mainly by my finite time and
-even-more-finite competence. (If you would like to provide bibstrings
-for a language in which you want to work, or indeed correct
-deficiencies in the lbx files contained in the package, please contact
-me.)
-
-\mylittlespace Using \mymarginpar{\textbf{babel}} these facilities is
-fairly simple. By default, and this functionality remains the same as
-it was in the previous release of \textsf{biblatex-chicago}, calls to
-\cmd{DeclareLanguage\-Mapping} in \textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty} will
-automatically load the American strings, and also \textsf{biblatex's}
-American-style punctuation tracking, when you:
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item Load \textsf{babel} with \texttt{american} as the main text
- language.
-\item Load \textsf{babel} with \texttt{english} as the main text
- language.
-\item[] \qquad \emph{or}
-\item Do not load \textsf{babel} at all.
-\end{enumerate}
-(This last is a change from the \textsf{biblatex} defaults --- cp.\
-§~3.9.1 in \textsf{biblatex.pdf} --- but it seems to me reasonable, in
-an American citation style, to expect this arrangement to work well
-for the majority of users.)
-
-\mylittlespace If, \colmarginpar{New!} for whatever reason, you wanted
-to use \textsf{biblatex-chicago} but retain British typographical
-conventions --- punctuation outside of quotation marks, outer quotes
-single rather than double, etc.\ --- then you no longer need to follow
-the complicated rules outlined in previous releases of
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago}. Instead, simply load \textsf{babel} with
-the \texttt{british} option.
-
-\mylittlespace If you want to use French, German, Icelandic, or
-Norwegian strings in the reference apparatus, then you can load
-\textsf{babel} with \texttt{french}, \texttt{german},
-\texttt{icelandic}, \texttt{ngerman}, \texttt{norsk}, or
-\texttt{nynorsk} as the main document language. You no longer need
-any calls to \cmd{DeclareLanguageMapping} in your document preamble,
-since \textsf{bib\-latex-chicago.sty} now automatically provides these
-if you load the package in the standard way.
-
-\mylittlespace You can also define which bibstrings to use on an
-entry-by-entry basis by using the \textsf{hyphenation} field in your
-bib file, but you will have to make sure that the Chicago-specific
-strings for the given language are loaded using a
-\cmd{DeclareLanguageMapping} call in the preamble. Indeed, if
-\texttt{american} isn't the main text language when loading
-\textsf{babel}, then in order to have access to those strings you'll
-need \cmd{DeclareLanguageMapping\{american\}\{cms-american\}} in your
-preamble, as \textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty} won't load it for you.
-
-\mylittlespace Three other hints may be in order here. Please note,
-first, that I haven't altered the standard punctuation procedures used
-in any of the other available languages, so commas and full stops will
-appear outside of quotation marks, and those quotation marks
-themselves will be language-specific. If, for whatever reason, you
-wish to follow the Chicago specification and move punctuation inside
-quotation marks, then you'll need a declaration of this sort in your
-preamble:
-
-\begin{quote}
- \cmd{DefineBibliographyExtras\{german\}\{\%}\\
- \hspace*{2em}\cmd{DeclareQuotePunctuation\{.,\}\}}
-\end{quote}
-
-Second, depending on the nature of your bibliography database, it will
-only rarely be possible to process the same bib file in different
-languages and obtain completely satisfactory results. Fields like
-\textsf{note} and \textsf{addendum} will often contain
-language-specific information that won't be translated when you switch
-languages, so manual intervention will be necessary. If you suspect
-you may have a need to use the same bib file in different languages,
-you can minimize the amount of manual intervention required by using
-the bibstrings defined either by \textsf{biblatex} or by
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago}. Here, a quick read through
-\textsf{notes-test.bib} and/or \textsf{dates-test.bib} should give you
-an idea of what is available for this purpose --- see esp.\ the
-strings \texttt{by}, \texttt{nodate}, \texttt{newseries},
-\texttt{number}, \texttt{numbers}, \texttt{oldseries},
-\texttt{pseudonym}, \texttt{reviewof}, \texttt{revisededition}, and
-\texttt{volume}, and also section \ref{sec:formatcommands} above,
-esp.\ s.v.\ \enquote{\cmd{partedit}.}
-
-\mylittlespace Finally, the French and German bibstrings I have
-provided may well break with established bibliographical traditions in
-those languages, but my main concern when choosing them was to remain
-as close as possible to the quirks of the Chicago specification. I
-have entirely relied on the judgment of the creators of the Icelandic
-and Norwegian localizations in those instances. If you have strong
-objections to any of the strings, or indeed to any of my formatting
-decisions, please let me know.
-
-\section{One .bib Database, Two Chicago Styles}
-\label{sec:twostyles}
-
-I have, when designing this package, attempted to keep at least half
-an eye on the possibility that users might want to re-use a .bib
-database in documents using the two different Chicago styles. I have
-no idea whether this will even be a common concern, but I thought I
-might gather in this section the issues that a hypothetical user might
-face. The two possible conversion vectors are by no means
-symmetrical, so I provide two lists, items within the lists appearing
-in no particular order. These may well be incomplete, so any
-additions are welcome.
-
-\subsection{Notes -> Author-Date }
-\label{sec:conv:notesauth}
-
-This is, I believe, the simpler conversion, as most well-constructed
-.bib entries for the notes \& bibliography style will nearly
-\enquote{just work} in author-date, but here are a few caveats
-nonetheless:
-
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item You'll need curly brackets in titles, subtitles, etc., to
- protect capitalization in the sentence-style defaults of
- author-date.
-\item You may need to reevaluate your use of shorthands, given that by
- default the author-date style uses them in place of authors rather
- than in place of the whole citation. The preamble option
- \textsf{cmslos=false} may help, but this may leave your document
- out-of-spec.
-\item The potential problem with multiple author lists containing more
- than three names doesn't arise in the notes \& bibliography style,
- so the \textsf{shortauthor} fields in such entries may need
- alteration according to the instructions in
- section~\ref{sec:otherhints:auth} above.
-\item Date presentation is relatively simple in notes \& bibliography,
- but you'll need to contemplate the \texttt{cmsdate} options from
- section~\ref{sec:authentryopts} when doing the conversion to
- author-date.
-\end{enumerate}
-
-\subsection{Author-date -> Notes}
-\label{sec:conv:authnotes}
-
-It is my impression that an author-date .bib database is somewhat
-easier to construct in the first instance, but subsequently converting
-it to notes \& bibliography is a little more onerous. Here are some
-of the things you may need to address:
-
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item If you've decided against using the \cmd{partedit} macro and
- friends from section~\ref{sec:formatting:authdate} above, commands
- not strictly necessary for author-date, you'll need to insert them
- now.
-\item In general, you need to be more careful in notes \& bibliography
- about capitalization issues. Fields which only appear once in
- author-date --- in the list of references --- may appear in both
- long notes and in the bibliography, in different syntactic contexts,
- so a quick perusal of the documentation of the \cmd{autocap} macro
- in section~\ref{sec:formatting:authdate} above may help.
-\item You also need to be more careful about the use of abbreviations,
- e.g., in journal names, where the author-date style is more liberal
- in their use than the notes \&\ bibliography style. (Cf.\ 17.159.)
- The bibstrings mechanism and package options sort much of this out
- automatically, but not all.
-\item Although you can get away with the \textsf{article} type for all
- sorts of periodical entries in author-date, you'll need the
- \textsf{review} type for notes \& bibliography. Any
- well-constructed \textsf{review} entry should work just fine in
- author-date, so this is a one-time conversion. Please see the
- documentation in section~\ref{sec:entrytypes},
- s.vv. \enquote{article} and \enquote{review,} above.
-\item The \textsf{shorttitle} field is used extensively in notes \&
- bibliography to keep short notes short, so you may find that you
- need to add a fair number of these to an author-date database. In
- general this field is ignored by the latter style, so this, too,
- will be a one-time conversion.
-\item You may need to add \textsf{letter} entries if you are citing
- just one letter from a published collection. See
- section~\ref{sec:entrytypes}, s.v. \enquote{letter,} above.
-\item The default shorthand presentation differs from one style to the
- other. You may need to reconsider how you use this field when
- making the conversion.
-\item As I explained above in section~\ref{sec:entryfields}, s.v.\
- \enquote{date,} I have included compatibility code in
- \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} for the \texttt{cmsdate} (silently
- ignored) and \texttt{switchdates} options, along with the automatic
- mechanism for reversing \textsf{date} and \textsf{origdate}. This
- means that you can, in theory, leave all of this alone in your .bib
- file when making the conversion, though I'm retaining the right to
- revise this if the code in question demonstrably interferes with the
- functioning of the notes \&\ bibliography style.
-\end{enumerate}
-
-\section{Interaction with Other Packages}
-\label{sec:otherpacks}
-
-For \mymarginpar{\textbf{endnotes}} users of the \textsf{endnotes}
-package --- or of \textsf{pagenote} --- \textsf{biblatex} 0.9 offers
-considerably enhanced functionality. Please read Lehman's RELEASE
-file and the documentation of the \texttt{notetype} option in
-\textsf{biblatex.pdf} §~3.1.2.1.
-
-\mylittlespace Another \mymarginpar{\textbf{memoir}} problem I have
-found occurs because the \textsf{memoir} class provides its own
-commands for the formatting of foot- and end-note marks. By default,
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago} uses superscript numbers in the text, and
-in-line numbers in foot- or end-notes, but I have turned this off when
-the \textsf{memoir} class is loaded, reasoning that users of that
-package may well have their own ideas about such formatting.
-
-\mylittlespace The \mymarginpar{\textbf{ragged2e}} footnote mark code
-I've just mentioned also causes problems for the \textsf{rag\-ged2e}
-package, but in this case a simple workaround is to load
-\textsf{biblatex} \emph{after} you've loaded \textsf{ragged2e} in your
-document preamble.
-
-%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
-
-\mylittlespace Nick \mymarginpar{\textbf{Xe\LaTeX}} Andrewes alerted
-me to problems that appeared when he used the Xe\LaTeX\ engine to
-process his files. These included spurious punctuation after
-quotation marks in some situations, and also failures in the automatic
-capitalization routines. Some of these problems disappeared when I
-switched to using Lehman's punctuation-tracking code for
-\enquote{American} styles, but some remained. A bug report from
-J. P. E.~Harper-Scott suggested a new way of addressing the issue, and
-the newest version of Lehman's \textsf{csquotes} package (4.4)
-incorporates a full fix. This, thankfully, doesn't require turning
-off any of Xe\LaTeX 's features, and indeed merely involves upgrading
-to the latest version of \textsf{csquotes}, which I recommend doing in
-any case. Compatibility with the EU1 encoding is now standard in that
-package.
-
-\section{TODO \&\ Known Bugs}
-\label{sec:bugs}
-
-This release, belatedly, implements the specifications of the 16th
-edition of the \emph{Chicago Manual of Style}. I am maintaining the
-15th-edition styles for those who may need them, but the majority of
-my time will now be devoted to improving, and extending the scope of,
-the styles devoted to the most recent edition. I encourage all users
-of the notes \&\ bibliography style to upgrade as soon as possible,
-and any users of the author-date style who don't require the (until
-now) traditional title formatting should do the same. The next
-release will contain an author-date style that allows you to maintain
-that title formatting while switching in all other respects to the
-latest specification. If you still have feature requests for the
-older specification, I'll do what I can to include them.
-
-\mylittlespace Regardless of which edition you are considering, there
-are a number of things I haven't implemented. The solution in
-brown:bre\-mer to multi-part journal articles obviously isn't optimal,
-and I should investigate a way of making it simpler. If the kludge
-presented there doesn't appeal, you can always, for the time being,
-refer separately to the various parts. Legal citations are another
-thorny issue, and implementing them would involve choosing a
-particular documentation scheme (for which there exist at least three
-widely-used standards in the US), then providing what would be, it has
-seemed to me, an entirely separate \textsf{biblatex} style, bearing
-little or no relation to the usual look of Chicago citations. Indeed,
-the \emph{Manual} (17.275) even makes it clear that you should be
-using a different reference book if you are presenting work in the
-field, so I've thought it prudent to stay clear of those waters so
-far. I have received a request for this feature, however, so when I
-have finished the updates for the 16th edition I shall look at it more
-closely. If you have other issues with particular sorts of citation,
-I'm of course happy to take them on board. The \emph{Manual} covers
-an enormous range of materials, but if we exclude the legal citations
-it seems to me that the available entry types could be pressed into
-service to address the vast majority of them. If this optimism proves
-misguided, please let me know.
-
-\mylittlespace Kenneth L. Pearce has reported a bug that appears when
-using multiple citation commands inside the \textsf{annotation} field
-of annotated bibliographies. As late as I am with the update to the
-16th edition of the \emph{Manual}, I shall attempt to address this in
-a future release. If you run into this problem, he suggests placing
-all the citations together in parentheses at the end of the
-annotation, though on my machine this doesn't always work too well,
-either.
-
-\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
-
-\mylittlespace Version 1.5 of \textsf{biblatex} revised the way the
-package deals with breaking long URLs and DOIs across lines. The new
-code is designed to deal as elegantly as possible with as wide a
-variety of cases as possible, but in a few of my test entries it has
-caused some line-breaking issues of its own. Depending on the nature
-of your cited sources, it may be useful for you to revert to the
-older, pre-1.5 \textsf{biblatex} behavior, something which is easily
-done by copying and pasting the old definition of the
-\cmd{biburlsetup} command into your document preamble. If you look in
-the preambles of \textsf{cms-notes-sample.tex} or
-\textsf{cms-dates-sample.tex}, you can see the redefinition and copy
-it from there, just to see whether it helps your situation.
-\textsf{Biblatex} 1.7 also now provides several new counters for
-tuning the formatting of URLs, and these may serve you better than the
-old code. I have tested them in \textsf{cms-dates-sample.tex} and
-they work well. Cf.\ \textsf{biblatex.pdf}, §~4.10.3.
-
-\mylittlespace The switch to \textsf{Biber} for the author-date
-specification means that \textsf{biblatex} now provides considerably
-enhanced handling of the various date fields. I have attempted to
-document the relevant changes in \textsf{cms-dates-sample.pdf} and in
-the \textbf{date} discussion in section~\ref{sec:fields:authdate},
-above, but it's possible the package may need some changes to cope
-with all the permutations. Please let me know if you find something
-that looks like a bug.
-
-\mylittlespace Recent versions of \textsf{biblatex} have introduced
-some new entry types for citing multi-volume works. These are largely
-aimed at those already using \textsf{Biber}, which provides
-much-improved functionality for the \textsf{crossref} field compared
-to standard \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ or \textsf{bibtex8}. Depending upon the
-time required to implement the changes for the 16th edition, these
-types may make it into the package for the next major release, or they
-may have to wait until the one after.
-
-\mylittlespace Roger Hart, Pierric Sans, and a number of other users
-have reported a bug in the formatting of title fields. This, as far
-as I can tell, has to do with the interaction between
-\cmd{MakeSentenceCase} and certain characters at the start of the
-title, particularly Unicode ones. It may help for the moment to put
-an empty set of curly braces \{\}\ at the start of the field, but I
-shall look into this further.
-
-\mylittlespace This release fixes the other formatting errors of which
-I am aware, though users writing in French should be aware of problems
-with the \cmd{partedit} command in section~\ref{sec:formatcommands}
-above. There also remain the larger issues I've discussed throughout
-this documentation, which mainly represent my inability to make all of
-\textsf{biblatex-chicago's} formatting functions transparent for the
-user, but thankfully Lehman's superb punctuation-tracking code has
-preemptively fixed a great many small errors, some of which I hadn't
-even noticed before I began testing that functionality. That there
-are other micro-bugs seems certain --- if you report them I'll do my
-best to fix them.
-
-\mylittlespace I haven't looked closely at the standard
-\textsc{Bib}\TeX\ style by Glenn Paulley, contained in
-the \textsf{chicago} package on CTAN, which implements the
-author-date specification from the 13th edition of the \emph{Manual}.
-If anyone is still using the style, and requires some compatibility
-code for it, let me know, and I'll look into it.
-
-\section{Revision History}
-\label{sec:history}
-
-\textbf{0.9.9g: Released \today}
-\begin{itemize}
-\item No changes to the 15th-edition styles.
-\end{itemize}
-
-\textbf{0.9.9f: Released August 15. 2014}
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Small changes to both styles so that they compile with the
- latest \textsf{biblatex} (2.9a). No other fixes.
-\end{itemize}
-
-\textbf{0.9.9e: Released January 29, 2014}
-\begin{itemize}
-\item No changes to the 15th-edition styles.
-\end{itemize}
-
-\textbf{0.9.9d: Released October 30, 2013}
-\begin{itemize}
-\item I have made just enough changes to the styles to ensure they
- compile the test files correctly, but I am marking them as
- \enquote{strongly deprecated,} and encourage all users to upgrade as
- soon as is practicable to the 16th-edition styles. In the next
- release, I shall mark them as \enquote{obsolete,} and they will
- receive no further updates.
-
-\end{itemize}
-
-\textbf{0.9.9c: Released March 15, 2013}
-\begin{itemize}
-\item No changes to either style, but I am marking them as
- \enquote{deprecated,} and encourage all users to upgrade as soon as
- is practicable to the 16th-edition styles.
-\end{itemize}
-
-\textbf{0.9.9b: Released December 6, 2012}
-\begin{itemize}
-\item I have updated calls to \cmd{DeclareLabelname} and
- \cmd{DeclareLabelyear} in .cbx files so that the package works
- correctly with the most recent version (2.4) of \textsf{biblatex}.
-\item I am grateful to Baldur Kristinsson for providing an Icelandic
- localization file for \textsf{biblatex-chicago}, called
- \mycolor{\textsf{cms-icelandic.lbx}}. You'll see if you look
- through it that it is still something of a work in progress, but it
- should cover most needs in that language very well. If you would
- like to fill in some of the gaps please let me know.
-\item I am also grateful to Håkon Malmedal for providing Norwegian
- localizations for \textsf{biblatex-chicago}, contained in the files
- \mycolor{\textsf{cms-norsk.lbx}},
- \mycolor{\textsf{cms-norwe\-gian.lbx}}, and
- \mycolor{\textsf{cms-nynorsk.lbx}}.
-\item I have added a new British localization
- (\mycolor{\textsf{cms-british.lbx}}) that should make it much
- simpler for users to produce documents adhering to that tradition.
- For further details on the usage of all these localizations please
- see section~\ref{sec:international}, above.
-\end{itemize}
-
-\textbf{0.9.9a: Released July 30, 2012}
-\begin{itemize}
-\item I have made a few changes to \textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty} to
- allow the package to work with the latest version (2.0) of
- \textsf{biblatex}. In all other respects this release is identical
- to 0.9.9. If you do use the package with \textsf{biblatex} 2.0,
- please let me know if there are issues I need to address. Thanks to
- Charles Schaum for alerting me to some of them.
-\end{itemize}
-
-\textbf{0.9.9: Released July 5, 2012}
-
-\mylittlespace \label{deprec:obsol} This release, for the first time,
-provides style files implementing the specifications of the 16th
-edition of \emph{The Chicago Manual of Style}. As I am continuing to
-maintain the older files, here follows a list of changes to the
-15th-edition styles since the last release:
-\begin{itemize}
-\item To continue using the 15th-edition styles, for whatever reason,
- please remember to specify either \texttt{notes15} or
- \texttt{authordate15} when loading \textsf{biblatex-chicago} in your
- preamble.
-\item For reprinted books, you can now present more detailed
- information about the original edition using the new
- \mycolor{\textbf{origlocation}} and \mycolor{\textbf{origpublisher}}
- fields. You can also use this field in \textsf{letter} or
- \textsf{misc} (with \textsf{entrysubtype}) entries to give the place
- where a published or unpublished letter was written. These uses
- apply to both styles.
-\item Thanks to a patch sent by Kazuo Teramoto, you can now take
- advantage of \textsf{biblatex's} facilities for citing
- \mycolor{\textbf{eprint}} resources. There is also a new
- \mycolor{\texttt{eprint}} option, set to \texttt{true} by default,
- which controls the printing of this field in the author-date style.
- You can set the option both in the preamble and in the
- \textsf{options} field of individual entries. The field will always
- print in \textbf{online} entries.
-\item I have added a new citation command,
- \mycolor{\cmd{citejournal}}, to the notes \&\ bibliography style to
- allow you to present journal articles using an alternative short
- note form, which may be a clearer form of reference in certain
- circumstances. Such short notes will present the name of the
- \textsf{author}, the \textsf{journaltitle}, and the \textsf{volume}
- number.
-\item I have included a very slightly modified version of the standard
- \textsf{biblatex} \cmd{citeauthor} command, which may be useful for
- references to works from classical antiquity.
-\item I have added a new \texttt{cmsdate=\mycolor{full}} switch to the
- author-date style, which only affects citations in the text, and
- means that a full date specification will appear there, rather than
- just the year. If you follow the \emph{Manual's} recommendations
- concerning newspaper and magazine articles only appearing in running
- text and not in the reference list, this option will help.
-\item I have provided a new option, \mycolor{\texttt{headline}}, which
- turns off the automatic transformations that produce sentence-style
- capitalization in the title fields of the author-date style. If you
- set this option, the word case in your title fields will not be
- changed in any way, that is, this doesn't automatically transform
- your titles into headline-style, but rather allows the .bib file to
- determine capitalization.
-\item Following a request by Kenneth Pearce, I have added new
- facilities for presenting \textbf{shorthands} in the author-date
- style. There are two new \texttt{bibenvi\-ronments} which you can set
- using the \texttt{env} option to the \cmd{printshorthands} command:
- \mycolor{\texttt{losnotes}} formats the list of shorthands so that
- it can be presented in a footnote, while
- \mycolor{\texttt{losendnotes}} does the same for endnotes. There is
- also a new preamble option, \mycolor{\texttt{shorthandfull}}, which
- prints the full bibliographical information of each entry inside the
- list of shorthands, allowing such a list effectively to replace a
- list of references. You need to set the \texttt{cmslos=false}
- option as well in order for this to work.
-\item Thanks to a coding suggestion from Gildas Hamel, I have
- redefined the \cmd{bibnamedash} in \textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty},
- which should now by default look a little better in a wider variety
- of fonts.
-\item At the request of Baldur Kristinsson, I have added
- \cmd{DeclareLanguageMap\-ping} commands to
- \textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty} for all the languages
- \textsf{biblatex-chicago} currently provides. If you load the style
- in the standard way, you no longer need to provide these mappings
- manually yourself.
-\item I have improved the date handling in both styles, particularly
- with regard to date ranges.
-\end{itemize}
-
-\textbf{0.9.8d: Released November 15, 2011}
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Some minor fixes to both styles for compatibility with
- \textsf{biblatex} 1.7.
-\item Kenneth Pearce found an error in the formatting of
- \textsf{bookinbook} titles in the author-date style's list of
- shorthands. This should work properly now.
-\item Jonathan Robinson spotted some inconsistencies in the way the
- notes \&\ bibliography style interacts with the \textsf{hyperref}
- package. Following his suggestion, short notes now point to long
- notes when the latter are available, but to bibliography entries
- instead when you have set the \texttt{short} option.
-\end{itemize}
-
-%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
-
-\textbf{0.9.8c: Released October 12, 2011}
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Emil Salim pointed out some rather basic errors in the
- presentation of \textsf{inproceedings} and \textsf{proceedings}
- entries, errors that have been present from the first release of the
- style(s). These should now, belatedly, have been put right.
-\item Minor improvements to coding and documentation.
-\end{itemize}
-
-\textbf{0.9.8b: Released September 29, 2011}
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Bad Dates: Christian Boesch alerted me to some date-formatting
- errors produced when using the styles with the \texttt{german}
- option to \textsf{babel}. A little further investigation revealed
- similar problems with \texttt{french}, and before long it became
- clear that date handling in \textsf{biblatex-chicago} was generally,
- and significantly, sub-optimal. The whole system should now be more
- robust and more accurate.
-\item The new date-handling code shouldn't require any changes to your
- .bib files, but users of the author-date style may want to have a
- look at the documentation of the \textsf{letter} and \textsf{misc}
- entry types, and of the four date fields, for some information about
- how the changes could simplify the creation of their databases.
-\item Various other minor improvements.
-\end{itemize}
-
-\textbf{0.9.8a: Released September 21, 2011}
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Fixed a series of unsightly errors in the author-date style,
- discovered while working on the pending update to the 16th edition.
-\item Fixed bugs uncovered in both the author-date and the notes \&\
- bibliography styles thanks to Charles Schaum's adventurous use of
- the \textsf{origyear} field.
-\item Added two new bibstrings to the cms-*.lbx files to fix potential
- bugs in some of the audiovisual entry types.
-\end{itemize}
-
-\textbf{0.9.8: Released August 31, 2011}
-
-\mylittlespace Obsolete and Deprecated Features:
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Starting with \textsf{biblatex} version 1.5, in order to adhere
- to the author-date specification you will need to use \textsf{Biber}
- to process your .bib files, as \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ (and its more
- recent variants) will no longer provide all the required features.
- Unfortunately, however, the current release of \textsf{Biber}
- (0.9.5) contains bugs that make it tricky to use with
- \textsf{biblatex-chicago}. These bugs have been addressed in 0.9.6
- beta, which is available for various operating systems in the
- \texttt{development} subdirectory of your SourceForge mirror, e.g.,
- \href{http://www.mirrorservice.org/sites/download.sourceforge.net/pub/sourceforge/b/project/bi/biblatex-biber/biblatex-biber/development/binaries/}{UK
- mirror}. (If, by the time you read this, \textsf{Biber} 0.9.6 has
- already been released, then so much the better.) Please see the
- start of \textsf{cms-dates-sample.pdf} for more details.
-\item The switch to \textsf{Biber} for the author-date specification
- means that \textsf{biblatex} now provides considerably enhanced
- handling of the various date fields. I have attempted to document
- the relevant changes in \textsf{cms-dates-sample.pdf} and in the
- \textbf{date} discussion in section~\ref{sec:fields:authdate},
- above, but in my testing the only alterations I've so far had to
- make to my .bib files involve adhering more closely to the
- instructions for specifying date ranges. \textsf{Biber} doesn't
- like \{\texttt{1968/75}\}, and will ignore it. Either use
- \{\texttt{1968/1975}\} or use \{\texttt{1968-{}-75}\} in the
- \textsf{year} field.
-\item In the notes \&\ bibliography style, and mainly in
- \textsf{article}, \textsf{letter}, \textsf{misc}, and
- \textsf{review} entries, previous releases of
- \textsf{biblatex-chicago} recommended using the \cmd{isdot} macro
- when you needed both to define a field and not have it appear in the
- printed output. This mechanism no longer works in \textsf{biblatex}
- 1.6, and while addressing the problem I realized that relying on it
- covered over some inconsistencies and bugs in my code, so from this
- release forward you will need to modify your .bib and .tex files to
- use other, more standard mechanisms to achieve the same ends, in
- particular the \cmd{headlesscite} commands and declaring
- \texttt{useauthor=false} in the \textsf{options} field. Please
- consult the documentation in section~\ref{sec:formatcommands}, s.v.\
- \enquote{\cmd{isdot},} for a list of example entries where you can
- see these changes at work.
-\end{itemize}
-
-Other New Features:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Fixed the \cmd{smartcite} citation command in, and added a
- \cmd{smartcites} command to, \textsf{chicago-notes.cbx}, so that the
- notes \& bibliography style no longer prints parentheses around
- citations produced using \cmd{autocite(s)} commands inside
- \cmd{footnote} commands. Many thanks to Louis-Dominique Dubeau for
- pointing out this error.
-\item Rembrandt Wolpert and Aaron Lambert pointed out an issue with a
- command (\cmd{lbx@fromlang}) that \textsf{biblatex} no longer
- defines, and Charles Schaum very kindly suggested a temporary
- workaround in a newsgroup post, a workaround that should no longer
- be necessary.
-\item Version 1.6 of \textsf{biblatex} no longer allows you to
- redefine the \texttt{minnames} and \texttt{maxnames} options in the
- \cmd{printbibliography} command, so I've defined
- \texttt{minbibnames} and \texttt{maxbibnames} in
- \textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty}, instead. These parameters have been
- available since version 1.1, so this is now the earliest version of
- \textsf{biblatex} that will work with the Chicago styles. Of
- course, if the (Chicago-recommended) values of these options don't
- suit your needs, you can redefine them in your document preamble.
-\end{itemize}
-
-\textbf{0.9.7a: Released March 17, 2011}
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Added \cmd{smartcite} command to \textsf{chicago-notes.cbx} so
- that the notes \&\ bibliography style will work with
- \textsf{biblatex} 1.3.
-\item Added bibstrings \texttt{byconductor} and \texttt{cbyconductor}
- to the .lbx files, mistakenly omitted in version 0.9.7.
-\item Minor fixes to the docs.
-\end{itemize}
-
-\textbf{0.9.7: Released February 15, 2011}
-
-\mylittlespace Obsolete and Deprecated Features:
-\begin{itemize}
-\item The \textbf{customa} and \textbf{customb} entry types are now
- obsolete. Any such entries will be ignored. Please change any that
- remain to \textbf{letter} and \textbf{bookinbook}, respectively.
-\item If you still have any \textbf{customc} entries containing
- introductions, prefaces, or the like, please change them to
- \textbf{suppbook}. I have recycled \textsf{customc} for another
- purpose, on which see below.
-\end{itemize}
-
-Other New Features:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item At the request of Johan Nordstrom, I have added three new
- audiovisual entry types to both styles, \textbf{audio},
- \textbf{music}, and \textbf{video}. The documentation of
- \textsf{audio} in sections~ \ref{sec:entrytypes} and
- \ref{sec:types:authdate} above contains an overview of the three,
- and the details for each type are to be found under their individual
- headings.
-\item I have transformed the \textbf{customc} entry type to enable
- alphabetized cross-references --- the \enquote{c} is meant to be
- mnemonic --- to other, separate entries in a reference list or
- bibliography. In particular, this facilitates cross-references to
- other names in a list, rather than to other works. In author-date,
- in a procedure recommended by the \emph{Manual}, this now allows you
- to expand shorthands inside the reference list rather than in a list
- of shorthands. In both styles, you can now provide a pointer to the
- main entry if a reader is looking an author up under, e.g., a
- pseudonym or other alternative name.
-\item I have introduced the \textbf{userc} field, intended to simplify
- the printing of the cross-references provided by \textsf{customc}
- entries. The standard \cmd{nocite} command works as well, but the
- additional mechanism may be more convenient in some circumstances.
-\item You can now provide an \textbf{eventdate} in \textsf{music}
- entries to identify, e.g., a particular recording session. It will
- be printed just after the \textsf{title}.
-\item In the notes \&\ bibliography style, I have now implemented the
- \textbf{shorthandintro} field, which allows you to change the string
- introducing a shorthand in the first, long note. It works just as
- it does in the standard \textsf{biblatex} styles.
-\item At the request of Scot Becker, I have added six new
- field-exclusion options to both styles, all of which can be set both
- in the document preamble and/or in the \textsf{options} field of
- individual .bib entries. Three of these --- \texttt{doi},
- \texttt{isbn}, and \texttt{url} --- are standard \textsf{biblatex}
- options, the others --- \texttt{bookpages}, \texttt{includeall}, and
- \texttt{numbermonth} --- are \textsf{chicago}-specific. See the
- docs in sections~\ref{sec:chicpreset} and \ref{sec:authpreset},
- above.
-\item At the request of Charles Schaum, I've added the
- \texttt{juniorcomma} option to both styles, which can be set in the
- document preamble and/or in the \textsf{options} field of individual
- entries. It allows you to get the traditional comma between a
- surname and \enquote{Jr.} or \enquote{Sr.}
-\item Fixed an old inaccuracy in the presentation of \enquote{Jr.} and
- \enquote{Sr.,} so that they now appear at the end of names printed
- surname first in bibliographies and reference lists.
-\item Thanks to Andrew Goldstone, I fixed some old inaccuracies in the
- syntax of shortened notes and bibliography entries presenting
- multiple contributions to one multi-author (or single-author)
- volume.
-\item I've altered the directory structure of the archive containing
- this release. Files were multiplying, and look set to multiply
- still further, so I've copied the structure used by Lehman for
- \textsf{biblatex} itself.
-\item Fixed an old bug, which I'd guess was triggered quite rarely, in
- the formatting of publication information in long notes.
-\item Fixed another bug in author-date where the colon separating
- titles and subtitles was in the wrong font. The \textsf{biblatex}
- \texttt{punctfont} option solved this.
-\item Fixed a punctuation bug in \textsf{InReference} entries in the
- notes \&\ bibliography style. Also fixed \textsf{title}
- presentation in \textsf{Reference} entries in author-date.
-\item Fixed some inaccuracies in the tests establishing priority
- between \textsf{date} and \textsf{origdate} fields. These arose
- when date ranges were involved, and it's possible I haven't yet
- addressed all possible permutations of the problem.
-\item Added several new bibstrings to the \textsf{cms-*.lbx} files for
- the new audiovisual entry types. This means that the
- \textsf{editortype} fields can now be set to \texttt{director},
- \texttt{producer}, or \texttt{conductor}, depending on your needs.
- You can also set the fields to \texttt{none}, which eliminates all
- identifying strings, and which is useful for identifying performers
- of various sorts.
-\item Minor improvements to documentation.
-\end{itemize}
-
-\textbf{0.9.5a: Released September 7, 2010}
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Quick fix for an elementary and show-stopping mistake in
- \textsf{biblatex-chica\-go.sty}, a mistake disguised if you load
- \textsf{csquotes}, which I do in all my test files. Mea culpa.
- Many thanks indeed to Israel Jacques and Emil Salim for pointing
- this out to me.
-\end{itemize}
-
-\textbf{0.9.5: Released September 3, 2010}
-
-\mylittlespace Obsolete and Deprecated Features:
-\begin{itemize}
-\item All the custom entry types --- \textbf{customa},
- \textbf{customb}, and \textbf{customc} --- are now deprecated. They
- will still work for the time being, but please be aware that in the
- next major release they will no longer function, at least not as you
- might be expecting. Please change your .bib files to use
- \textbf{letter} (=\textbf{customa}), \textbf{bookinbook}
- (=\textbf{customb}), and \textbf{suppbook} (=\textbf{customc})
- instead.
-\item If by some chance anyone is still using the old \cmd{custpunctc}
- macro, it is now obsolete. It really shouldn't be needed, but let
- me know if I'm wrong.
-\end{itemize}
-
-%\vspace{2\baselineskip}
-
-Other New Features:
-\begin{itemize}
-\item The Chicago author-date style is now implemented in the
- package, and is fully documented in section~\ref{sec:authdate},
- above.
-\item The default way of loading the style(s) has slightly changed.
- You should put either \texttt{notes} or \texttt{authordate} in the
- options to \textsf{biblatex-chicago}, e.g.:
- \begin{quote}
- \cmd{usepackage[authordate,more options%
- \,\ldots]\{biblatex-chicago\}}
- \end{quote}
-\item With the addition of the second Chicago style, I have thought it
- appropriate to alter both the name of the package and the names of
- the files it contains. The package is now \textsf{biblatex-chicago}
- instead of \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes-df}, and the following
- files have been renamed:
- \begin{itemize}
- \item \textsf{chicago-notes-df.cbx} is now \textsf{chicago-notes.cbx}
- \item \textsf{chicago-notes-df.bbx} is now \textsf{chicago-notes.bbx}
- \item \textsf{sample.tex} is now \textsf{cms-notes-sample.tex}
- \item \textsf{sample.pdf} is now \textsf{cms-notes-sample.pdf}
- \item \textsf{chicago-test.bib} is now \textsf{notes-test.bib}
- \item \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes-df.pdf} (this file) is now
- \textsf{biblatex-chicago.pdf}
- \end{itemize}
- The following files have been added:
- \begin{itemize}
- \item \textsf{chicago-authordate.cbx}
- \item \textsf{chicago-authordate.bbx}
- \item \textsf{cms-dates-sample.tex}
- \item \textsf{cms-dates-sample.pdf}
- \item \textsf{dates-test.bib}
- \end{itemize}
- The following files have retained their old names:
- \begin{itemize}
- \item \textsf{cms-american.lbx}
- \item \textsf{cms-french.lbx}
- \item \textsf{cms-german.lbx}
- \item \textsf{cms-ngerman.lbx}
- \item \textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty}
- \end{itemize}
-\item I have implemented the \textsf{pubstate} field, slightly
- differently yet compatibly in the two styles, to provide a simpler
- mechanism for identifying a reprinted book. In the author-date
- style, it is highly recommended you use it, as it sorts out some
- complicated formatting questions automatically. In the notes \&\
- bibliography style it isn't strictly necessary, but may be useful
- anyway and easier to remember than the old system. See the
- documentation under \textsf{pubstate} in
- sections~\ref{sec:entryfields} and \ref{sec:fields:authdate}, above.
-\item Users of \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} no longer need a
- \textsf{shortauthor} field in author-less \textsf{manual} entries,
- or in author-less \textsf{article} or \textsf{review} entries with a
- \texttt{maga\-zine} \textsf{entrysubtype}. The package will now
- automatically take an author for short notes from the
- \textsf{organization} field for \textsf{manual} entries and from the
- \textsf{journaltitle} field for the others. You can still use a
- \textsf{shortauthor} field if you want, but it's no longer
- necessary. (This also holds for \textsf{chicago-authordate}.)
-\item Date presentation in the \textsf{misc} entry type (with
- \textsf{entrysubtype}) has changed to fix an inaccuracy. You can
- now use the \textsf{date} and \textsf{origdate} fields to
- distinguish between two sorts of archival source: letters and
- \enquote{letter-like} sources use \textsf{origdate}, interviews and
- other non-letters use \textsf{date}. The only difference is in how
- the date is printed, so current .bib entries will continue to work
- fine, albeit with minor inaccuracies in the case of non-letter-like
- sources. See the docs on \textbf{misc} in
- sections~\ref{sec:entrytypes} and \ref{sec:types:authdate}, above.
-\item When only one date is presented in a \textsf{patent} entry ---
- either in the \textsf{date} or \textsf{origdate} field --- this will
- now always be used as the filing date. In
- \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes}, this makes a change from the
- previous (incorrect) behavior.
-\item I have included the option \texttt{dateabbrev=false} in the
- default settings for \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes}. This ensures
- that the long month names are printed, as otherwise recent releases
- of \textsf{biblatex} print the abbreviated ones by default.
-\item The provision of punctuation in \textsf{entrysubtype}
- \texttt{classical} entries has been improved, allowing the comma to
- appear before certain kinds of location specifiers even when citing
- works by their traditional divisions. See \emph{Manual} 17.253.
- (This applies to both Chicago styles.)
-\item The \textsf{number} field in \textsf{article},
- \textsf{periodical}, and \textsf{review} entries now allows you to
- include a series or range of numbers in the field, with the style
- automatically providing the correct bibstring (singular or plural).
-\item I have removed and altered bibstrings in the .lbx files to take
- advantage of the new \cmd{bibsstring} and \cmd{biblstring} commands
- in \textsf{biblatex}, and added one new string
- (\texttt{origpubyear}) needed by
- \textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate}.
-\end{itemize}
-
-\textbf{0.9a: Released March 20, 2010}
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Quick fixes for compatibility with \textsf{biblatex} 0.9a.
-\end{itemize}
-
-\textbf{0.9: Released March 18, 2010}
-
-\mylittlespace Obsolete and Deprecated Features:
-\begin{itemize}
-\item The \textbf{userd} field is now obsolete. All information it
- used to hold should be placed in the \textsf{edition} field.
-\item The \textbf{origyear} field is now obsolete in
- \textsf{biblatex}. It has been replaced by \textbf{origdate}, and
- because the latter allows a full date specification, I have been
- able to make the operation of \textsf{customa} (=\,\textsf{letter}),
- \textsf{misc} (with an \textsf{entrysubtype}), and \textsf{patent}
- entries more intuitive. The RELEASE file contained in this package
- gives the short instructions on how to update your .bib files, and
- you can also consult the documentation of those entry types above.
-\item The modified \textsf{csquotes.cfg} file I provided in earlier
- releases is now obsolete, and has been removed from the package.
- Please upgrade to the latest version of \textsf{csquotes} and, if
- you are still using my modified .cfg file, remove it from your \TeX\
- search path, or at the very least excise the code I provided.
-\end{itemize}
-
-Other New Features:
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Added the files \textsf{cms-german.lbx} (with its clone
- \textsf{cms-ngerman.lbx}) and \textsf{cms-french.lbx}, which allow
- the creation of Chicago-like references in those languages. See
- section \ref{sec:international} above for details on usage.
-\item Added the \texttt{annotation} package option to allow the
- creation of annotated bibliographies. This code is still not
- entirely polished yet, but it is usable. Please see page
- \pageref{sec:annote} above for instructions and hints.
-\item Added \textsf{biblatex's} new \textbf{bookinbook} entry type,
- which currently functions as an alias of the \textsf{customb} type.
- As \textsf{biblatex} now provides standard equivalents for all of
- the custom types I initially found it necessary to provide ---
- \textsf{letter}~= \textsf{customa}, \textsf{bookinbook}~=
- \textsf{customb}, and \textsf{suppbook} \& \textsf{suppcollection}~=
- \textsf{customc} --- it may soon be time to prune out the custom
- types to enhance compatibility with other \textsf{biblatex} styles.
- I shall give plenty of warning before I do so.
-\item In line with the new system adopted in \textsf{biblatex} 0.9,
- using the \textsf{editortype} field turns off the usual string
- concatenation mechanisms of the Chicago style. See Lehman's RELEASE
- file for a discussion of this.
-\item I have added support for the new \textsf{editor[a--c]} and
- \textsf{editor[a--c]type} fields, and they work just as in standard
- \textsf{biblatex}, though I'm uncertain how much use they'll get
- from users of the Chicago style.
-\item I have added many bibstrings to the .lbx files to help with
- internationalization. The new ones that you might want to use in
- your .bib files include: \texttt{pseudonym}, \texttt{nodate},
- \texttt{revisededition}, \texttt{numbers}, and \texttt{reviewof}.
- Please see section~\ref{sec:international} for a fuller list.
-\end{itemize}
-
-\textbf{0.8.9d: Released February 17, 2010}
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Chris Sparks and Aaron Lambert both found formatting bugs in the
- 0.8.9c code. I've fixed these bugs, and am releasing this version
- now, the last in the 0.8.9 series. The next release of
- \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes-df}, due as soon as possible, will
- contain many more significant changes, including those necessary for
- it to function properly with the recently-released \textsf{biblatex}
- version 0.9. In the meantime, at least version 0.8.9d should produce
- more accurate output.
-\end{itemize}
-
-\textbf{0.8.9c: Released November 4, 2009}
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Emil Salim noticed that the \emph{ibidem} mechanism wasn't
- working properly, printing the page number after \enquote{Ibid} even
- when the page reference of the preceding citation was identical.
- The fix for this involved setting \texttt{loccittracker=constrict}
- in \textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty}, something you'll have to do
- manually yourself if you're loading the package via a call to
- \textsf{biblatex} rather than to \textsf{biblatex-chicago}.
-\item Several users have reported unwanted behavior when repeated
- names in bibliographies are replaced with the \texttt{bibnamedash}.
- This release should fix both when the \texttt{bibnamedash} appears
- and what punctuation follows it.
-\end{itemize}
-
-\textbf{0.8.9b: Released September 9, 2009}
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Fixed a long-standing bug in formatting names in the
- bibliography. The package now correctly places a comma after the
- reversed name that begins the entry, using \textsf{biblatex's}
- \cmd{revsdnamedelim} command. Many thanks to Johanna Pink for
- catching my rather egregious error.
-\item While fixing some formatting errors that cropped up when using
- the newest version of \textsf{biblatex} (0.8h at time of writing), I
- also spotted some more venerable bugs in the code for using
- shortened cross-references for citing multiple entries in a
- collection of essays or letters. I believe this now works
- correctly, but please let me know if you discover differently.
-\item Joseph Reagle noticed that endnote marks (produced using the
- \textsf{endnotes} package) did not receive the
- same treatment as footnote marks. I have rectified this, placing
- the code in \textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty} so that you can turn it
- off either by using the old package-loading system or by setting the
- \texttt{footmarkoff} package option when loading
- \textsf{biblatex-chicago}.
-\item Updates to Lehman's \textsf{csquotes} package have rendered my
- modifications in \textsf{csquotes.cfg} obsolete. Please use the
- latest version of \textsf{csquotes} (4.4a at time of writing) and
- ignore my file, which will disappear in a later release.
-\item At the request of Will Small, I have included some code, still
- in an alpha state, to allow you to specify, in the bibliography, the
- original publication details of essays which you are citing from
- later reprints (a \emph{Collected Essays} volume, for example). See
- the documentation above under the \textsf{\mycolor{reprinttitle}}
- field if you would like to test this functionality.
-\end{itemize}
-
-%\enlargethispage{-3\baselineskip}
-
-\textbf{0.8.9a: Released July 5, 2009}
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Slight changes for compatibility with \textsf{biblatex} 0.8e.
- The package still works with 0.8c and 0.8d, as well.
-\end{itemize}
-
-\textbf{0.8.9: Released July 2, 2009}
-
-\mylittlespace Obsolete and Deprecated Features:
-\begin{itemize}
-\item The \textbf{single-letter bibstrings} (\cmd{bibstring\{a\}},
- \cmd{bibstring\{b\}}, etc.) are now obsolete. You should replace
- any still present in your .bib file with \cmd{autocap} commands ---
- see §~3.8.4 of \textsf{biblatex.pdf}.
-\end{itemize}
-
-Other New Features:
-\begin{itemize}
-\item The default way of loading the package is now with
-
- \cmd{usepackage[further-options]\{biblatex-chicago\}}
-
- rather than
-
- \cmd{usepackage[style=chicago-notes-df,further-options]\{biblatex\}}.
-
- Please see section~\ref{sec:loading} above for details and hints.
-\item Package-specific bibstrings have been removed from the .cbx and
- .bbx files and are now gathered in a new file,
- \textbf{cms-american.lbx}, which changes the way the package
- interacts with \textbf{babel}. It is now somewhat simpler if you
- want the defaults, but somewhat more complex if you require
- non-standard features. Please see section~\ref{sec:otherpacks}
- above for more details.
-\item Two new entry types have been added: \textbf{artwork} for works
- of visual art excluding photographs, and \textbf{image} for
- photographs. See the documentation of \textsf{artwork} for how to
- create .bib entries for both types.
-\item Added the new bibliography and entry option
- \textbf{usecompiler}, set to \texttt{true} by default. This
- streamlines the code that finds a name to head an entry
- (\textbf{author -> editor [or namea] -> translator [or nameb] ->
- compiler [namec] -> title}). The whole system should work more
- consistently now, but do see the \textsf{author} and \textsf{namec}
- documentation for improved notes on how to use it.
-\item Added the new bibliography option \textbf{footmarkoff}, to turn
- off the optional in-line (as opposed to superscript) formatting of
- the marks in foot- or endnotes. You only need this if you load the
- package with the new default \cmd{usepackage\{biblatex-chicago\}};
- users loading it the old way get default \LaTeX\ formatting.
-\item At Matthew Lundin's request, I have added the citation command
- \textbf{\textbackslash head\-lesscite}, which works like
- \cmd{headlessfullcite} but allows \textsf{biblatex} to decide
- whether to print the full or the short note.
-\item Fully adopted \textsf{biblatex's} system for providing
- end-of-entry punctuation, which should solve some of the bugs users
- have been finding. See section~\ref{sec:otherhints}, above, and do
- please let me know if inconsistencies remain.
-\item Added a modified \textbf{csquotes.cfg} file to address issues
- users were having when using the \textbf{Xe\LaTeX} engine in
- combination with \textsf{biblatex-chicago}. See
- section~\ref{sec:otherpacks}, above.
-\item Added \texttt{natbib} option to allow users of the default setup
- to continue to benefit from \textsf{biblatex's} \textsf{natbib}
- compatibility code. Thanks to Bennett Helm for pointing out this
- issue.
-\item Added a \textbf{shorthandibid} option to allow the printing of
- \emph{ibid.}\ in consecutive references to an entry that contains a
- \textsf{shorthand} field. Thanks to Chris Sparks for calling my
- attention to this problem.
-\item While investigating the preceding, I noticed failures when
- combining the \texttt{short} option with a \textsf{shorthand} field.
- The package now actually does what it has always claimed to do under
- \textbf{shorthand}.
-\item Many small bug fixes and improvements to the documentation.
-\end{itemize}
-
-To Do:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item The shorthand vs \emph{ibid.}\ question may need more careful
- addressing in some cross references, and also in relation to the
- \texttt{noibid} package option.
-\item Charles Schaum has quite rightly pointed out the inconsistency
- in my naming conventions --- \textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty} as
- opposed to \textsf{chicago-notes-df.cbx}, for example. I'm going to
- delay a decision on which way to go with this until a later release.
-\end{itemize}
-
-\textbf{0.8.5a: Released June 14, 2009}
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Quick and dirty fixes to bibliography strings to allow
- compatibility with \textsf{biblatex} version 0.8d. If you are still
- using 0.8c, then I would wait for the next version of
- \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes-df}, which is due soon. See README.
-\end{itemize}
-
-\textbf{0.8.5: Released January 10, 2009}
-
-\mylittlespace Obsolete and Deprecated Features:
-
- \begin{itemize}
- \item The \textbf{\textbackslash custpunct} commands are now
- deprecated --- Lehman's \enquote{American} punctuation tracking
- facilities should handle quoted text automatically, assuming you
- remember always to use \textbf{\textbackslash mkbibquote} in your
- database. If you still need \cmd{custpunct}, please let me know,
- as it may be an error in the style.
- \item With \cmd{custpunct} no longer needed, the toggles activated
- by placing \enquote{\texttt{plain}} in the \textbf{type} or
- \textbf{userb} fields are also deprecated.
- \end{itemize}
-
-Other New Features:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item At least \textbf{biblatex 0.8b} is now required --- 0.8c works
- fine, as well.
-\item I now \emph{strongly recommend} that you use \textbf{babel} with
- \enquote{\texttt{american}} as the main text language. See
- section~\ref{sec:otherpacks} above for further details.
-\item The \textbf{customc} entry type has been revised, allowing you
- to cite any sort of supplementary material using the \textbf{type}
- field instead of relying on toggles in the \textsf{introduction},
- \textsf{afterword}, and \textsf{foreword} fields, though these
- latter still work. The two new entry types \textbf{suppbook} and
- \textbf{suppcollection} are both aliased to \textsf{customc}, and
- therefore work in exactly the same way.
-\item The new entry type \textbf{suppperiodical} is aliased to
- \textbf{review}.
-\item The new entry type \textbf{letter} is aliased to
- \textbf{customa}.
-\item In \textbf{inreference} entries the \textsf{postnote} field of
- all \cmd{cite} commands is now treated like data in \textsf{lista},
- that is, it will be placed within quotation marks and prefaced with
- the appropriate string. The only difference is that you can only
- put one such article name in \textsf{postnote}, as it isn't a list
- field.
-\item I've set the new \textsf{biblatex} option \texttt{usetranslator}
- to \texttt{true} by default, which means entries will automatically
- be alphabetized by their \textsf{translator} in the absence of an
- \textsf{author} or an \textsf{editor}.
-\item A host of small formatting errors were eliminated, nearly all of
- them through adopting Lehman's punctuation tracker.
-\item In the main body of this documentation, I've added some
- \mycolor{\textbf{color coding}} to help you more quickly to identify
- entry types and fields that are either new or that have undergone
- significant revision.
-\end{itemize}
-
-To Do:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Separate out \enquote{options} from the basic citation
- \enquote{style,} using a \LaTeX\ style file. This is an
- architectural change recommended by Lehman.
-\end{itemize}
-
-\textbf{0.8.2.2: Released November 24, 2008}
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Fixed spurious commas appearing in some bibliography entries,
- spotted by Nick Andrewes. While investigating this I noticed a more
- general problem with punctuation after italicized titles ending with
- question marks or exclamation points. This will be addressed in
- forthcoming revisions both of \textsf{biblatex} and of this package.
-\item Nick also reported some problems with spurious punctuation in
- the bibliography when using XeLaTeX. I haven't yet been able to pin
- down the exact cause of these, but if you are using XeLaTeX and are
- having (or have solved) similar problems I'd be interested to hear
- from you.
-\end{itemize}
-
-\textbf{0.8.2: Released November 3, 2008}
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Fixed several formatting glitches between citations in multicite
- commands (spotted by Joseph Reagle) and also after some prenotes.
-\end{itemize}
-
-\textbf{0.8.1: Released October 22, 2008}
-
-\mylittlespace Obsolete and Deprecated Features:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item The \textbf{origlocation} field is now obsolete, and has been
- replaced by \textbf{lista}. Please update your .bib files
- accordingly.
-\item The single-letter \textbf{\textbackslash bibstring} commands I
- provided in version 0.7 are now deprecated. In most cases, you'll
- be able to take advantage of the automatic contextual capitalization
- facilities introduced in this release, but if you still need the
- single-letter \cmd{bibstring} functionality then you should switch
- to \cmd{autocap}, as I shall be removing the single-letter
- \texttt{bibstrings} in a future release. See above under
- \textbf{\textbackslash autocap} for all the details.
-\item The \textbf{userd} field is now deprecated, as \textsf{biblatex}
- 0.8 allows all forms of data to be included in the \textsf{edition}
- field. I shall be removing \textsf{userd} in a future release, so
- please update your .bib files as soon as is convenient.
-\end{itemize}
-
-Other New Features:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Updated the .bbx and .cbx files to work with \textsf{biblatex}
- 0.8. This most recent version of \textsf{biblatex} is now required
- for \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes-df} to work.
-\item Added the \textbf{usera} field, which holds supplemental
- information about a \textsf{journaltitle} in \textsf{article} and
- \textsf{review} entries. See the documentation of the field for
- details.
-\item Added the \textbf{\textbackslash citetitles} multicite command
- to fix a problem with spurious punctuation when multiple titles were
- listed.
-\item Added the \textbf{\textbackslash Citetitle} command to help with
- automatic capitalization of titles when they occur at the beginning
- of a note.
-\item Minor punctuation fixes in \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes-df.bbx}.
-\end{itemize}
-
-To Do:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Integrate \textsf{biblatex's} American punctuation facilities.
-\item Separate out \enquote{options} from the basic citation
- \enquote{style,} using a \LaTeX\ style file. This is an
- architectural change recommended by Lehman.
-\item Investigate and possibly integrate the new entry types provided
- in \textsf{biblatex} 0.8.
-\end{itemize}
-
-\textbf{0.7: First public release, September 18, 2008}
-
-\end{document}